GB-OS. User s Guide. Version 6.2. Tel: Fax Web:

Transcription

1 Version 6.2 GB-OS User s Guide GBOSUG Global Technology Associates 3361 Rouse Rd, Suite 240 Orlando, FL Tel: Fax info@gta.com Web:

2 Table of Contents Preface 10 About This Guide Conventions 11 Icons 11 About GTA Firewalls...12 What is a Firewall? 12 A GB-OS fi rewall system is: 13 Features 14 New Features 14 Standard Features 14 Optional Features 14 Support...14 Support Options 15 Software Updates 15 Additional Documentation...15 Initial Setup 17 Overview...18 Preparation...19 Registration 19 Retrieving Your Activation Code 19 Planning Your Network 19 Requirements 20 Setup by Temporary Peer Network 20 Powering On the Firewall 21 Entering Firewall Network Settings...22 Browser Compatibility 22 Connecting to the Web Interface 22 Using the Basic Setup Wizard 23 Entering Your Network Information Manually 28 Using CIDR Notation 29 Setting Your Time 29 Re-confi guring Your Computer 29 Placing the Firewall on the Network...30 Basic Setup Tasks 31 Basic Setup Tasks...32 Setting the Configuration Mode 32 Defining a Network 33 Entering the Host Name 33 Defi ning Logical Interfaces 34 DNS Setup 35 DNS Proxy vs. DNS Server 35 Confi guring the DNS Proxy 36 Date/Time Setup 37 Network Time Setup 37 Designating the Firewall as a NTP Server 38 System Clock 38 GB-OS Certificate Management 39 Defining Objects 39 Address Objects 40 Selecting the Address Object s Type 40 Using Regular Expressions 41 Default Address Objects 42 Bookmark Objects 42 Service Group Objects 42 Default Service Group Objects 44 Time Group Objects 44 IPSec Objects 44 Encryption Objects 45 Allowing and Denying Traffic 45 ii Table of Contents

3 Policy Sets 45 Allowing Inbound Traffi c 45 Blocking Outbound Traffi c 46 Country Blocking 46 Managing Policies 47 Tips for Using Policies 48 Using Host Names or DNS in Combination with Security Policies 48 Requirements 48 Method 1: 48 Method 2: 49 Verifying the Configuration 50 Navigation Menu Icons 51 Verifi cation Flags 51 Applying the Configuration 51 Importing/Exporting Firewall Configuration 53 Automatic Backup 54 Backup 54 Cloud Backup 54 USB Backup 55 Managing Cloud or USB Backups via the Web Interface 55 Restoring Backups 56 Downloading Backups 56 Deleting Backups 56 Restoring Backups Via the Console 56 Cloud or USB Device Directory 56 High Availability and Automatic Backup 56 Advanced Setup Tasks 58 Advanced Setup Tasks...59 Firewall User Account and Group Setup 59 Creating User Accounts 59 Download User Mobile Confi guration 60 Creating Groups 60 Creating an Administrator Group 61 Configuring Remote Administration 62 Lockout 63 Remote Administration 63 Changing the Remote Administration Port 63 Encryption 64 Policy Compatibility 64 Authentication Setup 66 GTA Authentication 68 Using GTA Authentication on a GTA Firewall 68 LDAPv3 68 Using LDAPv3 on a GTA Firewall 68 RADIUS 69 Using RADIUS on a GTA Firewall 69 Active Directory Single Sign-On 70 Requirements For Single Sign-On 70 Single Sign-On Server Installation on Windows 70 Confi guring Single Sign-On 70 PPP Setup 70 PPPoE Transport 73 PPTP Transport 75 DHCP Server 78 DHCPv4 78 DHCPv6 80 DHCP Relay 81 DHCP Relay Requirements 81 Example DHCP Relay 81 Confi guration 82 PSN to Protected DHCP Relay 82 Dynamic DNS Setup 84 DNS Server Setup 85 Confi guring the DNS Server 85 Creating DNS Domains 87 Routing Traffic 88 Alias Setup 88 NAT Setup 89 Creating Inbound Tunnels 89 Table of Contents iii

4 Creating Static Mappings 91 Allowing Static Mapping 92 Pass Through Setup 92 Security Policies 93 Creating Pass Through Policy Pairs 93 Defi ning Bridged Protocols 94 Protocol Defi nitions 94 Defi ning Hosts/Networks 95 Bridging Interfaces 96 Bridging Mode 97 BGP Setup 98 OSPF Setup 100 RIP Setup 103 Static Routes 105 Multiple Gateway Setup 106 Gateway Failover 107 Selecting Useful Beacons 107 Gateway Sharing 108 Policy Based Routing 108 Source Routing 108 Preferences 109 Defi ning the Internet Protocol 109 Defi ning Connection Timeouts and Limiting 109 Creating Advanced Security Policies 111 Detailed List View 112 Policy Preferences 112 Options 113 Automatic Policies 113 Address Spoof 113 Connection Limiting 114 Country 114 Doorknob Twist 114 Fragmented Packets 114 Invalid Packets 114 Unexpected Packets 114 Ident Option 114 Stealth Mode 114 TCP SYN Cookies 114 Advanced: Coalesce 114 Setting Notifications SMS 116 SNMP Trap 116 Alarms 117 Applying Traffic Shaping 117 Weight vs. Priority 117 Using Traffi c Shaping 118 VPN Setup 119 VPN Concepts 119 Authentication 119 Multiple Networks 120 Mobile Protocol 120 IPSec Objects 120 SSL Client and Browser Setup 121 PPTP & L2TP Setup 121 VLAN Setup 121 VLAN Terms and Concepts 122 VLAN Interface 122 VLAN IDs 122 VLAN Trunk 122 VLAN Switch 123 Creating a VLAN 123 SNMP Setup 124 Remote Logging Setup 125 WELF (WebTrends Enhanced Log Format) 126 Unix Facilities 127 Policy 127 NAT (Network Address Translation) 127 WWW 127 iv Table of Contents

5 Threat Management 128 Threat Management Intrusion Prevention System (IPS) 130 Running the IPS Setup Wizard 131 Confi guring the IPS Proxy 132 Confi guring Performance Tuning Settings 133 Confi guring IPS Policies 134 Filtering Displayed IPS Policies 135 Mail Proxy 135 Mail Proxy Policies 136 Defi ning White (Allow) or Black (Deny) Lists 139 RDNS (Reverse DNS) 140 Defi ning a Mail Abuse Prevention System (MAPS) 140 Content Filtering 141 Confi guring the Content Filtering Proxy 141 Enabling the Traditional Proxy 142 Transparent Proxy 142 Block Actions 142 Content Filtering Policies 142 Local Allow and Deny Lists 144 Content Blocking 144 Content Filtering Categories 145 Creating Advanced Content Filtering Policies 145 Monitoring Reports & Administrative Tools 146 Monitoring, Reports, and Administrative Tools Administrative Tools 147 Interfaces 147 Network Diagnostics 147 Ping 147 Trace Route 148 Packet Capture 149 Shutdown 149 Halt 149 Reboot 149 Release License 149 Audit Events Viewing Firewall Logs Viewing Activity Accounts 151 Authenticated 151 Locked Out 151 Sessions 151 Network 152 ARP Table 152 Flushing the ARP Table 152 Connections 152 Hosts 153 Routing 153 Statistics 154 Security Policies 154 Services 154 DHCP Leases 154 Flushing DHCP Leases 154 Threat Management 155 IPS 155 Mail Proxy 155 Anti-Spam 155 Anti-Virus 155 Statistics 155 Content Filtering 155 VPN 156 IPSec Tunnels 156 Reporting Report Configuration 157 Generating Reports 158 Scheduling Reports 159 Graphs 160 Table of Contents v

6 Preferences 161 Updating Your Firewall s Software Scheduling Checks for Automatic Updates 163 Performing a Manual Software Update 163 Troubleshooting 164 Troubleshooting Guidelines Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) Administration 167 Network Connectivity 168 Services and Options 171 Hardware 174 Other 175 Automatic Backup 175 User Interface 177 Reference A: User Interface Web Interface 178 Features 179 Web Interface Access 179 Characteristics 179 How to Access the Web Interface 179 Navigation and Data Entry 180 Menu 180 Verifi cation Icons 180 Main Window 181 Advanced Tab 181 Buttons and Icons 182 Screen Buttons 182 List Icons 183 Flags 183 Index Numbers 184 Pull Down Menus 184 System Overview Screen 185 System Parameters 187 Reference B: System Parameters How to fi nd your section: Configure Summary Apply Backup Change Mode Import/Export Runtime Options Update System Summary Information Activation Codes Contact Information Date/Time Notifi cations Accounts Summary Authentication Groups Remote Administration Users Network Summary Interfaces a Settings Aliases NAT Inbound Tunnels Static Mappings Pass Through 209 vi Table of Contents

7 Bridged Protocols Host/Networks Preferences Routing BGP Gateway Policies OSPF RIP Static Routes Traffi c Shaping Objects Summary Address Objects Bookmark Objects Encryption Objects IPSec Objects Service Groups Time Groups Reporting Security Policies Summary Country Blocking & Inbound, Outbound, Pass Through, VPN (IPSec, L2TP, PPTP, SSL Client) Preferences Services Summary DHCP DNS Dynamic DNS High Availability Remote Logging SNMP Threat Management IPS Proxy Policies Mail Proxy Proxy Policies Content Filtering Proxy Policies VPN Summary Certifi cates Preferences IPSec L2TP PPTP Preferences SSL Client Site-to-Site 244 Utilities 247 Reference C: Utilities GBAuth 248 GBAuth Download via Firewall Interface 248 Using GBAuth for GTA Authentication 248 Using GBAuth for LDAP Authentication 249 Using GBAuth for RADIUS Authentication 250 GTA SSOAuth 251 Using Active Directory Single Sign-On 251 Upgrading 253 Upgrading to GB-OS Based on the version of GB-OS your GTA firewall is currently running: 254 Upgrading from GB-OS 6.1.x 254 Updating Runtimes 255 Scheduling Checks for Automatic Updates 255 Performing a Manual Software Update 256 Table of Contents vii

8 Step 1: Generate GB-OS 6.2 Feature Activation Codes 256 Step 2: Load GB-OS 6.2 Feature Activation Codes Into the Confi guration 256 Step 3: Upgrade to GB-OS Upgrade Notes 257 GB-250 Rev A No Longer Supported 258 IPS Activation Codes 258 GB-Ware Compact Flash Adapters Boards & ATA/IDE Cable Compatibility 258 Adapter Boards 258 Conductor ATA Cables 259 Re-sizing Slices and Runtime Upgrades 259 Error Messages Upon Initial Reboot 259 GB-250 Upgrade Notice 260 Corrupt Object Names and Descriptions 260 viii Log Messages 261 Reference E: Log Messages System Notices 262 Hardware Errors 262 Failed Network Connectivity 262 Implicit Policies 262 Other Firewall Behaviors 262 Ping Flood/DoS Attack (ICMP Limiting) 263 TCP SYN Flood 263 Spoof Attempt 263 Stealth Mode Blocked Message 263 Door Knob Twist (Attempted Connect to Closed Port) 263 FTP Bounce 263 User Licenses 264 Maximum Firewall Users Exceeded 264 Maximum Web Filtering Users Exceeded 264 Confi guration Changes by User 264 Automatic Backup 264 Permission/Policy Notices 265 Allowed Connections 265 Inbound Security Policy 265 Open 265 Close 265 FTP Port Updating 266 Outbound 266 Open 266 Close 266 Successful Administrative Access Attempts 267 Denied Connections 267 Inbound 267 Outbound 267 Block By Country 267 Unsuccessful Administrative Access Attempts 268 Web Interface Compromise Attempt 268 Routing Notices 268 ICMP Types and Codes 269 ICMP Types 269 ICMP Codes 270 OSPF 271 Network Address Translation (NAT) 272 TCP 272 Open 272 Close 272 HTML Sessions 272 Open 272 Close 272 ICMP 272 Open 272 Close 272 UDP 272 Open 272 Close 272 Pass Through (No NAT) 273 Open 273 Close 273 Bridged Interfaces 273 Cabling Loop 273 Table of Contents

9 Bridged Protocols 273 Firewall Service Notices 274 Authentication 274 Expired Authentication Session 274 Authentication Denied Due to Closed Authentication Connection 274 Authentication Denied Due to Old GBAuth Version 275 Gateway Selector 275 Notifi cation from Gateway Selector 275 Intrusion Prevention System (IPS) 275 Connection Passed 275 Connection Dropped 275 Connection Reset 275 Mail Proxy Filtering 276 Delivered 276 Rejected Due to Source or Destination of Policy 276 Rejected Due to Exhaustion of Policies (Reject by Default If No Match Is Found) 276 Rejected Due to Reverse DNS 276 Rejected Due to MAPS 276 Rejected Due to Invalid Recipient 277 Connection Incomplete 277 Maximum Count of Threads Exceeded 277 Mail Proxy Anti-Virus and Mail Proxy Anti-Spam Options 277 Confi rmed Spam by Anti-Spam but Delivered 277 Confi rmed Spam by Anti-Spam and Quarantined 277 Virus Found by Anti-Virus and Cured Then Delivered 278 Virus Found by Anti-Virus but Delivered 278 Virus Found by Anti-Virus and Quarantined 278 Virus Found by Anti-Virus and Rejected 278 Headers 279 VPN 280 Security Associations 280 Mobile Client VPN Authentication and Connection 280 Web Content Filtering 281 Transparent Proxy 282 Traditional Proxy 282 Web Filtering Option 282 Glossary 283 Reference F: Glossary License Agreement Legal Notices...300

10 Preface 10

11 About This Guide The GB-OS User s Guide covers the configuration and use of GB-OS version 6.2. Organization of the chapters in this guide is according to common tasks. Exceptions to this rule include the Preface, Troubleshooting and Reference chapters. For the location of specific topics, please see the table of contents. Conventions A few conventions are used in this guide to help you recognize specific elements of the text. If you are viewing this guide in PDF format, color variations may also be used to emphasize notes, warnings and new sections. Bold Italics Emphasis Italics Publications Blue Underline SMALL CAPS Monospace Font Condensed Bold BOLD SMALL CAPS Icons Note Clickable hyperlink ( address, Web site or in-pdf link) On-screen fi eld names On-screen text On-screen menus, menu items On-screen buttons, links Note icons are points of interest GTA has chosen to highlight. These notes represent tips or additional information beyond standard instruction. CAUTION Caution icons are used to highlight important information which may affect the use of GTA products. Preface 11

12 About GTA Firewalls Global Technology Associates, Inc. ( GTA) has been designing and building Internet firewalls since In 1996, GTA de vel oped the first truly af ford able commercial-grade firewall, the GNAT Box. Now, GB-OS is the engine that drives all GTA Firewall UTM Appliances and GB-Ware firewalls. What is a Firewall? When creating or upgrading a computer network, security is an important consideration. Who should be allowed to see or change your data? What policies should govern the use of the network? You probably don t want unknown people using your resources without your consent. You may wish to restrict use, for example, to employees that have been given a login. You may wish to further protect sensitive data from accidental or malicious damage. And in a time when network attacks are increasingly common, you may also wish to provide your clients with additional peace of mind regarding security of customer data. After assessing these kinds of policy needs, it is important to choose a device that will help you apply your network security decisions. Many people mistake a router for a firewall. While many modern routers do have some firewall functionality, their primary task is as their name designates: to route network traffic. Firewalls differ because they apply sophisticated policy controls to traffic that is allowed to travel across the network. Because firewall applications also run alongside other software on your computer, which may have unknown vulnerabilities, firewall applications are also generally less effective than a dedicated firewall device. Firewall applications (which run on your computer) provide some protection. However, they may not be the most secure choice because of disparities in power and sophistication. This is especially true if your network must protect many computers, then it may also be more efficient to maintain a single firewall device rather than copies of firewall software installed on every computer. Firewall devices simplify policy application and provide additional strength by securing your network at the gateway level, before an attack can reach your internal network. As dedicated firewall devices, GB-OS systems are devoted entirely to network security. Unlike servers and computers whose many running software applications may inadvertently open your network to vulnerability, GTA Firewall UTM Appliances only run necessary security software. No unrelated applications run on them. An authorized user can log on only to configure and administer the firewall. By definition, the effectiveness of a firewall is determined by the traffic it denies. GB-OS is based on the basic firewall principle: that which is not explicitly allowed is denied. If all policies were deleted and nothing was explicitly allowed, a GTA Firewall UTM Appliance would deny all traffic, both inbound and outbound. 12 Preface

13 A GB-OS firewall system is: GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide A firewall that prevents unauthorized access to internal networks, while allowing authorized con nec tions to operate normally. A unified threat management appliance that protects your network from spam, viruses and unauthorized access. A virtual private network (VPN) gateway between two networks or a network and a mobile client using IPSec VPN standards; it supports many third-party IPSec-compliant VPN products. A network address translation (NAT) engine that allows unregistered IP address es to be used on the protected and PSN networks so that IP addresses are hidden from external networks and translated to the primary external network interface IP address. A network gateway that links network to pog ra phies (e.g. 10 Mbps to gigabit) and replaces a router in a PPP con fig u ra tion. A bridging firewall that links Ethernet networks together transparently like a bridge, while filtering IP packets as a firewall. An proxy that restricts access to your server. A DNS proxy or server that makes DNS requests or maintains a database of domain names (host names) and their corresponding IP addresses. A DHCP server that automates the assignment of IP addresses to host systems on locally at tached networks. Preface 13

14 Features GB-OS firewall software has a number of features to help you protect your network resources from unauthorized use. New Features GB-OS provides a graphical user interface accessed using a Web browser with an improved workflow and setup wizards. New and improved features in GB-OS 6.2 include: Place holder - List needs to be updated and edited IKE v2 Support IPSec VPNs do not re-start when adding new IPSec Tunnels or users Update for the wweb Interface to better handle modern browsers. Inbound and Outbound Country Blocking Policies Standard Features GTA s NAT (Network Address Translation) and Stateful Packet Inspection engine are at the heart of all GB-OS firewalls. These facilities, tightly integrated with the network layer, guarantee maximum data throughput, reliable NAT and unparalleled security. (Pass through policies allow the use of the firewall without NAT.) GB-OS version 6.1 features also include: proxy with anti-virus and optional spam prevention tools IPSec VPN (Virtual Private Networking) Encryption methods including DES, 3DES, AES, Blowfish and Camellia User authentication via the GBAuth utility and Active Directory Single Sign-On notifications and SMS messaging support Advanced routing protocols including RIP, BGP and OSPF DHCP and DNS services via built-in DHCP and DNS servers (available on select GTA firewalls) Transparent network access for standard IP applications Protocols including FTP, PASV FTP, RealAudio/Video, ICQ, AIM, online gaming, Net2Phone, PPP, PPPoE and PPTP Bridging for user-specified Ethernet protocols Safe access to servers from external networks using the PSN, GTA s enhanced DMZ network Secure remote logging using the GTAsyslog or a third-party syslog Default stealth (no ping) mode GB-Ware installation support via Virtual Machine packages PPTP and L2TP support Monitoring and data reports Automatic configuration backup with and Cloud and/or USB storage GB-OS administrators have a choice of two user interfaces: Web interface: A secure platform independent remote management interface providing comprehensive access to configuration options via a frames-enabled, SSL-compatible Web browser. Console interface: On-site serial or video fail-safe and firewall recovery access with limited configuration options. Optional Features Secure mobile remote network access with IPSec VPN clients filtering with Mail Proxy Anti-Spam and Anti-Virus Web Filtering subscription add-on to Content Filtering Firewall failover ability with H 2 A - High Availability (available on select GTA firewalls) VPN hardware acceleration (available on select GTA firewalls) 14 Preface

15 A variety of support offerings for firmware upgrades Support Installation ( up and running ) support is available to original owners who have registered their product. If you need installation assistance during the first 30 days of ownership, contact the GTA Support team by ing support@gta.com. Be sure to include your product name, serial number, activation code, feature activation code numbers for your optional/subscription features and if possible a Configuration Report. Installation support only covers installation and default configuration of the firewall. For further assistance, contact an authorized GTA Channel Partner or GTA Sales staff for information about support offerings. Support Options If you need support after installation and default configuration, a variety of support contracts are available. Contact an authorized GTA Channel Partner or GTA Sales staff for more information. Support ranges from support per incident to annual contract coverage. Other avenues for assistance are available through an authorized GTA Channel Partner, the GTA Firewall User Forum (forum.gta.com), or the GTA Web site ( Software Updates Once registered, you can view available updates in the GTA Online Support Center section of the GTA Web site ( Click on the serial number of your registered product to see if an update is available for that specific unit. Click on the DOWNLOADS link to view all available software versions. Software updates are also available through the GB-OS Web interface. Navigate to Configure>Configuration> Runtime>Update. If there are no updates, click CHECK NOW. All available updates will appear here. CAUTION Before updating, be sure to backup your confi guration. Additional Documentation For additional instructions on installation, registration and setup of a GTA product, see applicable Quick Guides, FAQs or technical papers. For optional features, see the appropriate option guide. Documentation is included on the CD shipped with new GTA products, and is also available for download from the GTA Web site. Preface 15

16 Note For the latest documentation, check the GTA Web site for current PDFs. These manuals and other documentation can also be found on the GTA Web site ( Documents on the Web site are either in plain text (*.txt) or portable document format (*.pdf) which requires Adobe Reader version 7.0 or greater. A free copy of Adobe Reader can be obtained from Document GB-OS User s Guide GB-Ware User s Guide Configuring IPv6 GB-OS Certificate Management GTA VPN Feature Guide Remote Access Configuration Guide IPSec VPN Client Configurations SSL Client & Browser Configuration Guide SSL Web Browser Guide SSL Client Install Guides L2TP and PPTP Configuration Guides Mail Proxy Feature Guide Content Filtering Feature Guide H 2 A High Availability Feature Guide Available Documentation Topics GB-OS features and Web user interface. GB-OS features and install for GB-Ware. IPv6 confi guration for GTA fi rewalls. Confi guration guide for utilizing certifi cates. VPN (virtual private networks) feature for site-to-site VPNs. Firewall configuration for various remote access methods. Specifi c client confi gurations for Windows, Linux, Macinosh and Apple devices. Firewall configuration for the SSL Client and SSL Browser. Guide for using the SSL Browser. Specifi c SSL Client install manuals for Windows, Linux, and Macinosh. Specifi c guides for both L2TP and PPTP installs and confi guration for Windows, Linux, Macinosh and mobile devices. anti-spam and anti-virus fi ltering feature. Content fi ltering optional feature. High availability optional feature. Hardware specifi cations, current documentation and examples 16 Preface

17 1 Initial Setup 17

18 Overview The Initial Setup chapter describes how to set up your new GTA Firewall UTM Appliance. Steps include registration, initial physical connection, entering network settings through the firewall s Web interface, and installation on your network. Instructions assume that the firewall is being added to an existing network. If you need help setting up a computer network, instructions for setting up a simple office network (LAN) can be found on the GTA Web site. This chapter s content reflects the Quick Guide included with all new GTA firewalls, but provides alternative methods and more detailed instructions. Expected completion time is approximately 30 minutes. Main steps include: 1. Preparation 2. Connecting Your Computer to the Firewall 3. Entering Firewall Network Settings 4. Placing the Firewall on the Network What you ll need: Firewall serial number Firewall and feature activation code(s) Internal and external IP addresses for your firewall Internal and external subnet masks for your firewall Gateway/default route IP address for your firewall DHCP or DNS information if your firewall has a static IP address A crossover Ethernet cable Your new firewall with its power cable or power adapter A computer with an Ethernet network card and compatible Web browser Note These instructions are for GTA Firewall UTM Appliances only, and do not apply to GB-Ware. See the GB-Ware Product Guide for installation and setup of GB-Ware fi rewalls. Any fi rewall use or administration described in later chapters assumes that you have completed this chapter s instructions or the equivalent instructions in the GB-Ware Product Guide, as appropriate to your fi rewall model. 18 Chapter 1: Initial Setup

19 Preparation Gather necessary information before proceeding with firewall setup. This includes any activation codes and network planning information such as IP addresses and subnet masks for the firewall s network ports. Registration In order to retrieve activation codes and receive software updates and technical support, you must register your GTA firewall. Registration also archives your valuable activation codes and serial numbers with GTA, protecting against their loss should your own records be lost or destroyed. In addition to qualifying you for installation support, your product reg is tra tion will allow GTA to inform you about software updates and special offers. 1. To register, visit Click on SUPPORT and then the SUPPORT CENTER link. 2. If you do not have an online support account, click the CREATE AN ACCOUNT NOW link and enter your information. Once the form is completed, click the SUBMIT button to save the profile. Enter your user ID and password on the login page. Click on the REGISTER A PRODUCT link. Enter your serial number and activation code, then click the SUBMIT button. To view your registered products, click the VIEW PRODUCTS link. Note If you cannot retrieve your activation code, or a code does not appear under VIEW PRODUCTS, please support@gta.com with a brief description of your problem in the body of the . Be sure to include the product s serial number and your online support account s user ID in the message subject. Retrieving Your Activation Code All GTA firewalls use an activation code to protect software from illegal duplication. Serial numbers and activation codes are included with the packaging. Should you lose records of your activation codes, registration allows them to be retrieved from the GTA Online Support Center ( under VIEW PRODUCTS. Activation codes are also available throughout the GB-OS Web interface at Configuration>Configure>Runtime>Upd ate. Select CHECK NOW if now updates display. The primary activation code is pre-installed in all GTA Firewall UTM Appliance models. Optional features require separate feature activation codes, available through the GTA Online Support Center. Planning Your Network These instructions assume that you have an existing network. If you do not yet have a network, simple network setup examples are available on the GTA Web site. To add your fi rewall to your existing network, you will fi rst need to determine a suitable place for attachment. Physical location can partly determine the effectiveness of the firewall in performing its role, so choose a location carefully. If your firewall will be performing a perimeter security role, defending your network from Internetsourced attacks, then consider placement between your Internet router/gateway and your LAN. If your firewall will be performing as an internal mediator or routing role on your intranet/lan, then consider placement between two internal routers. Chapter 1: Initial Setup 19

20 Once you have chosen a suitable installation location for your firewall, you will need to devise firewall network settings (IP addresses and subnet masks) for the firewall s connected ports. Correct network settings will vary according to the settings of attached devices. For example, many LANs consist of computers with private IP addresses, as defined in RFC 1918, such as xxx using a 24-bit subnet mask of ; in this case, a valid firewall IP address could be with a subnet mask of Note For more information on the basics of TCP/IP networking and how to plan a network, one recommended source is TCP/IP Network Administration, 3rd Edition by Craig Hunt from O Reilly and Associates. Connecting Your Computer to the Firewall First physically connect the firewall to your computer using the provided cables. Configure your computer to access the firewall s IP address, then add your network settings to the firewall. Then add your firewall to its intended place on the network. Connecting your computer to the firewall takes about 15 minutes. It assumes you ve already planned out your network, or have a network already set up. Requirements To connect the firewall, gather the following hardware: 1 crossover Ethernet cable to connect directly to the firewall or through a router; or 1 straightthrough cable to connect through a hub or switch (1 yellow crossover cable may be included; consult your package contents list) 1 external power supply or power cord (may be included; consult your package contents list) 1 computer with an Ethernet network card (NIC) In addition, you will need: IP addresses and subnet mask plans for all devices on your network Gateway/router IP address (default path for traffic going to the Internet or other external network) An understanding of TCP/IP networking Figure 1.1: Choosing the Correct Type of Ethernet Cable Setup by Temporary Peer Network Temporarily join a computer to the firewall s default network. This allows you to connect and configure the firewall s network settings to match your own network scheme, integrating it with your network. 1. Connect the computer s NIC to the firewall s NIC 0 using a crossover cable. (Alternatively, use a straight-through cable to connect the computer to the firewall s NIC 0 through a hub or switch.) Note NIC 0 is the Ethernet port/connector labelled with a zero (0) on the fi rewall s chassis. 20 Chapter 1: Initial Setup

21 2. Back up the computer s network settings, then temporarily change your computer s network settings (this allows you to access the firewall s default network): IP Address: Gateway/Router: Subnet Mask: DNS Server: none (or , if this field is required) Figure 1.2: Changing Network Settings to Match Firewall Defaults (Windows XP) Figure 1.3: Changing Network Settings to Match Firewall Defaults (OS X) 3. If necessary, reboot your computer to apply the network configuration. Powering On the Firewall 1. Connect the power supply to a power outlet. 2. Insert the power connector tip into the firewall. 3. If there is a power switch, turn the firewall on; if there is no switch, applying the power cable will cause the boot process to begin. The system will be operational in approximately one minute. 4. Verify your ability to connect to the firewall by pinging the default IP address of Preparation is now complete. Chapter 1: Initial Setup 21

22 Entering Firewall Network Settings The following sections will describe how to replace the firewall s default configuration with your own network settings. Browser Compatibility GTA recommends using an SSL-compatible and frames-capable browser to administer your firewall. CAUTION Administration of the fi rewall without SSL is insecure and may send sensitive information such as passwords in clear text. It is not recommended if you have a hub or other network device between your computer and the fi rewall appliance. Connecting to the Web Interface 1. Start a Web browser on your computer and enter the firewall s URL into the browser s location/ address field: 2. If your network and cables are set up correctly, you will be prompted with a security alert dialog indicating that the certificate authority is not one you have chosen to trust; that the security certificate date is valid; and that the name on the security certificate does not match the name of the site. Click YES, or if your alert differs, choose the selection that allows you to proceed. (You may establish your firewall s SSL certificate once you have logged on to the firewall.) Figure 1.4: Accepting the Firewall s SSL Certificate (Internet Explorer) 3. Next, in the login screen, enter the default user ID, fwadmin (all lower case). Then enter the default password, also fwadmin (all lower case). Click OK or press the return key when finished. Figure 1.5: Entering the Default User ID and Password CAUTION GTA recommends changing the default user ID and password to prevent unauthorized access. Passwords can be changed after logging in. 22 Chapter 1: Initial Setup

23 Using the Basic Setup Wizard GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide Upon initial login to the GTA Firewall UTM Appliance, you will be prompted with the Basic Setup Wizard, which is designed to facilitate the entry of basic network settings. The firewall has default settings which need to be changed to match your network settings. Based upon the information you enter, the Basic Setup Wizard will configure your firewall, generate a default set of policies and create a GB-OS CA and local certificate for administrator and VPN. Upon successful completion of the wizard the GB-OS Web interface will unlock, providing full access to configuration options. Before running the wizard, it may be helpful to print out and fill in the table which follows. Note When defi ning the IP address for network interfaces, a class C (24-bit) netmask will automatically be assigned unless a netmask is explicitly entered. For more information on assigning a netmask to your network and CIDR notation, see Using CIDR Notation later in this chapter. Table 1.1: Basic Setup Wizard Worksheet Field Description Value Serial Number Serial Number The fi rewall s serial number. This can be found on the card shipped with the fi rewall or physically on the fi rewall s label. Activation Code The fi rewall s activation code. This can be found on the card shipped with the fi rewall or retrieved online from the GTA Online Support Center. Administrator User ID The default administrator s user ID. Minimum 3 characters Password The administrator s new password. Minimum 4 characters Network Preferences Enable Enable support for IPv4 networks, or both IPv4 and IPv6 networks. Date/Time Date The current date. Time The current time. Enable NTP NTP (Network Time Protocol) is a protocol that assures accurate local timekeeping. Use of a NTP server is highly recommended. This fi eld is enabled by default. Server If the NTP checkbox is enabled, enter the NTP server s location, such as 0.gta.pool.ntp.org. Protected Interface IP Address Assign a static IP address and netmask for the protected interface in CIDR notation.... DHCP Server Select DHCP Server checkbox to enable the fi rewall s DHCP server for the protected interface. DHCP External Interface Type Select DHCP if you wish to have the fi rewall use DHCP to obtain an IP address. Select PPP to configure a PPP, PPPoE or PPTP connection for the external interface. To manually assign a static IP address, select STATIC. DHCP PPP STATIC Chapter 1: Initial Setup 23

24 Table 1.1: Basic Setup Wizard Worksheet Field Description Value DNS Server IP Address Default Gateway Host Name Host Name PSN Interface Enable IP Address DHCP Server Running the Basic Setup Wizard If STATIC has been selected for the external interface s Type, enter the DNS Server. If STATIC has been selected for the external interface s Type, enter the external interface s IP address. If STATIC has been selected for the external interface s Type, enter the Default Gateway. Enter the identifying host name for the fi rewall. GTA recommends using a fully qualifi ed domain name as the host name (e.g., firewall.example.com). To confi gure an optional PSN (DMZ) interface, select the Enable checkbox. Assign a static IP address and netmask for the PSN interface in CIDR notation. Select DHCP Server checkbox to enable the fi rewall s DHCP server for the PSN interface. If this is your first time logging in to your GTA firewall, you will be presented with the Basic Setup Wizard by default. Otherwise, navigate to Wizards>Basic Setup from the firewall s menu. 1. On the first screen of the Basic Setup Wizard, you will be prompted to enter the firewall administrator s contact information. Click the NEXT ARROW to continue Figure 1.6: Entering the Administrator s Contact Information 2. The next screen will allow for entry of the firewall s serial number and any activation codes for optional features that you purchased along with your product. Enter activation codes (hexadecimal characters only - 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, F) with dashes included. The serial number and activation code(s) can be retrieved from the GTA Online Support Center ( Click the NEXT ARROW to continue. 24 Chapter 1: Initial Setup Figure 1.7: Entering the Serial Number and Activation Codes

25 3. You will then be prompted to enter and confirm a new username and password for the firewall s default administrator account. The username must be a minimum of three (3) characters, and the password a minimum of four (4) characters. Click the NEXT ARROW to continue. Figure 1.8: Entering the Firewall Administrator s Password 4. The following screen pertains to Network Preferences. Select the type of network to support: either IPv4 or both IPv4 and IPv6. Click the NEXT ARROW to continue. Figure 1.9: Network Preferences 5. The next screen will configure the firewall s date and time settings. Although it is possible to manually configure the firewall date and time, it is highly recommended that you enable the NTP checkbox and enter an NTP server. Note For more information on confi guring Date/Time settings and the NTP service, see Date/Time Setup in Basic Setup Tasks. Figure 1.10: Configuring the Date and Time Chapter 1: Initial Setup 25

26 6. The next screen will configure the protected interface. A protected interface is the interface which is connected to the protected network. Select DHCP Server to have the firewall use DHCP to obtain the protected interface s IP address. The protected interface does not require a registered IP address. Click the NEXT ARROW to continue. Note Figure 1.11: Configuring the Protected Interface 7. You will then be prompted to define the external interface. The external interface is used to communicate to the external network, typically the Internet. An external interface requires a public or legitimate IP address (if attached to the Internet). Select DHCP to have the firewall use DHCP to obtain the external interface s IP address. Select PPP to configure a PPP connection for the external interface. Select STATIC to assign a static IP address, default gateway and DNS server to the external interface. Click the NEXT ARROW to continue. For more information on confi guring a PPP connection, see PPP Setup in Advanced Setup Tasks. Figure 1.12: Configuring the External Interface 8. The host name is the system name assigned to the GTA firewall. The host name is used to tag log messages and for creating SSL certificates. GTA recommends using a fully qualified domain name as the host name for your GTA firewall. A fully qualified domain name is the complete domain name for a specific computer (host) on the network, which is broken down to a host, domain and top-level domain (e.g. firewall.example.com). Host names must be unique. If your network DHCP servers make IP address assignments based on the system name, enter the host name, often assigned by your ISP. Click the NEXT ARROW to continue. Figure 1.13: Entering the Host Name 26 Chapter 1: Initial Setup

27 9. The next screen configures the PSN interface. A Private Service Network (PSN) is optional and may not be required for configurations such as intranets or for outbound access only. However, if you offer public access to servers (such as a Web server) the installation of a PSN interface is highly recommended. To configure a PSN interface, select the ENABLE checkbox, otherwise select the NEXT ARROW to proceed with the wizard. Select DHCP to have the firewall use DHCP to obtain the interface s IP address, otherwise select STATIC to assign a static IP address manually. The PSN interface does not require a registered IP address. Click the NEXT ARROW to continue. Figure 1.14: Configuring the PSN Interface 10. The final screen of the Basic Setup Wizard is a summary view of all entered settings. Please review your firewall s setup prior to committing the displayed configuration. To make changes to your basic setup, select the BACK button to return to the appropriate screen. Click the SAVE icon to save the displayed configuration, or select the CANCEL icon to abort. CAUTION Saving settings confi gured using the Basic Setup Wizard will erase any existing confi guration settings and will reboot the fi rewall if it is in Live Mode. Figure 1.15: Reviewing the Firewall s Basic Setup Completion of the Basic Setup Wizard will automatically create a new GB-OS CA and local certificate signed by the CA, and the NOTIFICATIONS section will set the TO ADDRESS as the CONTACT ADDRESS. Chapter 1: Initial Setup 27

28 Entering Your Network Information Manually Using the Basic Setup Wizard is the recommended method to initially configure your firewall. However, should you wish to enter your network information manually, select the CLOSE icon in the Basic Setup Wizard. Doing so will unlock the rest of GB-OS configuration settings. Navigate to the Configure category, click on Network to expand the menu, select Interfaces and then Settings. Only one external and one protected network interface is initially required to configure and test the firewall. The other interface(s) can be defined as any of the three network types: protected, external or PSN (Private Service Network, GTA s enhanced DMZ). To enter your network information: 1. Navigate to Configure>Network>Interfaces>Settings. 2. Enter the host name for the GTA firewall in the SETTINGS section. (e.g, firewall.gta.com) 3. To edit an existing logical interface, select the desired logical interface and select the EDIT icon. Otherwise, select the NEW icon to create a new logical interface. Enter IP addresses and netmasks (in either dotted decimal or CIDR notation) for your external and protected networks on each network interface. Disable the DHCP option on the external network interface if necessary. Enter the default route to your Internet router s IP address. 4. Once you have com plet ed the net work configuration, apply the changes by clicking SAVE. The firewall will then join the assigned network. For additional information, see Defining a Network in Basic Setup Tasks. CAUTION Closing the browser without clicking SAVE will cause entered data to be lost, and your fi rewall will remain in default confi guration. You will then need to re-connect to the fi rewall and re-enter the network information. Note If you changed the IP address of eth0 s protected network, the fi rewall will now be on a different logical network than your computer, and you will not be able to access the fi rewall from your computer. You must restore your computer s original network settings to regain access to the fi rewall. Figure 1.16: Entering Network Information 28 Chapter 1: Initial Setup

29 Using CIDR Notation GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide GB-OS uses CIDR (Classless Inter-Domain Routing) notation for subnet masks, not dotted decimal (e.g ). This provides more specificity when defining subnetworks. Dotted decimal, the most common notation, divides network size into 4 classes (A, B, C, or D) using fixed 8, 16, 24 or 32-bit IP address masks. Because network classes are defined by 8-bit-increment masks and only 32 bits are allowed for the whole bit mask, dotted decimal can only represent networks of 4 host capacity magnitudes. For example, a Class D with a 32-bit mask represents a subnetwork of up to 1 network host, Class C with a 24-bit mask represents a subnetwork of up to 254 network hosts, etc. Note To determine the limit of the number of hosts on your subnetwork (h), fi rst subtract your bit mask (m) from 32; then raise 2 by the power of your answer, and subtract 2: h = (2 (32-m) )-2 By using 1-bit increment masks (instead of 8), CIDR (also called slash (/)) notation can divide the network into 32 subnet sizes. (Subnet definitions, in dotted decimal format, are therefore more coarse, lacking the fine granularity of CIDR notation.) CIDR notation uses any number from 1 to 32 to determine network class (/32 representing one IP address). For example, the CIDR address /24 indicates that the first 24 bits are used for the network class. The /24 mask includes 254 hosts on the network, and is equivalent to (a Class C network) in dotted-decimal notation. Calculate a CIDR-based notation net mask by converting the dotted decimal net mask to binary and counting the ones. For a Class C network, the dotted decimal net mask is The binary notation of that net mask is There are 24 ones, so the CIDR notation would be /24. Using a net mask, the binary representation would be: The notation would be /28. You may also enter a host address that is defined by not including a bit mask (e.g ). This is equivalent to a /32 bit mask. To enter a r ange of addresses, use a hyphen (-) between the two extremes of the range (e.g ). If you prefer to not use CIDR notation, dotted decimal may still be used: enter the dotted decimal net mask after the forward slash (e.g / ). Setting Your Time Firewall logs record events and schedule time-based policies by current time. To ensure that the correct time is used, your GTA firewall should poll a network time (NTP) server. To enter which network time servers you would like to use, navigate to Configure>System>Date/Time. Under the Network Time section, check the ENABLE box and click the NEW icon to add a new network time server. Enter the domain name of a network time server (e.g. time.apple.com), then click the SAVE and OK buttons. For additional information, see Network Time Setup. Re-configuring Your Computer If you temporarily changed your computer s network configuration to connect to the firewall, restore the original configuration now. If you formed a temporary peer network during network configuration, disassemble it now; reconnect your computer to your network. Reboot your computer if necessary to apply the network configuration change. Chapter 1: Initial Setup 29

30 Placing the Firewall on the Network To place your GTA firewall on the network, it will need to be powered off. Connect your firewall to its intended place on your network. (In most cases, this will connect the firewall s external port directly to the Internet router/gateway, and the internal/protected port to the LAN.) Power on the firewall. The firewall should now be active and functioning in basic security mode (all internal users are allowed outbound and no unsolicited inbound connections are allowed). Now your computer and firewall should both be members of your network. Access the firewall using a browser and the IP address you assigned to the protected network port. You can now perform any additional configuration tasks, including changing the administrative password. CAUTION Failure to change the default password is a serious security risk. GTA recommends changing the default user ID and password to prevent unauthorized access. Your firewall can perform a number of additional tasks. To configure and activate additional firewall features, see the Basic Setup Tasks and Advanced Setup Tasks chapters. 30 Chapter 1: Initial Setup

31 2 Basic Setup Tasks 31

32 Basic Setup Tasks This chapter covers the basic functions for initial firewall setup and configuration, organized in the order in which GTA recommends they should be completed. Certain tasks explained in this chapter can also be performed using the Basic Setup Wizard. If you have not yet configured your firewall using the wizard, it is recommended to do so. Setting the Configuration Mode Configuration modes allow you to preview changes to the firewall s settings without immediately applying them. Working in Test Mode allows you to configure your firewall as needed, without compromising your network s security. The Configuration section found within the Configure category allows you to toggle between Live and Test configuration modes, verify your configuration s settings, apply a configuration change and import/ export configuration settings. The most basic of GB-OS settings toggles the GTA firewall between Live and Test configuration modes. To make any changes to the configuration, consider working in Test Mode. Test Mode is useful for verifying a new configuration for correctness and adherence to your security policy. All changes, including configuration changes in multiple areas, can be reviewed in complete safety before applying them to your running firewall. Once you have verified your new configuration in Test Mode, you may apply it to the currently running (Live) configuration. Test Mode configurations may also be reset to factory defaults. Live Mode is useful for immediately applying a configuration change without testing. A Live Mode configuration can also be copied to the firewall s Test Mode. To toggle between LIVE MODE and TEST MODE: 1. Navigate to Configure>Configuration>Change Mode 2. Select LIVE MODE or TEST MODE 3. Click SUBMIT to commit the change Figure 2.1: Setting the Configuration Mode 32 Chapter 2: Basic Setup Tasks

33 Defining a Network GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide The information entered in the Network Settings screen is used to define the network connected to your GTA firewall. Much of this information is required to be entered during the initial setup of the firewall and can be configured using the Basic Setup Wizard. To define your network manually, navigate to Configure>Network>Interfaces>Settings. Figure 2.2: Defining a Network Entering the Host Name The host name, located in the SETTINGS box, is the system name assigned to the GTA firewall and is used to tag log messages. GTA recommends using a fully qualified domain name as the host name for your GTA firewall. A fully qualified domain name is the complete domain name for a specific computer (host) on the network, which is broken down to a host, domain and top-level domain (e.g. firewall.example. com). Host names must be unique. If your network s DHCP servers create IP address assignments based on the system name, enter the host name, often assigned by your ISP. Entering the Default Gateway The default gateway, located at Configure>Network>Routing>Static Routes, is a node on the network that serves as a packet forwarder for all packets for which no routing has been configured. Enter the IP address of the selected default route. This value is usually the IP address of the router connecting the network to the Internet and must be on the same logical network as the associated external interface. If your external interface uses PPP or DHCP to obtain an IP address, entering an IP address in the DEFAULT GATEWAY field is not required. Figure 2.3: Defining a Network Chapter 2: Basic Setup Tasks 33

34 Defining Logical Interfaces A logical interface: Assigns a network (represented by an IP address and a subnet mask) to a physical NIC Designates a network type Identifies a gateway (default route) A GTA firewall requires two logical networks, a protected network and an external network. Additional external and protected logical networks can be added, as well as one or more Private Service Networks (PSN). Defined logical interfaces serve as interface objects throughout the configuration, allowing the administrator to reference the interface quickly when configuring the firewall. CAUTION If a logical interface s name is changed, but a security policy that references it is not updated to refer to the new name, all connections maintained by the security policy will be lost. Logical network interfaces that do not use PPP or DHCP configurations require an IP address and subnet mask. If a subnet mask is not entered, the system will default to a Class C netmask (/24), which helps prevent misconfiguration. To create a new logical interface, Configure>Network>Interfaces>Settings, and click the NEW icon. Figure 2.4: Defining a Logical Interface Table 2.1: Defining Logical Interfaces Field Disable Type IP Address Options DHCP SLAAC Gateway High Availability VLAN Description Disables the confi gured logical interface. Defi ne the type of interface. Options include <Standard>, <Bridge>, <Failover>, <LACP>, <Load Balance>, <Round Robin>, <PPPOE>, <PPTP> and <Serial> Enter the IP address/subnet to assign to the logical interface. Connections using DHCP or PPP do not require an IP address to be entered. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. When checked, DHCP is used to obtain an IP address for the specifi ed interface. DHCP is typically required for connections using a cable modem, but may be used on any network interface. Enable this checkbox if you wish to use Stateless Address Autoconfi guration (SLAAC). This option is only available for IPv6. Enable this checkbox if you wish to make the logical interface the default gateway. This option is only available for connections using DHCP or PPP. Enable this checkbox if configuring for a High Availability interface. Enable this checkbox if configuring for a VLAN interface. 34 Chapter 2: Basic Setup Tasks

35 Field Interfaces Name Zone NIC Description Table 2.1: Defining Logical Interfaces Description Enter a unique name for the logical interface. The name entered may not use a number as its first character. A selection for the logical interface s type. Options include <External>, <Protected> and <PSN>. The network interface card to associate with the network. The pull down menu lists all physical devices on the fi rewall. Enter a description to explain the function of the logical interface. DNS Setup The DNS (Domain Name System) service translates alphanumeric server names into IP addresses. Every time you use a server name, the DNS service must translate the name into its corresponding IP address. For example, the server name example.com might translate to DNS Proxy vs. DNS Server The DNS proxy service allows the firewall to act as a proxy for translating host (domain) names into IP addresses by passing on DNS information requests to external and internal DNS servers. The DNS proxy is especially helpful when using DHCP or PPP, since the firewall will automatically detect the internal or external DNS server s IP address. The DNS server allows the firewall to be configured to function as a primary domain name server, maintaining a database of domain names and the IP addresses of hosts where those domain names reside. The built in DNS server is functional and flexible enough for most GTA firewall users, but may not support all possible DNS options. If your site requires a more complex configuration, or hosts secondary name services, GTA suggests using a dedicated DNS host. Since GTA firewalls provide network transparency for users on protected and private service networks, all outbound DNS queries operate normally. Users on protected networks and PSNs may use a DNS server on the external network for address resolution. However, a DNS server on the external network cannot be used by hosts on the external network to resolve protected hosts. Network address translation hides all network addresses on both protected networks and PSNs. Therefore, an internal DNS server must be in place to resolve internal host names. Note GTA recommends a thorough knowledge of the domain name system before confi guring any DNS server. One reference is DNS and Bind, 5th Edition, by Paul Albitz & Cricket Liu, published by O Reilly and Associates. Note On select GTA fi rewalls, the DNS Server is an option and requires an activation code. See your product specifi cations for more information. Chapter 2: Basic Setup Tasks 35

36 Configuring the DNS Proxy When selecting an external DNS server, use a DNS server from outside your network (e.g., a name server accessed through your ISP). If an internal DNS server is available, enter its IP address in the Internal Network Section. At least one DNS server, either internal or external, is required. See Configuring the DNS Server in Advanced Setup Tasks to configure the firewall as a DNS server if an internal DNS server is not available. Note A DNS proxy is unnecessary with a local DNS server confi gured, so enabling the DNS server will disable the DNS proxy feature. To setup the DNS proxy, navigate to Configure>Services>DNS. Figure 2.5: Configuring the DNS Proxy Field Name Servers Disable IP Address Primary Domain Name DNS Enable Service Advanced Automatic Policies DNS Cache Table 2.2: Configuring the DNS Proxy Description Disables the name servers listed in this section. Enabled by default. IP address(es) of the DNS server(s) that will provide records for your internal DNS server or proxy. Primary domain name used for the network (e.g., example.com). Entering a primary domain name allows hosts on the primary network to be referred by name instead of their fully qualifi ed domain name. For example, server.example.com can be simply referred to as server. Enables the DNS service. To confi gure the DNS Proxy, select the DNS PROXY option. Option to allow connections to the fi rewall on UDP Port 53 from Protected Networks for name resolutions. Determines how long an IP is cached for a URL when resolved by the fi rewall. The default is 168 hours. DNS Cache is displayed in [Monitor -> Activity -> Services -> DNS Objects]. 36 Chapter 2: Basic Setup Tasks

37 Date/Time Setup GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide Since the firewall s date and local time are used to tag log messages, having the firewall configured to operate using accurate time settings is important. The Date/Time service uses UTC (Universal Time Coordinated) as its default time zone. To set the firewall s time zone to one other than the default, select the appropriate time zone from the Time Zone pull down. Note After making changes to the fi rewall s time zone, GTA recommends rebooting the fi rewall. To configure the firewall s date, local time, time zone and network time service navigate to Configure>System>Date/Time. Network Time Setup Figure 2.6: Date/Time Setup Network time synchronizes your firewall and local computers with an NTP (Network Time Protocol) server. Synchronizing with an NTP server allows for accurate time-based logs and security policies. To ensure that the correct date and time is used, your GTA firewall should poll an NTP server. Use of an NTP server is highly recommended, and is enabled by default. NTP is extremely accurate, with a resolution of under a nanosecond (one billionth of a second) and the ability to combine the output of the available time servers to reduce error. It also uses past measurements to estimate the current time should the network go down. The following NTP resources are available: NIST Network Time Servers. Network Time Protocol organization. Network Time Protocol RFC 1305 NTP Zeit. GB-OS comes standard with four defined NTP servers that belong to the NTP Pool Project. GB-OS default NTP servers are part of a dynamic collection of servers that are distributed via round robin DNS. This creates a level of redundancy that allows for highly available access to NTP servers, which ensures consistent time-based logs and security policies regardless if an NTP server in the dynamic collection becomes unreachable. Note Additional NTP Pool Project servers specifi c to the GTA Firewall UTM Appliance s locale can be found at the NTP Pool Project Web site, pool.ntp.org. Chapter 2: Basic Setup Tasks 37

38 To define an additional NTP server: 1. Navigate to Configure>System>Date/Time. 2. Check the ENABLE checkbox to enable the service. 3. Click the NEW icon to add a new NTP server. 4. Enter a description of the NTP server as well as its host name or IP address and click OK. 5. Click Save at the Date/Time screen list to save the configuration. Figure 2.7: Adding an NTP Server Designating the Firewall as a NTP Server The firewall is automatically enabled as an NTP server when the Network Time service is enabled in Configure>System>Date/Time. To allow hosts on the network to access the firewall s NTP server, an inbound policy that allows UDP port 123 must be created. See Allowing and Denying Traffic for more information on creating inbound policies. Once the inbound policy has been defined, configure your hosts to indicate the firewall as their NTP server. System Clock Firewall logs record events and schedule time groups by current time. To ensure that the most accurate time is used, the firewall will need to poll a network time (NTP) server. To enter which network time servers you would like to use, navigate to Configure>System>Date/Time. Check the enable box and enter the domain name of a network time server (e.g. 0.gtantp.pool.ntp.org). Because boot occurs before NTP synchronization, the firewall may not have the correct time at bootup. GB-250 GB-250 has no battery and the initial boot is: :00:00 The time will be properly adjusted after NTP synchronization. GB-Ware The start up time of GB-Ware is either acquired from the on board battery backed up clock or will have the fixed start up time of :00:00 in the event the hardware does not contain a battery backed clock. GB-Ware default system time will vary depending on the hardware manufacturer and if the system has a functioning battery. It is possible that when using GB-Ware and hardware not supplied by GTA the start up time may not be accurate as some CMOS clocks have time keeping issues. The time will correct after NTP synchronization. 38 Chapter 2: Basic Setup Tasks

39 GB-OS Certificate Management GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide GB-OS 5.3 and above can create signing Certificate Authorities (or CA s) for creating GTA firewall certificates. These CA s can be used for remote firewall administration, SSL Browsers, and Remote Administration Certificates which are used for the SSL Client and both Mobile IPSec VPN Clients and Firewall to Firewall IPSec VPN s. GB-OS will automatically create a GB-OS CA, Remote Administration and VPN certificate under the following conditions: Basic Setup Wizard is employed to configure the firewall Certificate section is defaulted (Automatically configured based on firewall configuration) GB-OS will automatically create user certificates when: Administrator is defined during the Basic Setup Wizard A new user is created and the certificate field is set to GENERATE During upgrade, if no user certificate has been created on previous versions Note For detailed information on managing GB-OS certifi cates, see the GB-OS Certifi cate Management Guide. Defining Objects Objects increase speed and consistency when configuring your GTA Firewall UTM Appliance using GB-OS. By using objects, a user needs to define an address, group or interface only once. From then on, the object can be selected throughout the configuration where it might be needed. Once an object has been defined, only the object will need to be edited in order to modify the definition in all the locations where it is used. Additionally, previously defined objects can be combined in the ADDRESS OBJECTS section of the configuration screen to create a broader definition. For example, you may have already defined two address objects, Joe s Computer and Jane s Computer, each of which points to a specific IP address on the protected network. If you wish to apply the same security policy to both IP addresses, you can combine them under a general address object. Objects are created and defined at Configure>Objects. To create or edit an object, navigate to its appropriate sub-section. Note Confi guration data does not receive automatic updates when an object name is changed, but retains references with the old, invalid name. As a result, connections maintained by that object may be lost when the object name is changed. To change the object name without losing connectivity: Duplicate the object and save it with a different name. Change references to the new object throughout the firewall s configuration. You may then safely delete the original object. Chapter 2: Basic Setup Tasks 39

40 Address Objects Address objects can be used to reference either a single IP address, a range of IP addresses, a subnet specified by an IP address and subnet mask, or another address object. Note See product specifi cations for the maximum number of address objects available for your GTA Firewall UTM Appliance. Figure 2.10: Creating a New Address Object Selecting the Address Object s Type When configuring an address object s TYPE, a number of options are available. Based upon the selection made, the configured object may only be available for use in a specific section of the firewall s configuration. For example, if an address object of type SECURITY POLICIES is selected, it will only be available when configuring a security policy. If no TYPE is selected when configuring an address object, it will only be accessible when configuring another address object. Not selecting a TYPE is useful when you wish to have a set of IP addresses or domains on hand for pooling into other defined objects, but it is not required to be used elsewhere in the configuration. When no TYPE has been selected for an address object, it will be identified as being of type INTERNAL. Type All Content Filtering Mail Proxy Network Security Policies VPN Description Table 2.8: Address Object Types An IP address or domain name that is available and can be used throughout the fi rewall s confi guration. An IP address or domain name that can only be used when configuring Content Filtering policies. An IP address or domain name that can only be used when configuring Mail Proxy policies. An IP address that can only be used in configuration areas that require a location on the fi rewall s network. An IP address used in any fi rewall policy. An IP address or domain name that can only be used when creating a IPSec VPN. To create a new address object: 1. Navigate to Configure>Objects>Address Objects and click the NEW icon. 2. Enter a unique name by which the object will be referenced in the NAME field. The object s name cannot begin with a number. 3. Enter a description of the object in the DESCRIPTION field. 40 Chapter 2: Basic Setup Tasks

41 Note 4. To define how the object will be used, select a category from the TYPE category. The TYPE selected will determine where the object may be used, and what addresses are valid entries for the object. 5. To add additional addresses to the object, select the ADD icon on the right side to create additional address object fields. Next, select the address object from the OBJECT pull down. <USER DEFINED> is used when entering IP addresses, while <USE REGULAR EXPRESSION> is used when entering domain names. Enter the address object s IP address or domain name in the ADDRESS field and a description in the DESCRIPTION field. Previously defined address objects are also available for selection from the OBJECT pull down. 6. Click OK and then SAVE. To avoid bottlenecks associated with DNS lags or time-outs, specify hosts by IP address instead of their domain name when possible. Using Regular Expressions Domain names can be entered in the ADDRESS field for an address object. Domain name sets can also be specified by using special characters to denote the patterns as regular expressions. Firewall policies will only require the use of two regular expression characters: the asterisk and the question mark. The * (asterisk) matches any number of any type of characters, while a? (question mark) matches only one character of any type. For example, *.com will match any domain that ends in.com, such as gta.com or example.com. exa?ple.com will match any domain that triggers the wild card character, such as example.com, exaqple.com or exa4ple.com. Multiple regular expression characters can also be combined to create a more robust matching. For example, *.exa?ple.com will match any domain that triggers the? (question mark) wild card character that includes a subdomain, such as mail.example.com or time.exaqple.com. Advanced users may wish to specify more complex matching rules for domain names. To activate the use of the full regular expression character set, simply begin your domain entry with the ^ (caret) character and end it with the $ (dollar sign) character. For example, ^*.com$. Table 2.9: Using Regular Expressions Sample Address Entry Sample Matches Description example.com example.com Matches exact listing only. Subdomains or variants will not match. exa?ple.com *.com *.example.com example.com, exaqple.com, exa4ple.com example.com, mail.example.com, gta.com time.example.com, mail.example.com, server.example.com Any character replacing the wild card character can trigger a match. In this example, the domain must be eleven characters long, begin with exa and end with ple.com. Any series of characters replacing the wild card character can trigger a match. In this example, the domain must end in.com. Any series of characters replacing the wild card character can trigger a match. In this example, the domain must end in.example.com. Note One reference for regular expression is Mastering Regular Expressions, Second Edition, by Jeffrey Friedl, published by O Reilly Media, Inc. Chapter 2: Basic Setup Tasks 41

42 Default Address Objects GB-OS has a variety of built-in, un-editable default address objects which can be identified by their lock icon. They can be viewed and duplicated, but cannot be deleted. The ANY_IP and ANY_MULTICAST address objects are examples. All other default address objects can be modified or deleted. To return the address objects list to its default configuration, select the DEFAULT icon and SAVE the section. CAUTION Restoring the address objects list to its default confi guration will remove all user confi gured address objects. Bookmark Objects Bookmark objects are shortcuts for users using the SSL Browser. Note Please see the GTA SSL Client Guide for more details on confi guring the SSL service. Figure 2.11: Creating a Bookmark Object To create a new bookmark object: 1. Navigate to Configure>Objects>Bookmark Objects and click the NEW icon. 2. Enter a unique name by which the object will be referenced in the NAME field. The object s name cannot begin with a number. 3. Enter a description for the object in the DESCRIPTION field. 4. Enter a label for the bookmark objects in the LABEL field. This is the label the user will see for the configured bookmark. 5. Select the object type from the OBJECT pulldown. 6. Select a built-in icon to represent the type of object from the ICON pulldown. 7. Enter the LABEL for the bookmark object. 8. Specify the network protocol type and enter the bookmark URL and a brief description. 9. To add additional bookmark objects, select the ADD icon on the right for additional rows. 10. Click OK and then SAVE. Service Group Objects Service group objects define protocols and services for use when creating definitions throughout the firewall s configuration. Administrators can explicitly allow or deny a protocol on a certain port or a range of ports according to configured service group objects. Additionally, when used with inbound tunnels, ports can also be redirected. When creating a service group object, the following syntax is used to define ports: 42 Chapter 2: Basic Setup Tasks

43 Type Syntax Example Entry Table 2.10: Syntax Used When Defining Ports Example Matches Description Single Port P N 1 1 Matches the exact listing only. Valid port values are 0 through In this example, only port 1 is matched. Multiple Ports Range of Ports Source and Destination Ports P N1,P N2 1,2,3, Matches the exact listing (separated by commas) only. Valid port values are 0 through Up to 12 ports may be entered into a list. Entering spaces to increase legibility is allowed. In this example, ports 1, 2, 3 and 5 are matched. P N1 -P N Matches the range (defi ned by the starting and ending port values, and separated by a dash). Valid port values are 0 through In this example, ports 1 through 5 are matched. P N1 ->P N2 1->5 n/a Matches the source port (the value before the ->) to the destination port (the value after the ->). Valid port values are 0 through In this example, port 1 is matched to port 5. Security policies and inbound tunnels interpret ports defined in service group objects in slightly different ways. Entering a destination port (the value after ->) is not necessary. If an explicit destination port is entered: A security policy will treat the source port as the port from which the connection originates and the destination port as the connection s destination. An inbound tunnel will interpret the source port as the port on the firewall that should be redirected and the destination port as the internal port to which the connection should be redirected. If an explicit destination port is not entered: A security policy will interpret the entered port(s) as referring to a connection s destination port. An inbound tunnel will interpret the entered port(s) as the port on the firewall that should be redirected, as well as the internal port to which the connection will be redirected. Figure 2.12: Creating a Service Group Object To create a new service group object: 1. Navigate to Configure>Objects>Service Groups and click the NEW icon. 2. Enter a unique name by which the object will be referenced in the NAME field. The object s name cannot begin with a number. 3. Enter a description for the object in the DESCRIPTION field. 4. To add services to the object, select the service s object from the OBJECT pull down. Select a service group object to use preconfigured protocol and port number(s), or; Select <USER DEFINED> to create a custom service group object. 5. If <USER DEFINED> has been selected as the service s OBJECT, select the service s PROTOCOL and enter the port number(s). Port numbers can be entered individually (1,2,3,4,5), as a range (1-5) or using a source and destination (1->5). Then enter a description to describe the service. 6. To add additional service group objects, select the ADD icon on the right for additional rows. 7. Click OK and then SAVE. Chapter 2: Basic Setup Tasks 43

44 Default Service Group Objects GB-OS generates a variety of service group objects, identified by their lock icon, for use throughout the configuration by default. They can be viewed, but cannot be deleted. To return the address objects list to its default configuration, select the DEFAULT icon and SAVE the section. CAUTION Restoring the service group objects list to its default confi guration will remove all user confi gured service group objects. Time Group Objects Administrators can explicitly allow or deny traffic according to time constraints set by time group objects when configuring policies. Time group objects are configured using a 24-hour clock. For example, if you wish to configure a policy that will only operate during your company s normal business hours (for example, Monday through Friday, 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM), a time group object will need to be created with a start time of 8:00, an end time of 17:00 and a day range of Monday through Friday. Figure 2.13: Creating a Time Group Object To create a new time group object: 1. Navigate to Configure>Objects>Time Groups and click the NEW icon. 2. Enter a unique name by which the object will be referenced in the NAME field. The object s name cannot begin with a number. 3. Enter a description of the time group object s function in the DESCRIPTION field. 4. To add time constraints to the object, select the time constraint s object from the OBJECT pull down. Select a time group object to use preconfigured time constraints, or; Select <USER DEFINED> to create a custom time constraint. 5. If <USER DEFINED> has been selected as the time constraint s OBJECT, enter a start time and end time and select all days that the time constraint should be applied. 6. To add additional time group objects, select the ADD icon on the right for additional rows. 7. Click OK and then SAVE. IPSec Objects IPSec Objects determine how IPSec VPN connections will be negotiated by defining what initiation behavior should be accepted by your GTA firewall. For more information on how IPSec VPNs and IPSec Objects work, see the GB-OS VPN Option Guide for Site-to-Site VPNs. 44 Chapter 2: Basic Setup Tasks

45 Encryption Objects GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide Encryption objects are used to easily reference encryption settings in IPSec Objects. For more information on encryption objects and how they are used in conjunction with IPSec Objects, see the GB-OS VPN Option Guide for Site-to-Site VPNs. Allowing and Denying Traffic Security policies are what control access to and through the GTA firewall. Inbound policies control inbound traffic, while outbound policies control outbound traffic. Inbound policies primarily control tunnels, but also control inbound traffic from any attached network device to any service on the GTA firewall as well. Outbound policies control access from hosts on protected networks and PSNs to IP addresses that reside on an external network, and from hosts on a protected network to those that reside on a PSN. The implicit rule, that which is not explicitly allowed is denied, applies to both outbound and inbound packets. Unless a security policy is in place allowing for a situation where a packet is accepted, it will always be denied by default. Note All GTA fi rewalls deny all unsolicited inbound packets by default. Security policies must be defi ned in order to control traffi c fl ow. Policy Sets A policy set is a group of policies of a given type. The order of the policy set is important since each packet is compared to the policy set starting with the first policy (index 1). The packet is compared sequentially against each policy until one of two events occurs: 1. A policy is matched. The packet is either accepted or denied based on the policy definition and the actions associated with the policy are performed. 2. No policies are matched and the policy list is exhausted. If this event occurs, the packet is then denied. Note An asterisk ( * ) appearing on the far left of the list icons for any security policy indicates the policy contains an inactive time-based policy. To resolve, select a valid time-group for the policy. Allowing Inbound Traffic Inbound traffic, packets sent from the external network to the firewall, can be controlled by defining security policies. An inbound policy makes tunnels accessible to hosts on the external network. Any address object of type Security Policies defined in the Address Object Editor (Configure>Objects>Address Objects) can be used in an inbound policy. Additionally, inbound policies control access to services running on the firewall. To configure inbound traffic, navigate to Configure>Security Policies>Inbound. Figure 2.14: Allowing Inbound Traffic Chapter 2: Basic Setup Tasks 45

46 Blocking Outbound Traffic Outbound traffic, packets sent from hosts on the protected networks and PSNs through the firewall, can be controlled by defining outbound security policies. Any address object of type Security Policies defined in the Address Object Editor (Configure>Objects>Address Objects) can have a outbound policy applied to it. To configure outbound traffic, navigate to Configure>Security Policies>Outbound. Country Blocking Figure 2.15: Blocking Outbound Traffic IP packets can be allowed or denied based upon country by defining country blocking filters. To configure country blocking, for either Inbound or Outbound, navigate to the appropriate sub-menu (Inbound or Outbound) in the Configure>Security Policies>Country Blocking menu. 1. Select the ENABLE checkbox to allow country blocking. 2. Choose the TYPE - ALLOW or DENY. The ALLOW option will deny all countries by default. Only the selected countries/regions will be allowed. The DENY option will allow all countries by default. Only the selected countries/regions will be denied. 3. Additionally, administrators can specify a country block WHITE LIST object. The WHITE LIST object will override country blocks. 4. Under the DATABASE settings, select SUBSCRIPTION to allow automatic updates to the country IP database. A valid support contract is required. 46 Chapter 2: Basic Setup Tasks

47 Figure 2.16: Country Blocking Managing Policies All policies (with the exception of country blocking) share the same elements for configuration. To create a new policy, or to edit an existing one, navigate to Configure>Security Policies, select the appropriate sub-section and click the NEW icon to create a new policy or the EDIT icon to edit an existing one. Figure 2.17: Managing Policies Field Disable Description Type Interface Service Time Group Description Table 2.11: Managing Policies Check this option to disable the confi gured policy. Enter a description to explain the function of the policy. A selection for the function of the policy; Accept or deny. A selection for the interface the policy will be applied to. The selected interface is matched against the interface on which the IP packet arrived. <ANY> will match any interface. TCP, UDP, HTTP or any other service defi ned in the Service Group Object Editor can be selected to match against the packet. A selection for the time parameters of the policy as defi ned in the Time Group Object Editor. Selecting *EDIT* allows you to defi ne a new time group object. <ALWAYS> means no time constraints will be applied to the policy. Chapter 2: Basic Setup Tasks 47

48 Source Address Destination Address A selection for the IP address to be matched against the source IP address of the packet. <ANY_IP> will match any source IP address. Select *EDIT* to defi ne a new address object of type SECURITY POLICIES. Select <USER DEFINED> to enter the IP address manually. A selection for the IP address to be matched against the destination IP address of the packet. <ANY_IP> will match any destination IP address. Select *EDIT* to define a new address object of type SECURITY POLICIES. Select <USER DEFINED> to enter the IP address manually. Tips for Using Policies The following are some tips for when using policies: Once you have defined your network, you can use the DEFAULT button to auto-configure an initial set of policies according to your network s configuration. Auto-configured policies will be left enabled or disabled according to the factory default (the most secure setting). If you used the Basic Setup Wizard to initially configure your firewall, default policies will automatically have been generated. The DEFAULT command does not reset to factory original policies but instead attempts to create policies that match your firewall s configuration. When a policy section is defaulted, the policies do not retain manual changes. If you have created custom policies you wish to save, either create new policies manually or print a copy of your configuration for reference before auto-configuration. Changes to policies will not be effective until the section is saved. Should you leave the policy or policy set before saving, all changes will be lost. The DUPLICATE function can be used to duplicate the definition of a policy. Combining multiple policies can be efficient and useful when they share the same basic criteria. This often occurs when all the policy parameters are the same except for the destination port. Policies that are often combined are for SMTP, FTP and HTTP since they are all TCP-based protocols and are frequently served from the same system. Using Host Names or DNS in Combination with Security Policies In version and later GTA firewalls have the ability to use host names in security policies. Requirements DNS configured and properly working GB-OS or later There are two methods to reference a host name(s) in Security Policies: Method 1: 1. Create a security policy which uses a host name or domain in the SOURCE ADDRESS or the DESTINATION ADDRESS of the security policy. The example below illustrates using a host name in the DESTINATION ADDRESS of an outbound policy. Figure 2.18: Host Name or Domain in Destination Address 48 Chapter 2: Basic Setup Tasks

49 Method 2: 1. Create a new address object of Type Security Policy or edit an existing security policy. 2. Populate the address object with a list of host s names. The following example displays use of a domain and an address object which contains a host name. Figure 2.19: Domain and Address Object with Host Name 3. Reference the address object in your security policy. The following example displays the use of the Allowed Sites object in an outbound security policy. Figure 2.20: Allowed Sites Object Resolved names will be displayed in the summary under DNS Objects. GTA firewall will periodically re-resolve the names and update the list of IP address associated with each host name. Figure 2.21: Resolved DNS Objects Chapter 2: Basic Setup Tasks 49

50 Verifying the Configuration GB-OS automatically verifies configuration settings for correctness and adherence to your security policy. When working in Test Mode, verification can help point out potential problems with your firewall s configuration before they are applied to Live Mode. Detailed descriptions for verification errors and warnings are available at Configure>Verify. Descriptions for errors are displayed with a red font, while warnings are displayed with a black font. Figure 2.22: Verifying the Configuration 50 Chapter 2: Basic Setup Tasks

51 Navigation Menu Icons GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide The navigation menu, located on the left side of the browser window, is dynamically updated to display the verification status of a configuration area. Icons displayed alongside a menu item have four states: White (default/non-configurable): Menu items with a white icon are either using default settings or cannot be configured (such as Summary display screens, which do not contain configuration options). Grey (disabled): Menu items with a grey icon are disabled and are not used in the firewall s configuration. Green (verified): Menu items with a green icon have been verified to be configured correctly and should not conflict with the firewall s configuration. Yellow (warning): Menu items with a yellow icon may be incorrectly configured and can conflict with the firewall s configuration. Red (error): Menu items with a red icon are verified to be incorrectly configured and can conflict with the firewall s configuration. Icon states move up through the menu tree. For example, in Figure 2.24, configuration settings in Address Objects have resulted in a verification error. Since the Address Objects screen is nested within the Objects menu, the verification state is identified by a red icon for the Address Objects screen, and the Objects menu. Errors take precedence over warnings, and warnings take precedence over verified settings. Thus, menus that contain configuration screens with both errors and warnings will be identified with an error icon. Verification Flags In addition to menu icons, GB-OS also displays verification flags if a configuration area contains warnings or errors. If a configuration area contains a warning or an error in its configuration, a verification flag will be displayed in the top menu bar of the GB-OS interface. Verification flags are hyperlinked to their specific section in the Configure>Verify screen. Verification flags have two states: Yellow (warning): Configuration areas with a yellow verification flag may be incorrectly configured and can conflict with the firewall s configuration. Red (error): Configuration areas with a red verification flag are verified to be incorrectly configured and can conflict with the firewall s configuration. If there are no verification warnings or errors for a configuration area, then no verification flags will be displayed. Applying the Configuration Figure 2.23: A Verification Flag The Apply sub section allows you to apply your Test Mode configuration to the firewall as well as copy your Live Mode configuration to a Test Mode configuration. By copying your Live Mode configuration to a Test Mode configuration, you are able to safely make changes to your already working configuration without compromising security. If you are configuring the firewall in Test Mode, the Reset Configuration option will be available as well. Resetting the configuration will restore the Test Mode configuration to factory defaults. Chapter 2: Basic Setup Tasks 51

52 Figure 2.24: Applying the Configuration Note Selecting Change Mode will switch the Admin to Test or Live mode. To apply your Test Mode configuration: 1. Navigate to Configure>Configuration>Apply 2. Select the APPLY TEST CONFIGURATION radio button. 3. Select SUBMIT. Note Applying your Test confi guration will make it Live. To copy your Live Mode configuration to a Test Mode configuration: 1. Navigate to Configure>Configuration>Apply 2. Select the COPY LIVE CONFIGURATION radio button. 3. Select SUBMIT. To reset your Test Mode configuration to factory defaults: 1. Verify GB-OS is operating in Test Mode. See Setting the Configuration Mode if GB-OS is operating in Live Mode. 2. In the firewall s Web Interface menu, navigate to Configure>Configuration>Apply 3. Select the RESET CONFIGURATION radio button. 4. Select SUBMIT. CAUTION Resetting your Test Mode confi guration will restore the Test Mode confi guration to factory defaults, erasing all user defi ned confi gurations except for entered activation codes. GTA recommends backing up your confi guration. 52 Chapter 2: Basic Setup Tasks

53 Importing/Exporting Firewall Configuration GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide Once all desired changes to the firewall s configuration have been applied you may export it for backup purposes. GB-OS configurations are exported using XML (Extensible Markup Language) files and can be exported for backup or for manual configuration changes. CAUTION Manually altering the confi guration s XML fi le may result in undesired or unforeseen changes to the fi rewall s confi guration if it is imported back into GB-OS. GTA does not support importing confi guration backup fi les that have been manually altered. Configuration files are named after the GTA Firewall UTM Appliance s model, GB-OS version number, host name, configuration mode and time stamp. For example, an exported configuration file could be called GB-2500_v620_HostName_Live_2014_10_10.xml. To export your configuration: 1. Navigate to Configure>Configuration>Import/Export. 2. Select the configuration you wish to export, Live or Test. 3. Click the DOWNLOAD button to select a location to store the configuration file. 4. Click SAVE. Note The Live mode confi guration can also be exported by appending /config to the fi rewall s URL and placing it in a script. For example, to download the fi rewall s confi guration with a user ID of fwadmin, a password of fwadmin, and host name of firewall.example.com, run the following script: curl -k -o config.xml http(s)://fwadmin:fwadmin@firewall.example.com/config This will download a fi le, named confi g.xml, which contains the fi rewall s Live mode confi guration. Figure 2.25: Exporting Up Your Firewall s Configuration Chapter 2: Basic Setup Tasks 53

54 Automatic Backup Firewall configurations can be automatically backed up and sent via or saved to a USB device or Cloud Server. The firewall will backup the configuration, in the format configured, when any Live mode changes or modifications are saved. Backup configurations can be restored to the firewall manually, or via the web interface from a USB device or Cloud Server. Backup configurations can also be restored from a USB device via the console. More than one backup method can be used at a time. To configure: 1. Navigate to Configure>Configuration>Backup. 2. Select the format in which to save backup files. Configuration files are available in XML, 7-Zip and Zip format. It is recommended to use a password with 7-Zip and Zip. 3. Select the maximum backup count. Available options are 50 or 100. Once the limit has been reached, the oldest saved configuration file will be deleted. 4. Enable at least one of the backup methods below - , cloud or USB. Backup Figure 2.26: Automatic Backup Settings 1. To enable automatic backups via , select ENABLE. 2. Enter the origination address. 3. Select an address object or <USER DEFINED> to enter an address to which the backup configuration files will be sent. Only one address can be designated. Cloud Backup Figure 2.27: Automatic Backup via Requirements: GB-OS or above Valid support or maintenance contract Cloud service account via Dropbox or Box.net To set up Cloud backup, an account must first be created with a Cloud service. GTA currently supports Dropbox and Box.net. Both services have free and paid account options. Once a Cloud service account has been set up, enable GTA Cloud Backup: 1. Select ENABLE. 2. Select the cloud service to be used. 3. Select AUTHORIZE. The authorization screen will open up in a new window. Enter applicable cloud service account credentials. 4. The firewall will now display all available backups as well as the available storage. 54 Chapter 2: Basic Setup Tasks

55 Figure 2.28: Automatic Backup via Cloud - Authorize USB Backup Figure 2.29: Automatic Backup via Cloud Requirements: GB-OS or above Valid support or maintenance contract USB device connected directly to the firewall USB device must be FAT32 or NTFS. To enable USB backup, ensure a properly formatted USB device is connected to the firewall. Select ENABLE. All available backups will be displayed. Figure 2.30: Automatic Backup via USB device Note The fi rewall administrator can choose to immediately backup up a confi guration by selecting the BACKUP NOW button in the Cloud or USB backup sections. Managing Cloud or USB Backups via the Web Interface The ACTION column in the Automatic Backup section contains three action items: IMPORT, SAVE, and DELETE. Figure 2.31: Backup Action Items - Import, Save and Delete Chapter 2: Basic Setup Tasks 55

56 Restoring Backups Cloud and USB backups will be restored to Test mode only. To restore a backup configuration via the web interface: 1. Select the backup file and click the IMPORT icon under the ACTION column. A dialog box will confirm a successful import to test mode. 2. GTA recommends verifying the backup configuration before applying to Live mode. 3. Navigate to Configure>Configuration>Apply and select APPLY TEST CONFIGURATION. For more information, see Applying the Configuration. Note If you are restoring a password protected confi guration fi le, the fi rewall will use the password confi gured in the Automatic Backup section. If this password has been changed and does not match the selected fi le s password, the restore will fail. Downloading Backups To download backups directly to the user machine, without applying the configuration to the firewall, select the backup file and click the SAVE icon under the ACTION column. Deleting Backups Backups can also be deleted from storage by clicking the DELETE button under the ACTION column. Restoring Backups Via the Console Backups can be restored via the console from a USB device. For more information, see the GTA Console User s Guide. Cloud or USB Device Directory The firewall will search the directory for one matching the system s serial number. Backups will be created and placed in the directory at: GTA/<fw _ serial _ number>/backups You may manually edit and delete files in this directory. To save a backup configuration from automatic deletion when the maximum limit has been reached, you must move a file OUT of the specified directory to another folder on the Cloud Server or USB device. High Availability and Automatic Backup To enable automatic backup via Cloud or USB device, each High Availability group must be covered by a valid support contract and the firewalls must both be authorized for cloud service. 56 Chapter 2: Basic Setup Tasks

57 Chapter 2: Basic Setup Tasks 57

58 3 Advanced Setup Tasks 58

59 Advanced Setup Tasks GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide Advanced Setup Tasks covers the advanced functions of your GTA Firewall UTM Appliance s configuration, organized in the order in which GTA recommends they should be completed. Firewall User Account and Group Setup The Accounts section under the Configure category allows the administrator to set up additional user accounts and groups. User accounts can be enabled for general access, VPNs, or other restricted access points. Administrator accounts can be given full access to the firewall s configuration through the Web interface. This is useful if someone other than the firewall s primary administrator will need to access the firewall to alter the configuration. Creating User Accounts User accounts are used for authentication, VPNs, or restricted access points. User groups can be selected in security policies and inbound tunnels to regulate access from outside the protected network and to restrict access from a specified network interface to an IP address/port. User accounts are configured under Configure>Accounts>Users. Select NEW to create a new user account or select EDIT to modify a pre-defined account. Note Administrator user accounts are created by selecting a confi gured administrator group as the Primary Group. See Creating Groups for more information. Figure 3.1: Creating User Accounts Field Name Disable Identity Full Name Description Primary Group Table 3.1: Creating User Accounts Description Disables the account. Used for authentication purposes, this is typically the user s account. The name for the account. A short description to identify the use of the account. A selection for the user group to bind to the user account. Selecting??? means no user group has been selected. Select an administrator group to create an Administrator user. Primary Group determines a users Administrative, SSL, and Mobile IPSec Privileges as well as access based on security policies and content fi ltering policies. See Creating Groups for more information. Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 59

60 Certificate Authentication Modify Password Password Confirm Remote Access L2TP/PPTP Disable Mobile IPSec Disable Authentication Pre-shared Secret Remote Network Groups Group Description Table 3.1: Creating User Accounts Default is to generate a new user certifi cate. These are used in IPSec and SSL VPNs. For more information see GB-OS Certifi cate Management. A selection for creating or changing a password. The password for user authentication. Re-enter the password to confirm. Disables L2TP/PPTP access for the account Disables Mobile IPSec access for the account. Select the authentication method to be used when the user establishes a VPN connection. Choose Pre-shared Secret or Certifi cate If the AUTHENTICATION method is set to PRE-SHARED SECRET, then enter the ASCII or HEX value pre-shared secret to be used. Once entered, this fi eld will be obscured. Select modify to enter a new pre-shared secret. The IP address or address object of the remote network from which the mobile IPSec VPN user is connecting from. A selection for applying additional groups to the user account, making the user a member of the selected groups. Includes all group privileges except for Mobile IPSec. A short description of the group. Download User Mobile Configuration To download user mobile configuration and policies, select the DOWNLOAD icon in the user list at Configure>Accounts>Users. Creating Groups Figure 3.2: Downloading User Information 60 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

61 Groups are a collection of user accounts used for reference throughout the configuration, much like objects. For example, when defining a policy, a user group can be selected to require authentication before a policy can be applied to the group s traffic. When defining a group, additional pre-defined groups can also be added to reference a larger amount of users. Additionally, GB-OS contains a default user group called ALL_USERS that automatically refers to all configured users defined in Configure>Accounts>Users. Creating a user group with sub-groups or using the ALL_USERS group can be useful if a security policy is required to affect multiple user groups or all configured users. Groups are configured under Configure>Accounts>Groups. Select NEW to create a new group or select EDIT to modify a pre-defined group. Note If this user group is to be connecting to the fi rewall using the GTA Mobile IPSec VPN Client, settings are available to defi ne the group s VPN object and local network. For more information on confi guring a VPN, see the GTA VPN Option Guide. For additional information on confi guring SSL Browser and Client access, see the GTA SSL Client Guide. Creating an Administrator Group Administrative user accounts are defined by creating and assigning an administrator group as a user s Primary Group. Administrator accounts have full access to the firewall and are able to make changes to the configuration using the Web or Console interface. By default, the user ID and password for the administrator account are both fwadmin. Read-only groups will not be able to make changes to the firewall s configuration or view pre-shared secrets. Figure 3.2: Creating Groups Field Name Disable Description Table 3.2: Creating Groups Disables the group. Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 61

62 Name Description Administrator Enable Read Only Remote Access L2TP PPTP Mobile IPSec Enable Advanced Authentication Required Local Network SSL Browser Enable Bookmarks Only Read Only Bookmarks Client Enable Mobile IPSec Enable Authentication Required IPSec Object Local Network Groups Sub Group Description Table 3.2: Creating Groups The name for the group. A short description to identify the use of the group. Enables administrator privileges for the user group. A selection for creating a read-only administrator user group. A toggle for enabling L2TP for the user group. A toggle for enabling PPTP for the user group. Enables VPN access for the user group. A toggle for whether users confi gured under the group should be required to authenticate with the fi rewall using the GTA Mobile IPSec VPN Client or not. The local network for the VPN which the configured user can access. Confi guring this section will override settings defined under Configure>VPN>Remote Access>IPSec. Enables SSL browser access for the user group. Displays only Bookmarks for SSL Browser access. Read only access. Users can only download fi les via the browser. Displays the defi ned bookmarks for the group. Allows SSL Client access. Enables VPN access for the user group. A toggle for whether users confi gured under the group should be required to authenticate with the fi rewall using the GTA Mobile IPSec VPN Client or not. The VPN object to be used by the user group. The local network for the VPN which the configured user can access. Confi guring this section will override settings defined under Configure>VPN>Remote Access>IPSec. Select a previously defi ned group for which the main group will include. A short description to explain the use of the included sub-group. Configuring Remote Administration 62 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

63 This section allow for the configuration of lockout, remote administration and customized login screens. Lockout disallows further logins from a user s IP address if a login is repeatedly entered incorrectly. Remote administration regulates administrative access to the Web interface from outside of the protected network. Account preferences are configured under Configure>Accounts>Remote Administration. Lockout Lockout gives the administrator the ability to disable login attempts to the Web or Console interface from a user s IP address if repeated login attempts are entered incorrectly. Settings available for configuration include the threshold (the number of times an invalid entry may be entered) and the duration of time the user s IP address will be blocked. Networks exempt from lockout can also be specified. Figure 3.3: Configuring Account Preferences - Lockout Field Name Enable Allowed Advanced Threshold Duration Description Table 3.3: Lockout Disallow further logins from a user s IP address if a login is entered incorrectly. Enabled by default. Specify the network (address object) that is exempt from lockout, if necessary. The number of attempts a user can make from an IP address before that IP address is locked out. Threshold values may range between 5 and 100. The number of seconds an IP address is locked out. The duration may range between 30 and 86,400 seconds. Remote Administration The factory default settings enable remote administration from the protected interface. The Web interface is served on standard TCP port 443 for SSL encryption. The firewall can also be accessed using the Console interface using the accounts with administrative access. Access to the Console interface cannot be disabled. Figure 3.4: Configuring Account Preferences - Remote Administration Changing the Remote Administration Port Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 63

64 To maintain access when changing the port number used for remote administration, ensure that AUTOMATIC POLICIES are enabled (located under the ADVANCED tab) or configure a new service group object and inbound policy for the new port before changing the existing port number. CAUTION Changing the TCP port for remote administration without enabling automatic policies or fi rst adding the new port to a inbound policy will result in a loss of remote administration connectivity. To prevent this, either create a new service group object to be used in a inbound policy, or connect to the fi rewall locally. Field Name Table 3.4: Remote Administration Description Enable Enables remote administration for the Web interface. Enabled by default. Port The TCP port allowing Web administration. SSL encryption default is 443. Authentication LDAP Enables LDAP users to administer the firewall. RADIUS Enables Radius users to administer the fi rewall. Advanced Encryption A selection for the level of SSL encryption. All levels of SSL encryption are enabled by default. Setting encryption to <none> will turn off SSL encryption. FIPS Enables FIPS mode for Remote Administration and the SSL Browser. If FIPS is enabled, the fi rewall MUST use SSL encryption. Policy Compatibility A selection for preserving previous remote administration settings for fi rewalls that do not properly upgrade to GB-OS and above. Disabling this option allows the web administration to send CAs imported on the fi rewall to a connecting client to assist in validating the authenticity of the remote administration certifi cate. Timeout Sessions A selection for whether remote connections should be timed out after a period of inactivity. Virtual Keyboard A selection for whether the virtual keyboard is enabled, disabled or force use. Automatic Policies Enable A selection for whether automatic policies should be enabled. Zone Specifi es the Zone which will be allowed to connect. Options are External, Protected, and PSN. Source Address Specifi es the source address allowed to connect. Encryption For additional security, SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) encryption is available. SSL encryption (HTTPS) is the standard in Internet security for HTTP, supporting server/client authentication, and maintaining security and integrity in transmission. SSL encrypted administration requires a inbound policy with a port that matches the remote administration port (443, by default). Table 3.5: Encryption Levels Level Key Strength Description None n/a Disables SSL encryption SSL 168-bit A high level of SSL encryption. Policy Compatibility 64 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

65 Upgrading to GB-OS and above, from GB-OS and below, may result in remote administration certificate errors. These errors may prevent web administration of the firewall via Firefox or Google Chrome and some other browsers. A connection error or SSL error will be displayed in the web browser. GTA recommends resolving all certificate errors, but remote administration settings can be preserved by enabling POLICY COMPATIBILITY at Configure>Accounts>Remote Administration>Advanced via Internet Explorer or Safari. For more details and additional certificate error troubleshooting, see the GB-OS Certifi cate Management guide. Policy Compatibility may also be enabled through the Console interface at Configure>Accounts>Remote Administration. See the Console Guide for more details or for creating a new certificate on the console. Customized Login Customize the login screen to display a unique title and logo. The logo must be file format JPEG, PNG, or GIF, 32 x 32 pixels and 100 KB or less. Figure 3.5: Customized Login Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 65

66 Authentication Setup Authentication allows the administrator to require authentication using GBAuth or GTA SSOAuth Service before initiating a connection to or through the firewall. There are four authentication methods available on GTA firewalls: GTA Authentication, LDAP, RADIUS and Active Directory Single Sign-On. For more information on configuring and using GBAuth for user authentication, refer to Reference C: Utilities. Authentication is configured in Configure>Accounts>Authentication Figure 3.6: Authentication Setup 66 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

67 Field Name Enable Advanced Automatic Policies Description Table 3.7: Authentication Enables authentication. A toggle for whether automatic policies should be generated to allow any of the three methods of authentication. Enable FIPS compliant options for authentication settings. FIPS Service Port The service port used. The default port for GTA Authentication is 76. Valid The valid duration for an authenticated user (in minutes). If using a one time password, this value should be high. Send Keep Alives LDAPv3 Enable Server Use SSL Base DN Group Field A toggle for whether keep alives should be sent or not. Enables LDAPv3 authentication. AUTHENTICATION must be enabled to allow for LDAPv3 authentication. The server IP address or host name and port number of the LDAP server used. The port number defaults to 389. To enter a specifi c port number, use the format ldap.example.com:389. A toggle for enabling SSL support. The root distinguished name of the LDAP server, comparable to the domain name in an Internet address. Used for LDAP searches. The group name fi eld where group names are stored on the LDAP server. Advanced Automatically Add Groups Use Full Group Name Binding Interface Timeout Bind Options Bind Method User Bind String Append Base DN Bind DN Password Radius Enable Select the check box to automatically add groups when GBAuth is used to authenticate with the fi rewall. Select the check box to return the full group name. The address from which authentication information is sourced. Selecting <AUTOMATIC> will indicate the fi rewall s IP address to the server location. To force packets to have a specifi c source IP address, choose the interface object from the pull down menu. The amount of time, in seconds, that the GTA fi rewall will wait on results from an LDAP search. Select the method that the user will use to bind (authenticate) with the LDAP server. Select <Anonymous> to authenticate with the LDAP server anonymously. Select <User> to authenticate with the LDAP server with a user name. Select <Username Search> to authenticate with the LDAP server using the root distinguished name and password. Enter the user name to bind with the user. This fi eld is only available if <User> is selected for the BIND METHOD. Select this check box to have the value entered in the BASE DN string appended to the USER BIND STRING value. This fi eld is only available if <User> is selected for the BIND METHOD. Enter the root distinguished name of the LDAP server. This fi eld is only available if <Username Search> is selected for the BIND METHOD. Enter the root password of the LDAP server. This fi eld is only available if <Username Search> is selected for the BIND METHOD. Enables RADIUS authentication. AUTHENTICATION must be enabled to allow for RADIUS authentication. Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 67

68 Field Name Server Pre-shared Secret Advanced Binding Interface NAS Identity NAS Channel Description Table 3.7: Authentication The server IP address or host name and port number of the RADIUS server used. The port number defaults to To enter a specifi c port number, use the format radius.example.com:1812. The pre-shared secret as defi ned in the RADIUS service. This fi eld is case sensitive. Once entered, this fi eld will be obscured. Select modify to enter a new pre-shared secret. The address from which authentication information is sourced. Selecting <AUTOMATIC> will indicate the fi rewall s IP address to the server location. To force packets to have a specifi c source IP address, choose the interface object from the pull down menu. By default (if the fi eld is empty), this is the fi rewall s local IP address. Match the RADIUS server s expected identity for authentication requests. Matches the RADIUS server s channel number. Filling out this fi eld is only necessary if the RADIUS server distinguishes between its NAS ports (channels). NAS Channel Type Matches the RADIUS server s connection type, namely a modem (Async, etc.) or TCP/IP (Virtual) connection. Active Directory Single Sign-On Enable Server/Certificate GTA Authentication Enables Single Sign-On authentication. AUTHENTICATION must be enabled to allow for Single Sign-On authentication. The server IP address or host name and port number of the Single Sign-On server used. The port number defaults to To enter a specifi c port number, use the format :2880. GTA Authentication requires the setup of firewall user accounts. Users can be configured with the instructions found in the Firewall Administrator and User Setup section of this chapter. GTA Authentication can be selected in inbound tunnels and security policies. Users enter the values defined in the IDENTITY and PASSWORD fields from Configure>Accounts>Users to log in using GBAuth. Using GTA Authentication on a GTA Firewall To use GTA Authentication: 1. Enable AUTHENTICATION and enter the desired port (TCP port 76, by default). 2. Click SAVE. LDAPv3 LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) is a specification for accessing directories on the Internet to obtain information such as addresses and public keys. Support for TCP/IP for Internet access is also included. Like the Internet protocols HTTP and FTP, LDAP is used in the protocol prefix of a URL (e.g., ldap://example.com). LDAP version 3, completed in 1997, is the latest implementation of the protocol at the time of this release. Using LDAPv3 on a GTA Firewall The LDAP authentication option allows you to accept or deny traffic by querying an LDAP server. The LDAP authentication option can be used on inbound, outbound and pass through policies. LDAP authentication requires an LDAP server with users, organizational units and domains. GTA Firewall LDAP searches return a user s primary Active Directory group to the firewall. 68 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

69 Field Name cn rdn ou dc dn Table 3.8: LDAP Authentication Components Description Common name; specifi ed on the LDAP server and entered in the IDENTITY fi eld of GBAuth, e.g. Joe Q User. Relative distinguished name; the common name plus the cn= identifi er, e.g. cn=joe Q User. Organizational unit; group to which the user has been assigned. There can be a hierarchy of ou s defined. Enter each in the order of its specifi city: if Joe Q User belongs to the FreeBSD group within the support group, ou would be entered into the IDENTITY fi eld of GBAuth, after the cn, as: ou=freebsd, ou=support. Domain component; single domain component of an FQDN (fully-qualifi ed domain name) such as qa.gta.com, e.g. dc=qa, dc=com, dc=gta. Distinguished name; entries in an LDAP server are located by way of the distinguished name, a globally unique identifi er designed to be readable by any LDAP-compliant client. This is the entire string sent to the LDAP server by GBAuth: cn=joe Q User, ou=support,dc=qa, dc=com, dc=gta. To use LDAPv3: 1. Enable AUTHENTICATION and the LDAPv3 feature. 2. Enter the IP address and desired port (TCP port 389, by default) of the LDAP server in the SERVER field. 3. Enter the base distinguished name for your network in the BASE DN field. 4. In the GROUP FIELD, enter the location where groups are stored under. 5. Next, select the method that the user will bind (authenticate) with the LDAP server. To bind with the user, select <User> for the BIND METHOD and enter the USER BIND STRING. Optionally, enable APPEND BASE DN to have the BASE DN value appended to the USER BIND STRING. To bind anonymously, select <Anonymous> for the BIND METHOD. When <Anonymous> is selected, the USERNAME FIELD will appear in the LDAPV3 section. Enter the username that will be used for authentication. To bind using the root distinguished name and password, select <Username Search> for the BIND METHOD. Enter the root distinguished name in the BIND DN field, and the root password in the ROOT PASSWORD field. When <Username Search> is selected, the USERNAME FIELD will appear in the LDAPV3 section. Enter the username that will be authenticated with in the USERNAME FIELD. 6. Click SAVE. RADIUS RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service) is an authentication and management system used by many ISPs. RADIUS requires the customer to enter a user ID and password to access the service. The RADIUS server then verifies the information and authorizes access. Historically, RADIUS has been used to authenticate dial-up connections, but it can be used to authenticate traditional TCP/IP connections as well. Using RADIUS on a GTA Firewall To use RADIUS: 1. Enable AUTHENTICATION and the RADIUS feature. 2. Enter the IP address, desired port (UDP port 1812, by default) and pre-shared secret of the RADIUS server in their respective fields. 3. Click SAVE. Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 69

70 Active Directory Single Sign-On GTA s Active Directory Single Sign-On (GTA SSOAuth) is a system which allows a user to authenticate only once while gaining access to multiple software systems. When a user logins into the domain and attempts to access the Internet via a GTA firewall, the firewall checks to see if the user s IP address is in the Authentication server database. If yes, the firewall retrieves the group, matching policies, to see if the Internet access is allowed. When a user logs in, the GTA SSOAuth service returns the user s primary group to the firewall. The GTA SSOAuth server maintains the database of users that have authenticated via Active Directory. For more information on using GTA SSOAuth, see Reference C: Utilities. Note All Single Sign-On users are members of the Single Sign-On and ALL users groups. Requirements For Single Sign-On In order to use Single Sign-On the following requirements must be met for the AD server. 1. Windows 2008 R2 server or later. 2. Single Sign-On service v1.1.8 (GTA-SSOAuth server installed on AD server) 3. Active Directory server certificate installed on the firewall (Configure>VPN>Certificates) 4..NET Framework (or above) Single Sign-On Server Installation on Windows Server Mode In server mode, the firewall can point to up to three servers. The SSOAuth servers are installed on other hosts, or on the AD server itself. The firewall and SSOAuth clients then connect to the SSOAuth server. Client Mode The client mode is used when there is more than one AD server. In this mode, the clients point to the server and are installed on the AD servers. Configuring Single Sign-On PPP Setup 1. Enable AUTHENTICATION and the Single Sign-On feature [Configure->Accounts->Authentication]. 2. Enter the AD server IP address and select the AD server certificate. Note: Windows AD servers using the older Single Sign-on service v1.1.7 require the Policy Compatiblity option checked. 3. Click SAVE. 4. Optional: Configure the same groups, that are on the AD server, on the firewall at (Configure>Accounts>Groups). The ALL group or LDAP group can be used if the user does not wish to configure the groups. 5. Apply AUTHENTICATION on security policies per corporate policy. PPP connections are frequently used in conjunction with dial-up modems or DSL ISPs. PPP configures a PPP (Point-to-Point Protocol), PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet) or PPTP (Point-to-Point Transport Protocol) connection for the firewall. PPP, PPPoE and PPTP are not supported on a bridged interface. To configure a PPP connection, navigate to Configure>Network>Interfaces>Settings. PPP connections can be applied to a new or existing interface by changing the interface type. To enable PPP in Network Interface Settings: 1. Navigate to Configure>Network>Interfaces>Settings, Create a new interface and change the type to PPP(SERIAL) 70 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

71 2. Select the GATEWAY check box. Once this has been selected, the system will dynamically negotiate the IP address of the gateway. If you wish to configure a PPPoE or PPTP connection, please refer to their appropriate subsections. Figure 3.7: PPP Setup Field Name Zone NIC Description Gateway PPP Connection Type Description Table 3.9: PPP Setup Enter user defi ned interface name. Select an interface type: External, Protected or PSN. Automatically set to PPP0, PPP1, PPP2, PPP3, etc. A user-defi ned description of the connection. Use the interface as a gateway. <On-Demand> Initiates and establishes a link with the remote site whenever a packet arrives on a protected or PSN interface destined for the external network. The link will stay up as long as packets continue to be received before the time-out has expired. <Dedicated> Establishes a link when the fi rewall boots up and remains up until the interface is manually disabled, or the system is halted. Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 71

72 Field Primary COM Port Phone Number User Name Description Table 3.9: PPP Setup COM port or USB port used for the PPP interface. The phone number used to dial the remote site. This field should contain any required access codes (e.g. 9 to dial out). Characters used for pauses and secondary dial tones can be used. Consult your modem or ISDN TA manual for dialing codes. User ID for remote access. User ID and password are generally issued by the remote site. Password Password for remote access. Once entered, this field will be obscured. Select modify to enter a new password. Local IP Address/Remote IP Address Default Advanced Connection Login User Name A PPP-type link uses a local and remote IP address. If the remote site supports dynamic IP address assignments (as for most ISPs and remote sites), leave the local address set to the default, Set the remote address to an IP address on the remote network, such as the router IP or the DNS server address. PPP will use that address to dynamically negotiate the actual value. If the Remote IP address is static (dedicated), enter the address and leave the Local IP address set to If both addresses are static, set both fields to the appropriate IP address. Enter a login user name for cases in which CHAP or PAP is negotiated, and a separate name and password are required to log in. Login Password Enter a login password for cases in which CHAP or PAP is negotiated, and a separate name and password are required to log in. Speed DTE (Data Terminating Equipment) speed is the speed at which the fi rewall communicates with the modem. Default is <115200>. Time Before Retry The amount of time the system waits before re-dialing to establish a connection. Default is 10 seconds. Timeout The number of seconds during which a connection will stay connected during periods of inactivity. To prevent timing out on a connection, enter a value of 0. Default is 600 (10 minutes). Link Control Protocol * Local/Remote Address/Field Compression Enabled by default. Line Quality Report Disabled by default. Protocol Field Compression Enabled by default. Van Jacobson Compression Enabled by default. Debug (must be in Detailed List View to see debug messages) Chat Records dialing and login chat script conversations. LCP Records LCP conversations. Use to set non-default Link Control Protocol options. Phase Records network phase conversations. Use to determine LOCAL and REMOTE IP address specifi cations. ISDN Don t Bond Channels Use to configure ISDN connections. Check with your provider for required settings. Disabled by default. Switch Type Use to configure ISDN connections. Check with your provider for required settings. * Each Link Control Protocol (LCP) option has a pair of settings for each link, LOCAL and REMOTE. If a local setting is enabled, the firewall will request that the remote side use that LCP. If LOCAL is disabled, the firewall will not send a request for that LCP. If REMOTE 72 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

73 is enabled, and the remote side of the connection offers to use the protocol, the firewall will accept it. If it is disabled, then the firewall will not accept the LCP if the remote side offers it. PPPoE Transport PPPoE is commonly used to assign IP addresses by DSL service providers. Note GB-OS automatically detects connection preferences so that the user is no longer required to enter chat or dial scripts, select CHAP or PAP, or set parity and fl ow control. Enabling PPPoE in Network Settings: 1. Navigate to Configure>Network>Interfaces>Settings, create a new interface and set type to PPP(PPPoE). 2. Select the GATEWAY checkbox. Once this has been selected, the system will dynamically negotiate the IP address of the gateway. The DHCP Selection will be unavailable. Figure 3.8: PPP Setup using PPPoE Transport Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 73

74 Field Name Zone NIC Description Gateway PPP Connection Type NIC User Name Table 3.10: PPP Setup using PPPoE Transport Description Enter a user defi ned interface name. Select interface type: External, Protected or PSN. Select the physical interface on which the PPPoE will operate on. A user-defi ned description of the connection. Use the interface as a gateway. <On-Demand> Initiates and establishes a link with the remote site whenever a packet arrives on a protected or PSN interface destined for the external network. The link will stay up as long as packets continue to be received before the time-out has expired. <Dedicated> Establishes a link when the fi rewall boots up and remains up until the interface is manually disabled, or the system is halted. A selection for the network interface on which PPPoE will run. User ID for remote access. User ID and password are generally issued by the remote site. Password Password remote access. Once entered, this fi eld will be obscured. Select modify to enter a new password. Local IP Address/Remote IP Address Default Advanced Connection PPPoE Provider A PPP-type link uses a local and remote IP address. If the remote site supports dynamic IP address assignment (as for most ISPs and remote sites), leave the local address set to the default, Set the remote address to an IP address on the remote network, such as the router IP or the DNS server address. PPP will use that address to dynamically negotiate the actual value. If the Remote IP address is static (dedicated), enter the address and leave the Local IP address set to If both addresses are static, set both fields to the appropriate IP address. Designation for the PPPoE Provider. Leave blank if you do not know the exact designation. The value is usually not required for the connection, and an incorrect setting can prevent the connection. MTU Maximum Transmission Unit. GTA recommends setting the fi eld at 0, which allows the system to negotiate the MTU value for each PPPoE connection. Incorrect values can cause the system to perform poorly, or not at all. Time Before Retry The amount of time the system waits before re-dialing to establish a connection. Default is 10 seconds. Timeout The number of seconds during which a connection will stay connected during periods of inactivity. To prevent timing out on a connection, enter a value of 0. Default is 600 (10 minutes). Link Control Protocol * Local/Remote Address/Field Compression Enabled by default. Line Quality Report Enabled by default. Protocol Field Compression Enabled by default. Van Jacobson Compression Disabled by default. Debug (must be in Detailed List View to see debug messages) Chat Records dialing and login chat script conversations. LCP Records LCP conversations. Use to set non-default Link Control Protocol options. 74 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

75 Field Phase Table 3.10: PPP Setup using PPPoE Transport Description Records network phase conversations. Use to determine LOCAL and REMOTE IP address specifi cations. * Each Link Control Protocol (LCP) option has a pair of settings for each link, LOCAL and REMOTE. If a local setting is enabled, the firewall will request that the remote side use that LCP. If LOCAL is disabled, the firewall will not send a request for that LCP. If REMOTE is enabled, and the remote side of the connection offers to use the protocol, the firewall will accept it. If it is disabled, then the firewall will not accept the LCP if the remote side offers it. PPTP Transport PPTP is typically used on GTA firewalls by some ISPs as an alternative to DHCP when allocating subnet IP addresses. It encapsulates and uses encryption on packets so that data or internal network IPs cannot be seen during transit over phone lines or the Internet. It does this by creating a link from an unroutable internal IP address to an external IP address through the use of an internal PPTP server with a routable IP address. PPTP requires the creation of a inbound policy for use. To use PPTP: 1. Create a new logical interface in Configure>Network>Settings and set its TYPE to PPP(PPTP). Figure 3.9: PPP Setup using PPTP Transport Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 75

76 Field DHCP Gateway IP Address Name Zone NIC Description PPP Gateway PPP Connection Type PPTP Server IP Address Phone Number User Name Table 3.11: PPP Setup using PPTP Transport Description Not selectable. Automatically set from the selection in the following section. IP address for internal PPTP interface. User defi ne interface name. Selected External, Protected or PSN. Select the physical network interface to use for the connection. A user defi ned description of the connection. Use this interface as a gateway. <On-Demand> Initiates and establishes a link with the remote site whenever a packet arrives on a protected or PSN interface destined for the external network. The link will stay up as long as packets continue to be received before the time-out has expired. <Dedicated> Establishes a link when the fi rewall boots up and remains up until the interface is manually disabled, or the system is halted. Enter the IP address of the PPTP server. The phone number used to dial the remote site. This field should contain any required access codes (e.g. 9 to dial out). Characters used for pauses and secondary dial tones can be used. Consult your modem or ISDN TA manual for dialing codes. User ID for remote access. User ID and password are generally issued by the remote site. Password Password remote access. Once entered, this fi eld will be obscured. Select modify to enter a new password. Local IP Address/Remote IP Address Default Advanced Connection Time Before Retry Timeout A PPP-type link uses a local and remote IP address. If the remote site supports dynamic IP address assignment (as for most ISPs and remote sites), leave the local address set to the default, Set the remote address to an IP address on the remote network, such as the router IP or the DNS server address. PPP will use that address to dynamically negotiate the actual value. If the Remote IP address is static (dedicated), enter the address and leave the Local IP address set to If both addresses are static, set both fields to the appropriate IP address. The amount of time the system waits before re-dialing to establish a connection. Default is 10 seconds. The number of seconds during which a connection will stay connected during periods of inactivity. To prevent timing out on a connection, enter a value of 0. Default is 600 (10 minutes). 76 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

77 Field Table 3.11: PPP Setup using PPTP Transport Description Link Control Protocol * Local/Remote Address/Field Compression Enabled by default. Line Quality Report Enabled by default. Protocol Field Compression Enabled by default. Van Jacobson Compression Disabled by default. Debug (must be in Detailed List View to see debug messages) Chat Records dialing and login chat script conversations. LCP Records LCP conversations. Use to set non-default Link Control Protocol options. Phase Records network phase conversations. Use to determine LOCAL and REMOTE IP address specifi cations. * Each Link Control Protocol (LCP) option has a pair of settings for each link, LOCAL and REMOTE. If a local setting is enabled, the firewall will request that the remote side use that LCP. If LOCAL is disabled, the firewall will not send a request for that LCP. If REMOTE is enabled, and the remote side of the connection offers to use the protocol, the firewall will accept it. If it is disabled, then the firewall will not accept the LCP if the remote side offers it. Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 77

78 DHCP Server The DHCP service automates assignment of IP addresses and configures the DNS server and gateway for computers on local networks using DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol). When the DHCP service receives an initial request from a client host, it assigns an available IP address from its address range. Upon subsequent requests by the same MAC address, the DHCP Server will attempt to reassign the same IP address. The only case in which it will not reassign the same IP address is when the number of DHCP clients exceeds the number of IP addresses available, and the IP address has been assigned to a different host. The DHCP service manages a range of IP addresses (e.g through ) which can be assigned to hosts. Non-contiguous sets of IP addresses can be defined using exclusion ranges. Exclusion ranges, configured under the ADVANCED tab, indicate which IP addresses within the previously defined address range must not be assigned to hosts. WINS uses a distributed database that is automatically updated with the names of computers currently available and the IP address assigned to each one. To use WINS, enter the IP address of the WINS server in the WINS SERVER IP ADDRESS field. Hosts on the network must be configured to point to the DEFAULT GATEWAY for the location of their WINS server. The DHCP service can also assign static leases to hosts on the network. Static leases are useful for managing static systems, such as print servers, mail servers or other hosts that need fixed configurations. Static leases are configured under the ADVANCED tab. To configure the DHCP server, navigate to Configure>Services>DHCP>Server and deselect the DISABLE check box. Both DHCPv4 and DHCPv6 are supported. Changes to the DHCP service are applied when you click SAVE. DHCPv4 78 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

79 Figure 3.10a: DHCPv4 Server Setup Field Disable Type Description Beginning Address Ending Address Netmask Lease Duration Options Default Gateway Domain Name Name Server IP Address WINS Server IP Address Network Time Advanced MTU TFTP Server Advanced Static Leases Disable Host Name IP Address MAC Address Description Exclusion Ranges Exclusion Ranges Description Table 3.12a: DHCPv4 Setup Disable this DHCP IP address pool. Select DHCPv4. User-defi ned description of the IP address pool. First IP address of the pool s range. Last IP address of the pool s range. Subnet mask used to divide hosts into network groups. Maximum length of time the assigned IP address may be used before renewal. A client must negotiate IP address renewal before the expiration of the lease, or quit using the IP address. Gateway (default route) given to DHCP clients. For hosts located behind a firewall (on protected or PSNs) this will be the IP address of the fi rewall s corresponding interface. DNS domain name, typically that of the local network. IP address of a DNS server that will be issued to the requesting client. This can be any valid server: a local server, such as the built-in DNS Server, or a remote server, such as one located at an ISP. Up to three name servers can be defi ned. IP address of the WINS server that will be issued to the requesting client. Up to three WINS servers can be defi ned. IP address of the network time server that will be issued to the requesting client. Up to three network time servers can be defi ned. Maximum Transmission Unit. The MTU size determines the greatest packet size that can be transmitted by the DHCP service. A value of 0 means the fi eld is ignored. Enter the TFTP server for transferring data. Disables the selected row. The host name to be used by the static lease. The desired IP address to be statically leased to the host. The host s MAC address. A description of the host s static lease. Defi ne up to fi ve address ranges to exclude from each DHCP range. To exclude a single IP address, enter it in both the beginning and ending address fi elds. Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 79

80 DHCPv6 The IPv6 DHCP Server requires that the firewall be configured for prefix advertisement. For more information, see the Configuring IPv6 Guide. To configure the DHCP server, navigate to Configure>Services>DHCP>Server and choose DHCPv6 in the TYPE pulldown. Figure 3.10b: DHCPv6 Server Setup Field Disable Type Description Beginning Address Ending Address Prefix Length Lease Duration Options Domain Name Name Server IP Address Advanced Static Leases Disable Host Name IP Address Client DUID Description Exclusion Ranges Exclusion Ranges Description Table 3.12b: DHCPv6 Setup Disable this DHCP IP address pool. Select DHCPv6. User-defi ned description of the IP address pool. First IP address of the pool s range. Last IP address of the pool s range. Defi ne the prefi x length. Maximum length of time the assigned IP address may be used before renewal. A client must negotiate IP address renewal before the expiration of the lease, or quit using the IP address. DNS domain name, typically that of the local network. IP address of a DNS server that will be issued to the requesting client. This can be any valid server: a local server, such as the built-in DNS Server, or a remote server, such as one located at an ISP. Up to three name servers can be defi ned. Disables the selected row. The host name to be used by the static lease. The desired IP address to be statically leased to the host. Enter the client s DHCP unique identifi er. A description of the host s static lease. Defi ne up to fi ve address ranges to exclude from each DHCP range. To exclude a single IP address, enter it in both the beginning and ending address fi elds. 80 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

81 DHCP Relay GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide The DHCP Relay screen is used to relay DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) traffic through the firewall. GB-OS and above supports DHCP relay based on RFC3046 and RFC2131. RFC 5107 is not supported. DHCP Relay Requirements GB-OS v5.3.2 or above DHCP server with a scope assigned to the same network as a GTA firewall interface upon which the broadcast messages arrives. If the firewall will be the default route for the host receiving DHCP addresses, the DHCP server must assign the firewall interface IP which received the client broadcast messages as the router or gateway. Example DHCP Relay The example below displays a Protected Zone to Protected Zone connection. The firewall IP address on the DHCP client network is /24. The DHCP server, , is configured to assign addresses from the range (scope) with a netmask of (24 bits) and default gateway of GB-2000 Figure 3.11: Example DHCP Relay Setup with a Protected Zone to Protected Zone Connection. Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 81

82 Note DHCP server and DHCP Relay are mutually exclusive. You cannot run both services on the same fi rewall. You also cannot relay DHCP client requests through an IPSec Tunnel/VPN. Configuration 1. Navigate to Configure>Services>DHCP>Relay. Check the enable box and enter the DHCP server IP address. Figure 3.12: DHCP Relay Setup 2. Under Advanced, enable automatic policies to create an automatic inbound policy as needed to accept DHCP responses from the configured DHCP server(s). Example Automatic Policy: Accept notice ANY nolog udp/67->67 from to Select the type of binding interface. 4. The firewall will listen for DHCP client broadcast messages, change these requests to unicast messages, and then forward them to the configured DHCP server(s). 5. Once the client has a DHCP address, it will connect directly to the DHCP server when the lease is renewed. Outbound security policies will control access between the DHCP client and server. By default, all access is allowed between Zones of type Protected. If a restrictive security policy is in place you may need to add an outbound policy to allow connection to and from the DHCP clients and server(s). Below are examples of these policies: Figure 3.13: Outbound Security Policies PSN to Protected DHCP Relay If the DHCP Server is located on an interface whose ZONE is Protected and the clients are on an interface whose ZONE is type PSN or External. The client will receive an initial lease, however, renewals will fail. The firewall will log = Invalid NAT request. Example Block Message: 82 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

83 Jun 29 09:27:02 pri=4 pol _ action=block count=3 msg= Invalid NAT request duration=11 proto=67/udp src= srcport=68 dst= dstport=67 interface= Avlan1 attribute=alarm Note GTA fi rewalls confi gured for DHCP relay will pass the DHCP server options such as NTP, DNS and others. More than one DHCP server can be confi gured for relay by creating an address object with the DHCP server address and then reference this in the Servers object. By default, connections from a PSN or External Network to an internal network whose zone is Protected are not allowed. In addition, connections from a PSN zone to another PSN zone are not allowed. The initial connection to the DHCP server is handled by the firewall DHCP relay server. The client broadcast messages are converted to unicast messages and directed to the DHCP server. Once the initial lease is handed out to the client, the client will send a renewal request directly to the DHCP server. If the client is on PSN or an External network it will attempt to directly connect to the DHCP server, resulting in an invalid NAT request. Resolution to this issue is to remove Network Address Translation from the DHCP server going to the PSN or External network. This is configured in Configure>Network>Pass Through>Host/Networks. Next, add a Security Policy to allow access for DHCP requests to the server. This is located in Configure>Security Policies>Pass Through. Example of the Host Networks and Pass Through Policy to allow DHCP relay from a PSN client to a DHCP server on Protected or another PSN network: Figure 3.14: Configuring Hosts/Networks and Pass Through Policies for DHCP Relay A common problem is that the DHCP client s initial DHCP request will work, however, the renewals will fail. To correct: 1. Confirm the DHCP server(s) can route correctly to the DHCP client network. If the DHCP server gateway does not point to the firewall performing the DHCP relay service, static routes MAY need to be added to the DHCP server, or to the DHCP servers gateway, to correctly route to the DHCP client network. Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 83

84 2. Confirm the gateway option assigned to the client is the firewall s local interface that receives the DHCP client broadcast messages. Dynamic DNS Setup Dynamic DNS automates the process of advising DNS servers when the dynamically assigned IP address for a network device is changed, ensuring that a specific domain name always points to the correct IP address. The domain name tracks the dynamic address so that other users on the Internet can easily reach the domain, allowing you to host a Web site, FTP or server even when your IP address is dynamic. The Dynamic DNS service allows you to publish your new dynamic IP address by using one of the following services from the SERVICE pull down menu: DynDNS ( DyNU ( ChangeIP ( EasyDNS (web.easydns.com) No-IP ( Note To sign up for the Dynamic DNS services and for more information on Dynamic DNS, see the provider s Web site. The current external IP address on the firewall will update the selected service each time the IP address changes, or once a month, whichever comes first. To configure Dynamic DNS, navigate to Configure>Services>Dynamic DNS and toggle to the ENABLE check box to enable the service. Select NEW to create a new Dynamic DNS definition or select EDIT to modify a pre-defined one. Figure 3.15: Configuring Dynamic DNS Field Disable Description Host Name Interface Service Login User Name Login Password Table 3.13: Dynamic DNS Setup Description Disables the Dynamic DNS service. Enter a description of the Dynamic DNS service. The host name registered with the Dynamic DNS service that will be updated. A selection for the interface to have Dynamic DNS applied to it. A selection for the Dynamic DNS service provider. An active account with the selected service provider is required. The user name registered with your Dynamic DNS service provider. The password associated with the registered user name. Once entered, this fi eld will be obscured. Select modify to enter a new password. 84 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

85 DNS Server Setup GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide The DNS (Domain Name System) service translates alphanumeric server names into IP addresses. Each time a server name is used, the DNS service must translate the name into its corresponding IP address. For example, the server name example.com might translate to In this section, configuration of the DNS server will be explained. To learn more about setting up a DNS proxy, as well as the advantages and disadvantages of running a DNS proxy versus a DNS server, see DNS Setup in Basic Setup Tasks. Note GTA recommends a thorough knowledge of the domain name system before confi guring any DNS server. One reference is DNS and Bind, 5th Edition, by Paul Albitz & Cricket Liu, published by O Reilly and Associates. Note On select GTA fi rewalls, the DNS Server is an option and requires an activation code. See your product specifi cations for more information. Configuring the DNS Server The DNS server allows the firewall to function as a primary domain name server, maintaining a database of domain names and IP addresses of hosts where those domains reside. See Configuring the DNS Proxy in Basic Setup Tasks to configure the firewall as a DNS proxy if an internal DNS server is not necessary. To setup the DNS server, navigate to Configure>Services>DNS. Select NEW to create a new DNS server definition or select EDIT to modify a pre-defined one. Figure 3.16: Configuring the DNS Server Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 85

86 Field Name Servers Enable IP Address Primary Domain Name DNS Enable Service Advanced Automatic Policies Cache DNS Server Server Name Secondary Server Names Forwarders Table 3.14: Configuring the DNS Server Description Enables the name servers listed in this section. Disabled by default. IP address(es) of the external DNS server(s) that will provide records for your external hosts. Primary domain name used for the network (e.g., example.com) Enables the select DNS service. DNS Proxy is selected by default. To confi gure the DNS server, select the DNS server option to allow hosts to use the fi rewall as a DNS resolver. Enable to have the fi rewall generate automatic policies to allow the use of the DNS server. Enabled by default. Confi gure DNS cache value. Default is 168 hours. Host name of your DNS server. This may be the host name assigned to your fi rewall. When confi guring an external DNS server, this will be the Internet apparent host name. The host name should be listed as a host in the DNS Domain screen or tab. Host names of DNS servers acting as alternate name servers for the domain. Allows the DNS server to act as a proxy and forward DNS lookups to other DNS servers. Trusted Networks Networks or IP Addresses allowed for recursive DNS searches. Contact address of the primary contact for the domain. Domains Create New Click the link to create new DNS domains Advanced Subnets Network IP Address Network address/subnet mask of the desired subnet. Class C: /24 ( ) and Class B: /16 ( ) are commonly used networks. Reverse Zone Name Optional name used by reverse DNS, which looks up an IP address to obtain a domain name and confi rm a DNS record. The fi rewall can determine the zone name automatically if the subnet uses a Class A, B or C subnet mask. Reverse zone names are typically assigned by your ISP. 86 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

87 Creating DNS Domains GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide The DNS Domain screen allows the user to define host names and associated IP addresses (A records), aliases (CNAME records) and exchangers (MX records) for the selected domain. Select NEW to create a new DNS domain or select EDIT to modify a pre-defined DNS domain. Figure 3.17: Creating DNS Domains Field Disable Domain Name Description IP Address Mail Exchangers SPF TXT Hosts Disable RDNS IP Address Host Names TXT Description Table 3.15: DNS Server Setup Disables the domain defi nition so the zone will not be served by the DNS server. Domain name of the defi ned zone (e.g., example.com) Description of the domain for reference. IP address of a host to respond to the zone name. A host can have the same name as the zone, e.g., example.com, meaning that if you have a Web server, a visitor can use the zone name rather than the Web server s host name. When a remote system sends mail to a domain, it will query a DNS server to determine which IP addresses are designated to accept for the zone. The Mail Exchanger (MX) fi elds defi ne the mail servers for the domain. When there is more than one exchanger, the order of preference is specifi ed by entering the preferred server in the fi rst fi eld, followed by the second and third entry. The fi rst mail exchanger will be priority 5, the second priority 10 and the third priority 15. Enter a SPF (Sender Policy Framework) record. SPF allows administrators to specify which hosts are allowed to send mail from a given domain by creating a specifi c SPF record (or TXT record) in DNS. Enter a DNS text entry record. Disables the host entry. Optional name used by reverse DNS (RDNS), which looks up an IP address to obtain a domain name and confi rm a DNS record. The fi rewall can determine the zone name automatically if the subnet uses a Class A, B or C subnet mask. Reverse zone names are often assigned by your ISP. IP address of the host. Primary host name in the fi rst fi eld and aliases in succeeding fi elds. The domain portion of the host name should not be entered. For example, enter mail instead of mail.example.com. To defi ne more than two aliases, repeat the host s IP address in the next row. DNS text entry record. Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 87

88 Routing Traffic Traffic routing is based upon the combined configuration of aliases, tunnels, pass through policies, RIP (Routing Information Protocol), and gateways. Note Any packet that goes through the fi rewall will use the fi rewall s routing tables. If Configure>Network> Routing>Gateway Policies POLICY BASED ROUTING and appropriate fi rewall policies dictate, the default gateway may also be altered. Alias Setup Aliases allow a network interface to possess multiple IP addresses. An IP alias may be assigned to any network interface. Aliases are especially useful on the external network interface, or if multiple hosts on the PSN or protected network are required for the same service via a tunnel (e.g., multiple internal Web servers that all serve content to the external network). Aliases used on an external interface attached to the Internet must be legitimate, registered IP addresses. An alias does not need to have the same subnet as the real IP address, since the GTA firewall will route packets between all networks to which it is logically attached. Note See product specifi cations for the maximum number of IP aliases available on a specifi c model. To configure aliases, navigate to Configure>Network>Interfaces>Aliases. Select NEW to create a new alias or select EDIT to modify a pre-defined alias. Figure 3.18: Alias Setup Field Name Disable Name Description Interface IP Address Description Table 3.16: Aliases A toggle for whether the alias should be disabled or not. Default is off. A unique name to identify the alias elsewhere in the fi rewall s confi guration. Alias names may not use a number as the fi rst character. A short description to identify the function of the alias. The interface the alias will be applied to. The IP address of the alias. 88 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

89 NAT Setup GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide Network Address Translation (NAT) translates an IP address behind the firewall to the IP address of the external network interface, disguising the original IP address. Using NAT makes it possible to use a non-registered IP address within protected networks and PSNs, while still presenting a registered IP address to the external network (typically the Internet). NAT is active by default on all GTA firewalls. NAT is applied to outbound packets from: A protected network to an external network A protected network to a PSN A PSN to an external network A protected network to another protected network NAT is available in two forms: dynamic and static, which are referred to as default NAT and static mapping. If needed, NAT can be bypassed by using pass through policies. Creating Inbound Tunnels Inbound tunnels allow external hosts to initiate connections with internal hosts using service groups (e.g., TCP, UDP or ICMP). Normally the firewall blocks all inbound traffic to the internal networks. Tunnels allow, for example, computers such as Web (service group HTTP) servers on a PSN to be accessible from the Internet. Note See product specifi cations for the number of tunnels available on a specifi c model. Tunnels can be defined for traffic from either external networks or the PSN. Tunnels are typically used with inbound connections, they are not normally used for traffic originating from a protected network interface, which is by default allowed access to the other logical network types without use of a tunnel. Tunnels can be created for these inbound connections: From an external network interface to a host on a PSN From an external network interface to a host on a protected network From a PSN interface to a host on a protected network Tunnels are defined by an interface, service and an internal destination IP address. The external and internal destination port of the tunnel definition need not be the same; it is possible to provide access to multiple hosts for the same service using a single IP address. For example, telnet operates on port 23, but a tunnel could be defined with an external destination port of 99 and an internal destination port of 23. Only the external destination side of the tunnel is visible. Since tunnels transparently forward the connection using NAT, a user on the external network side will never see the ultimate destination of the tunnel. The tunnel appears to be a service operating on the firewall to the connecting host. If a tunnel originates from an IP alias address, you may need to map the destination host to the IP alias using static address mapping so that secondary connections appear to originate from the same address as the tunnel. To create an inbound tunnel: 1. Navigate to Configure>Network>NAT>Inbound Tunnels and click the NEW icon to create a new inbound tunnel. 2. Select the SERVICE the tunnel will use from the drop down list. In the FROM field, select the address object that represents the source interface for the beginning of the tunnel. In the TO field, select the address object that represents the destination IP address for the end of the tunnel. Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 89

90 Note 3. Unless disabled, AUTOMATIC POLICY will generate policies to allow connection to the inbound tunnel. Otherwise, allow access to the inbound tunnel by using a inbound policy. A tunnel is a mapping from one IP address/port to another IP address/port, allowing the connection to be properly routed. However, the tunnel will not be usable unless an appropriate policy on the firewall allows the connection to be made in the first place. An asterisk ( * ) appearing on the far left of the list icons for an inbound tunnel indicates the inbound tunnel contains an inactive time-based policy. To resolve, select a valid time-group for the inbound tunnel. Figure 3.19: Creating Inbound Tunnels Field Name Disable Description Service From To Advanced Automatic Policy Hide Source Options Description Table 3.17: Inbound Tunnels A toggle for whether the inbound tunnel should be disabled or not. Default is off. A short description to identify the function of the inbound tunnel. Select the IP Protocol to be used by the inbound tunnel. Select the interface or alias for the beginning of the tunnel. Select the internal destination address of the tunnel. Select <USER DEFINED> to manually defi ne the tunnel s destination. Selecting * EDIT * allows you to create a new address object. A toggle for whether the fi rewall should automatically accept all traffi c for the tunnel regardless of confi gured policies. Disabling this check box renders the Options and Traffic Shaping confi guration settings uneditable. Hides the source of the inbound tunnel connection. Hiding the source of the inbound tunnel can be useful for getting around some internal routing confl icts. Normally, hiding the inbound tunnel s source is not required. 90 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

91 Field Name Authentication Required IPS Source SYN Cookies Time Group Traffic Shaping Policy Weight Description Table 3.17: Inbound Tunnels Authentication allows the administrator to require users to authenticate to the fi rewall using GBAuth before initiating a connection. A toggle for whether traffi c travelling along the inbound tunnel should be checked against confi gured Intrusion Prevention policies. See Intrusion Prevention System in the Threat Management chapter for more information. A selection for the source of the inbound tunnel. Select <* EDIT *> to defi ne a new address object A toggle for whether TCP SYN Cookies should be used or not. A selection for which, if any, time group the inbound tunnel options will be applied. Select the traffi c shaping policy to be used. See Applying Traffi c Shaping for more information. Select the weight of the allocation for the inbound tunnel s bandwidth. A weight of 10 has the highest priority, a weight of 1 has the lowest. If the AUTOMATIC ACCEPT ALL POLICY check box has been disabled, this fi eld will uneditable. Creating Static Mappings Static mapping allows an internal IP address, subnet, alias or interface to be statically mapped to an external IP address during NAT. By default, all IP addresses on the protected networks and PSNs are dynamically assigned to the primary IP address of the outbound network interface. Static address mapping is used when it is desirable to statically assign the IP address used in NAT. Note See product specifi cations for the number of static mappings available on a specifi c model. To use static address mapping, first assign at least one IP alias to the desired outbound network interface (external network interface or PSN interface). Mapping is only associated with outbound connections Map definitions may be for a single host or a subnet To configure static mapping, navigate to Configure>Network>NAT>Static Mapping. Select NEW to create a new static mapping or select EDIT to modify a pre-defined static mapping. Figure 3.20: Creating Static Mappings Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 91

92 Table 3.18: Static Mappings Field Name Disable Description Service From NAT Destination Description A toggle for whether the static mapping should be disabled or not. Default is off. A short description to identify the function of the static mapping. A selection to specify a service group to statically map to an Alias. Select the address object that will be mapped. Select the interface representing the IP address to which the source will be mapped. Select the address object that will correspond to a destination IP address. Allowing Static Mapping Static mapping is allowed in the following cases: From a host or subnet on the protected network to an IP alias assigned to the PSN interface From a host or subnet on the protected network to an IP alias assigned to the external network interface From a host or subnet on the PSN to an IP alias assigned to the external network interface Pass Through Setup Functions in the Configure>Network>Pass Through section allow the user to route connections through the firewall, thus bypassing NAT. Pass through security policies (found in Configure>Security Policies>Pass Through) control what connections are allowed to be passed through the firewall. Note By default, all outbound connections destined for external or PSN networks are NAT d to the IP address of the external or PSN interface. Pass through bypasses this default NAT. NAT is not performed on inbound pass through connections, from the external network to the PSN or protected network, or from the PSN to the protected network. Pass through policies support all IP protocols. Pass through can define traffic without NAT for a host on a: Protected network to a host on another protected network Protected network outbound through a PSN and external interface Protected network outbound through a PSN interface only Protected network outbound through an external interface only PSN outbound through an external interface only A pass through security policy requires: Defined IP addresses in Hosts/Networks (Configure>Network>Pass Through>Hosts\Networks) Internal hosts to have a routable address on the subnet if the traffic goes to the Internet through the external interface A pass through security policy allowing connections to flow from and/or to the internal IP address Note By default, inbound traffi c will not know how to route back to reach the internal pass through hosts. To allow inbound traffic to pass through hosts, add a static route to the gateway (Internet router) that routes packets for the pass through hosts through the fi rewall s external interface. 92 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

93 Note If an IP address in a pass through policy uses the external network or protected network interface as a routable address with the Internet, the IP address must be registered. See RFC 1918 for more information ( By default, pass through policies are configured for outbound traffic only. Stateful packet inspection information is maintained for outbound sessions originating from hosts on a PSN or a protected network, guaranteeing that only replies to the initiated connections are accepted. If the connection protocol calls for a secondary inbound connection from an external host to the originating internal host, virtual cracks are created to allow the secondary connection. This allows multi-connection protocols such as FTP to be used without arbitrary, semi-permanent inbound connections. Pass through provides great routing flexibility. For example, with proper pass through policies, the firewall can apply NAT to some traffic (e.g. protected network packets with a destination within the PSN), but not apply NAT to other traffic (e.g. external/internet traffic). Security Policies Pass through security policies control access to and from hosts specified in Hosts/Networks. These policies are different from remote access and outbound policies, since they control both inbound and outbound access, so the firewall functions as either a router or gateway for these IP addresses. Pass through policies use addresses defined in Hosts/Networks in their definitions, not firewall network interface addresses. Pass through policies are used in two scenarios: When pass through hosts/networks are defined When the firewall is using bridging mode Typically, two policies are required for each host/network IP address: outbound and inbound. If hosts/ networks are already defined, the firewall will create a pre-configured inbound/outbound policy pair based on those defined IP addresses. The pre-configured (default) policies vary according to options selected. Pass through policies are defined in the same manner as remote access or outbound policies, and the rules concerning policy index order and order of evaluation also apply. Denial of all traffic not explicitly allowed applies to pass through policies. For more information on configuring security policies, see Allowing and Denying Traffic in Basic Setup Tasks and Creating Advanced Allow/Deny Policies later in this chapter. Creating Pass Through Policy Pairs Pass through addresses need inbound and outbound policies, one policy for each direction of traffic. To create a pass through policy pair: Create the outbound connection policy by adding a policy. Complete the policy definition in the same manner as an outbound policy, specifying the same source address object as the pass through address. Click OK to save. Create the inbound connection by adding an empty policy definition. Define the policy as you would a inbound policy except the destination address object will be the pass through address, Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 93

94 not the IP address on the firewall s network interface. Click OK to save. Once you have completed all the desired pass through policies, click the SAVE button on the policy set to save the policies and apply them to your firewall s configuration. Ensure pass through policies organized above the newly created policies do not supersede them. Defining Bridged Protocols Bridged protocols specify any non-ip Ethernet protocols you wish to explicitly allow to bypass all firewall policies between bridged interfaces. (IP protocols on bridged interfaces will still use normal firewall policies.) Requires bridge mode to be configured. CAUTION There are no fi rewall policies applied to protocols that have been allowed in the Bridged Protocols section.. To define a bridged protocol, navigate to Configure>Network>Pass Through>Bridged Protocols. Figure 3.21: Configuring Bridged Protocols Field Name Disable Description Type Allowed Log Table 3.19: Configuring Bridged Protocols Description A toggle for whether the bridged protocol should be disabled or not. Default is off. A short description to identify the bridged protocol. The number of the packet header of the designated protocol. 0x0 is a placeholder for the full hexadecimal protocol type number. Use the 0x prefi x when entering a number in hex format. Enable this check box to allow the protocol s traffi c on the bridged interface. Disabled by default. Enable to log events of that protocol type. Enabled by default. 94 Protocol Definitions Ethernet protocol definitions are generally unpublished, but some protocols in use are well known. For a collection of known Ethernet protocol types, please visit IANA s Web site at assignments/ethernet-numbers. To locate a definition for a protocol you need to bridge: 1. Configure the bridged protocol as desired. 2. Log blocked non-tcp/ip traffic on bridged interfaces. By default, this traffic is denied, but not logged. To log this denied traffic, enable logging for DENY UNEXPECTED PACKETS in Configuration>Security Policies>Preferences under Advanced Options. This will generate log messages (found in Monitor>System>Log Messages) containing the protocol types of the IP packets. 3. Enter the protocol s hexadecimal number with its prefix into the TYPE field. Decimal format numbers can also be entered; they will be displayed in hexadecimal. 4. Defined non-tcp/ip protocol definitions may be enabled and protocol acceptance and logging may be specified on an individual basis. To continue to deny a specific protocol but not log it, enter the protocol number and deselect the ALLOWED and LOG check box. To deny a protocol and log the denials, deselect the ALLOWED check box and select the LOG check box. To allow a protocol and not log it, select the ALLOWED check box and deselect the LOG check box. Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

95 Defining Hosts/Networks GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide Hosts/Networks specifies an IP address, subnet or network that will not have NAT applied to its traffic. See product specifications for the number of pass through hosts/networks available on a specific model. Note A Hosts/Networks entry is not required for pass through in bridging mode because no NAT is applied by defi nition. To create a new host or network: 1. Navigate to Configure>Network>Pass Through>Hosts/Networks. 2. In the Hosts/Networks configuration screen, select an object or <USER DEFINED> and enter an IP address (for a single host), IP address with subnet mask (for a subnet), or multiple IP address sets (for a network or multiple non-contiguous hosts) in the HOST field. Single IP addresses use /32 or / , indicating that there is only one host member of that subnet. 3. Select the DESTINATION INTERFACE that should not apply NAT when outbound IP packets are received. The destination interface is the interface the packet exits through. 4. If unsolicited IP packets should be accepted for the specified address, select the INBOUND check box. If you wish to allow only replies to outbound traffic, deselect INBOUND. Figure 3.22: Configuring Hosts/Networks Field Name Disable Description From IP Address Destination Interface Destination Inbound Table 3.20: Configuring Hosts/Networks Description A toggle for whether the host/network should be disabled or not. Default is off. A short description to identify the host/network. Select the address object that will be used as the host member. If an address object cannot be used, enter the IP address and subnet mask that will be mapped (e.g., to a map a single IP address, use a subnet mask of /32 ( )). Select the destination interface that should not apply NAT when outbound connections are received. Select the destination address. Accepts unsolicited connections from the specifi ed IP address. Disabled by default. Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 95

96 Bridging Interfaces By bridging interfaces, additional interfaces can be configured to share the IP address from one of the primary interfaces. TCP/IP packets pass between these bridged interfaces according to normal firewall rules on specified ports if allowed by a pass through security policy. Bridging is only supported for IPv4 interfaces. CAUTION Packets with TCP/IP Ethernet protocols that have been allowed in Configure>Network>Pass Through>Bridged Protocols can bypass all fi ltering between bridged interfaces. Allowing unnecessary protocols, or protocols that may contain untrusted traffi c, can pose a serious security vulnerability to your network and is not recommended by GTA. To bridge interfaces: 1. Navigate to Configure>Network>Interfaces>Settings. 2. Select the EDIT button to bridge a previously configured interface or select NEW to create a new interface. 3. In the TYPE field, select Bridge. 4. Inn the IP ADDRESS field, manually enter the IP address for the bridged interface. 5. Select the VLAN check box if configuring a VLAN interface. The HIGH AVAILABILITY field is disabled in bridge mode. 6. Enter a name for the bridged interface in the NAME field. 7. Select the bridged interface s ZONE, options are <External>, <Protected> or <PSN>. 8. Select the NIC to associate with the bridged network, such as <eth0>. The pull down menu lists all physical devices. 9. Enter description to explain the function of the bridged interface. 10. Click OK and then Save. Figure 3.23: Bridging Interfaces Field Name Disable Type IP Address Name Zone NIC Description Description Table 3.21: Bridging Interfaces Select the DISABLE check box to disable the bridged interface. Select Bridge to in order to create a bridged interface. Enter the primary IP address that will be bridged. The logical name for assigned to the bridged interface. A selection for the interface s type. Options are <External>, <Protected> or <PSN> A selection for the network interface card to associate with the bridged network. The pull down lists all physical devices and VLANs. A short description to identify the use of the bridged interface. 96 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

97 Bridging Mode GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide By default, a GTA firewall acts as a firewall router so that systems on the internal network see it as a gateway to the external network, and systems on the external network see it as the gateway to the internal network. The GTA firewall connects networks transparently like a bridge for specified Ethernet protocol types, while continuing to apply policies to other IP packets as a firewall. A GTA firewall in bridging mode can be inserted behind a router to the Internet between the router and the internal networks without changing IP addresses, gateways or any other network addresses for the rest of your network hosts. A GTA firewall in bridging mode can also be inserted into an internal network to separate networks that are at a peer level, or to further segregate PSNs. This configuration allows two internal networks to communicate as one, while filtering non-bridged IP traffic between them and preventing the passage of non-ip protocols (except ARP, which operates at both data link layer 2, and network layer 3). When in bridging mode, a GTA firewall can be connected directly to a host, a switch, a router or a non-bridged firewall. H 2 A - High Availability is not supported in bridging mode. PPP, PPPoE and PPTP are not supported on a bridged interface. If a host points to a router or gateway on a bridged interface as its default route to the Internet, the firewall will override that preference, routing the packet through its logical external network interface. Also, in bridging mode (as in unbridged firewall operation) any packet that goes through the firewall will use the firewall s routing tables. This means that even though a host may have indicated a particular route, the firewall will instead use the routes set up in Configure>Network>Routing>Gateway Policies, Configure>Network>Routing>OSPF, Configure>Network>Routing>BGP, Configure>Network>Routing>RIP and Configure>Network>Routing>Static Routing to route the traffic. Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 97

98 BGP Setup BGP (Border Gateway Protocol) is an Exterior Gateway Routing Protocol (EGRP) used for larger networks such as the Internet. BGP uses TCP port 179 to establish a connection between two or more routers. These routers are considered peers. Initially the routers exchange full routing information, once the connection is established the routers only send updates to their routing tables. Note BGP is only available on GB-2100, GB-2500 and GB-Ware. Note For more information on BGP, one recommended source is IP Routing, 1st Edition by Ravi Malhotra from O Reilly and Associates. Requirements for BGP: 1. Basic understanding of BGP. 2. Understanding of TCP/IP and routing. 3. BGP Neighbor(s) IP and Autonomous System (AS). To configure BGP: 1. Navigate to Configure>Network>Routing>BGP. 2. Select ENABLE. 3. Define the ROUTER AS in which the firewall belongs. 4. Configure the ROUTER ID. This number must be unique 5. Define the NETWORKS. This is the network(s) which will use BGP. 6. Define the BGP NEIGHBOR(s). 7. Enter the neighbors REMOTE AS and whether the firewall will ADVERTISE THE DEFAULT ROUTE. 8. Configure the ADVANCED REDISTRIBUTE and AGGREGATION options if needed. Figure 3.24: BGP Setup 98 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

99 Field Enable Router AS Router ID Networks Advanced Automatic Policies Redistribute Metric Connected OSPF RIP Static Description Table 3.22: Configuring BGP Enables the BGP interface and starts the service. The number assigned to a router or set of routers in a single technical administration. Router ID number. A selection for the network(s) which will use BGP. Enables the fi rewall to generate a set of automatic policies to allow a confi gured BGP interface to function properly. By default this is enabled. The policy created is for TCP port 179 and is viewable in the Monitor> Activity>Security Policies>Automatic section. Confi gure the metric when the route is redistributed. If enabled, routing information is sent for those networks directly assigned to the fi rewall--such as interfaces and aliases If enabled, routing information is sent for those networks that are confi gured via IGRP or OSPF. If enabled, routing information is sent for those networks confi gured via RIP. If enabled, outing information is sent for those networks that are statically assigned to the fi rewall. Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 99

100 Route Aggregation Aggregate Addresses AS set Summary Only The network(s) to aggregate. This selection will generate or send the AS set of other routers to the remote router. This selection fi lters the more specifi c routes when sending updates. To edit an existing BGP interface, select the EDIT icon. To create a new BGP interface, select the NEW icon. Figure 3.25: BGP Setup Field Disable Description Neighbor Remote AS Weight Advertise Default Route Advanced ebgp Multihop Next Hop Self Description Table 3.23: Configuring BGP Disables the BGP interface. A short description to identify the BGP interface. A selection for the IP address used to confi gure the peer routers the fi rewall will use to connect to BGP. The AS number of the peer router. Enter a BGP neighbor weight to indicate preference. Enable if the fi rewall will advertise itself as the default route. Enables BGP multihop. This selection disables the NEXT HOP SELF attribute for BGP. OSPF Setup OSPF (Open Shortest Path First Protocol) is an interior gateway routing protocol (IGRP). Using link state algorithm advertisements (LSA s) the router builds a database (LSDB) of the networks. OSPF uses protocol 89. Requirements for OSPF: 1. Basic understanding of OSPF. 2. Understanding of TCP/IP and routing. 3. OSPF Area information and IP Router ID for Virtual Links if needed. To configure OSPF: 1. Navigate to Configure>Network>Routing>OSPF. 2. Select ENABLE. 3. Enter the ROUTER ID in the form of (Example: ). 4. Under DEFAULT ROUTE, enable the ADVERTISE DEFAULT ROUTE if the firewall will be the default route. 5. Define the failover metric for the default route. The default setting is Create the OSPF Area(s). a. Area: Specify the OSPF area. b. Type: Determine the behavior of the firewall/router. 100 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

101 i. Normal: No restriction. ii. Stub: No Type 5 AS-external LSA allowed. iii. Stub No Summary: No Type 3, 4, or 5 LSAs allowed except the default route summary route. iv: NSSA: No Type 5 AS-external LSAs allowed; Type 7 LSAs that convert to Type 5 at the NSSA ABR can traverse.. v: NSSA No Summary: No Type 3, 4, or 5 LSAs except the default summary route; Type 7 LSAs that convert to Type 5 at the NSSA ABR are allowed. c. Networks: Select the network(s) which will use OSPF. d. Authentication: Must be enabled if authentication is required. Other routers in the same area must have a matching ID and password. e. Virtual Links: Identify if the firewall is not directly connected to the back bone (area 0). Virtual links are used to create a link to another router directly connected to the back bone. The target router should have a virtual link pointing back to this router. 6. Advanced steps a. Select AUTOMATIC POLICES to enable and set the DISTANCE. b Configure redistribution if needed. The DEFAULT METRIC will apply to all routes if there is no metric set for each individual protocol. Note For more information on OSPF, one recommended source is IP Routing, 1st Edition by Ravi Malhotra from O Reilly and Associates. Figure 3.26: OSPF Setup Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 101

102 Field Description Table 3.24: Configuring OSPF Enable Enables the OSPF interface. Router ID Uniquely identifi ed for the fi rewall/router. Must be in the form of (Example: ) Default Route Advertise A toggle for whether or not the fi rewall will advertise itself as the default route. Metric A setting for defi ning the metric for the default route. The default setting is 10. Advanced Automatic Policies Distance Redistribute Default Metric Metric BGP Connected RIP Static Enables the fi rewall to generate a set of automatic policies to allow a confi gured OSPF interface to function properly. By default this is enabled. The policy created is for IP Protocol 89 and is viewable in the Monitor>Activity>Security Policies>Automatic section. A selection used to determine which routes a router should trust if the router receives two routes with identical information. The value used by a routing algorithm by which one route is determined to perform better than another. When a metric does not convert, the default metric will provide a substitute, enabling redistribution to proceed. Confi gure the metric when the route is redistributed. If the metric is not set for each protocol, the default metric will apply. If enabled, routing information is sent for those networks that are confi gured via BGP. Only supported on GB-2000, GB-3000, and GB-Ware. If enabled, routing information is sent for those networks directly assigned to the fi rewall--such as interfaces and aliases If enabled, routing information is sent for those networks confi gured via RIP. If enabled, outing information is sent for those networks that are statically assigned to the fi rewall. To edit an existing OSPF interface, select the EDIT icon. To create a new OSPF interface, select the NEW Icon. 102 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

103 Figure 3.27: OSPF Setup Table 3.25: Configuring OSPF Field Disable Area Description Type Networks Advanced Link Cost Priority Dead Interval Hello Interval Retransmit Interval Transmit Delay Authentication KeyID Password Virtual Links Router ID Description Disables OSPF for the specifi ed area. This selection specifi es the OSPF area. A short description to identify the OSPF area. This selection is used to determine the behavior of the fi rewall/router. A selection for the network(s) which will use OSPF. The cost to send a packet via an interface. The cost value is set to router-lsa s metric fi eld and used for SPF calculation A selection for the priority status of the route. The router with the highest priority will be more eligible to become the Designated Router. Setting the value to 0 makes the router ineligible to become the Designated Router. Default value is 1. Defi ne the period of time (in seconds) after which the route will be considered down. Defi ne the period of time (in seconds) in which updates will be sent. Defi ne the period of time (in seconds) in which the router will wait after an update is sent. If time expires, the router will resend the update. Defi ne the estimated time (in seconds) to send an update. This value must be greater than zero. Pre-shared secret key ID. Password that must be used to collect routing information through OSPF. Once entered, this fi eld will be obscured. Select modify to enter a new password. Uniquely identifi ed for the fi rewall/router. Must be in the form of (Example: ) RIP Setup RIP (Routing Information Protocol) is typically used by routers to receive updated routing tables. RIP is a TCP/IP routing protocol defined by RFC 1058 that allows broadcasting and/or listening to routing information in order to choose the most efficient route for a packet. Hosts using RIP select the routes that use the fewest hops, or select an alternate path if a route is down or has been slowed by high traffic. RIP is limited to 15 hops; more than that, and the route is flagged as unreachable. CAUTION Most smaller network confi gurations do not benefi t from RIP. Before using RIP, be aware that the protocol may decrease performance rather than help small networks and acceptance of RIP sources can compromise network security. RIP is disabled by default on GB-OS, so routing information to redirect packets is not accepted from external sources. If RIP is enabled, the firewall can receive and/or broadcast routing information for either RIP version 1 or 2. To configure RIP version 2.0: 1. Navigate to Configure>Network>Routing>RIP. 2. Check ENABLE to enable the RIP messages over RIP interfaces. 3. Enable the ADVERTISE DEFAULT ROUTE check box if you wish to do so on any protected network or Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 103

104 PSN on which RIP is enabled. 4. Select a RIP interface and click the EDIT icon to configure it. 5. Select v2 from either the input or output field, or both, to indicate version 2 of the protocol. 6. In the password fields, you may select a password encryption scheme from the menu. The <None> option will require no password and no encryption. <Clear> will send an unencrypted password, while <MD5> will use MD5 encryption on the password. 7. If you selected <Clear>, enter a password in the text box. If you selected <MD5> encryption for your password, you must enter a pre-shared secret along with the password that will be used to encrypt the password. 8. Configure REDISTRIBUTION if needed. CAUTION Sending unencrypted (clear/plain) passwords can expose your RIP password to the network and potential attackers, and therefore it is not recommended by GTA. Figure 3.28: RIP Setup Field Disable Interface Description Input/Output Password Type Password Key ID Advanced Automatic Policies Default Metric Description Table 3.26: Configuring RIP Disables the RIP interface. The interface for which RIP is being configured. A short description to identify the RIP interface. Controls how RIP is implemented. INPUT determines whether any version of RIP will be accepted from other routers. OUTPUT determines whether any version of RIP will be exported or broadcast. The choices are: <V1>: Version 1 RIP is accepted or exported. <V2>: Version 2 RIP is accepted or exported. <Both>: Both version 1 and 2 are used. Type of encryption that will be used. If an encryption is selected, the password fi eld is enabled. Encryption types are: None, Clear and MD5. This only applies to RIPv2 Password that must be used to collect routing information through RIPv2. Pre-shared secret key ID. This only applies to RIPv2 when MD5 encryption is used. Enables the fi rewall to generate an automatic set of policies to allow confi gured RIP interface settings to function properly. Default is selected. The value used by a routing algorithm by which one route is determined to perform better than another. 104 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

105 Field RIP Timers Update Timeout Garbage Description Table 3.26: Configuring RIP The rate at which RIP sends a message containing the complete routing table to all neighboring RIP routers. Timer limit is 30 seconds. Upon expiration of the timeout, the route is no longer valid. The route is retained in the routing table for a short time so neighbors can be notifi ed that the route has been dropped. Timer limit is 180 seconds. Upon expiration of the garbage timer, the route is completely removed from the routing table. Timer limit is 120 seconds. Static Routes Static Routes define routing paths between one subnet and another. Static routes supersede the default gateway defined in Configure>Network>Routing>Static Routes. Defining a static route is useful when there is a router between different parts of an internal network, creating multiple subnets within your internal network. Without a static route, the firewall routes all traffic, even if it should be directed to a different subnet on the internal network to the default gateway. Traffic will not travel from internal subnets in this case, causing spoofing messages. Static routes solve this problem by diverting internal traffic back to the appropriate internal subnet instead of the default gateway. Using a static route, the firewall correctly routes internal multi-subnet traffic to other internal IPs. To configure static routes, navigate to Configure>Network>Routing>Static Routes. Select NEW to create a new static route or select EDIT to modify a pre-defined static route. Figure 3.29: Configuring Static Routes Field Disable Description Network IP Address Gateway Table 3.27: Configuring Static Routes Description Disables the static route. A short description to identify the static route. IP address(es) whose traffi c will be subject to the static route, either by selecting the appropriate interface object in the drop down box or by selecting <USER DEFINED> and entering the address and subnet mask, either in CIDR-based (slash) notation or dotted decimal. IP address or interface object of the destination/gateway (default route) selected for this static route. Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 105

106 Multiple Gateway Setup Gateway policies control entry and exit routing for networks with multiple connections to the Internet or other external networks. It contains controls for: Gateway Failover Gateway Sharing Policy Based Routing Source Routing These features can provide alternative routing if your primary Internet connection fails (gateway failover), distribute outbound connections evenly across multiple Internet connections (gateway sharing), or specify gateways for certain types of connections via indication in a policy (policy based and source routing). The default gateway is specifiable in Configure>Network>Interfaces>Settings. To specify additional gateways, create new GATEWAY POLICIES. Note Gateway policies will initially take the fi rst gateway from the default route listed in Configure>Network>Routing>Sta tic Routes. Further modifi cations to Gateway Policies cause it to override the default route listed in Configure>Netw ork>routing>static Routes. The fi rst gateway listed in Gateway Policies will become the fi rewall s default gateway, regardless of the default route listed in Configure>Network>Routing>Static Routes. By default, Gateway Policies gives priority to the first gateway listed. GATEWAY SHARING changes this default behavior, causing policy-selected traffic to be distributed evenly among the available gateways. Policy based routing and source based routing may also change this default behavior and override gateway sharing by specifying gateway overrides on a per-connection basis, also indicated in your outbound policies. When the gateway changes, the firewall logs a route change notification and sends an notification (if notification is enabled). The active routes table, located at Monitor>Activity>Network>Routes, will also be updated with the new gateway. If using only gateway failover (not sharing or policy based routing), alternative gateways will deactivate once the first listed gateway becomes active again. To define additional gateways, navigate to Configure>Network>Routing>Gateway Policies and click NEW. Figure 3.30: Creating New Gateway Policies 106 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

107 Field Disable Name Description Route Failover Enable Beacons Advanced Do Not Ping Gateway Maximum Failures Sharing Enable Table 3.28: Creating New Gateway Policies Description Disables the confi gured gateway policy. A unique name used to identify the gateway policy. A brief description to describe the function of the gateway policy. The IP address of the gateway. Select <USER DEFINED> if you wish to manually enter the IP address, otherwise select an address object. A toggle to enable gateway failover capabilities. Enter pingable IP addresses that are within five hops of the gateway. GTA recommends that both beacons are specifi ed to confi rm when failover is necessary. For more information on selecting useful beacons, see Selecting Useful Beacons. A toggle to allow or disallow pinging of the gateway. An entry for defi ning the maximum amount of failures are allowed before failover. A toggle to enable traffi c connection balancing across gateways for which you have selected sharing. Gateway Failover Gateway failover provides alternative routing should your primary Internet connection fail. If your network has multiple routes to the Internet, you can use the GATEWAY FAILOVER feature to automatically switch to an alternate route should your primary gateway to the Internet go down. To use gateway failover: Enable gateway failover by selecting the enable check box on the Gateway Policies screen. Edit existing gateway policies or create new ones with the failover option enabled. Provide beacon addresses for those gateways. In addition, the following advanced options for configuring gateway failover are available on the Gateway Policies screen: Field Add Static Routes For Beacons Ping Secondary Only if Primary Down Table 3.29: Gateway Failover Advanced Settings Description Adds a static route for each defi ned beacon. For more information on selecting useful beacons, see Selecting Useful Beacons. Pings the failover gateway only if pinging the primary is unsuccessful. Selecting Useful Beacons Beacons determine if a route is accessible by testing accessibility. Beacon IP addresses typically reside on the remote side of WAN connection or beyond. Each beacon must be unique. GTA recommends using both beacons. The Gateway Policies ICMP ping TTL (Time To Live) value is thirty. Therefore, beacons can be no more than thirty (30) hops away (hops are intermediate network nodes such as routers or gateways). A beacon more than thirty hops away will mark routes inaccessible, and Gateway Policies will perform improperly. One way to select a beacon is to test hop count by performing a traceroute from each interface. Once the traceroute is complete, select the next one or two IP addresses in the trace past the gateway as beacons. Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 107

108 GB-OS pings each beacon address every half second. When a beacon address does not respond for five consecutive pings or 2.5 seconds, Gateway Policies will consider the route down and switch to the next accessible failover route in the Gateway Policies list. Gateway Sharing Gateway sharing distributes outbound connections evenly across multiple gateways when enabled. To use gateway sharing: 1. On the Gateway Policies screen, select the GATEWAY SHARING check box to enable the service. a. Edit existing gateway policies or create new ones with Sharing enabled. b. Click SAVE on the Gateway Polices screen to commit the changes. 2. Navigate to Configure>Security Policies>Outbound to configure your outbound policies. a. Under the Advanced tab, select <Sharing> for the policy s ROUTE. b. Click OK. Doing so will bring you back to the Outbound policy. c. Position in the policy list is important since policies are evaluated by their list order and the firewall will ignore further policies if a match is made. Place the policy at the top of the list if it must override all other outbound policies. See Allowing and Denying Traffic in Basic Setup Tasks and Creating Advanced Allow/Deny Policies later in this chapter for information on creating a firewall policy. Click SAVE. Policy Based Routing Policy based routing allows you to route traffic to a specific gateway based upon outbound policy definitions. To use policy based routing: 1. On the Gateway Policies screen: Select the POLICY BASED ROUTING check box to enable the service. Click SAVE. 2. Navigate to Configure>Security Policies>Outbound to configure your outbound policies. Edit an existing policy or create a new one. Enter a description for your policy, e.g. Policy Based Route: Use Gateway 2 for Outbound HTTP Packets. Set the policy s TYPE to <Accept> and the ROUTE to your desired gateway. If desired, specify other parameters to limit the connections that should receive policy based treatment, e.g. restrict your gateway policy to only HTTP. Click OK. Doing so will bring you back to the Outbound policy. Position in the policy list is important since policies are evaluated by their list order and the firewall will ignore further policies if a match is made. Place the policy at the top of the list if it must override all other outbound policies. See Allowing and Denying Traffic in Basic Setup Tasks and Creating Advanced Allow/Deny Policies later in this chapter for information on creating a firewall policy. Click SAVE. Source Routing Source routing automatically returns connections with NAT through the gateway to their original source. Requirements 1. Interface Zones of EXTERNAL only can used for Source Based routing. 2. Default gateway must be on or via an interface of Zone EXTERNAL. To use source routing: On the Gateway Policies screen: Select the SOURCE ROUTING check box to enable the service. Click SAVE. 108 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

109 Preferences Defining the Internet Protocol GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide Define the internet protocol for the supported network. Choose either IPv4 only, or both IPv4 and IPv6 networks. When IPv6 is enabled, automatic policies for IPv6 neighbor discovery may also be enabled. When saving changes to this section, the firewall must be rebooted to reset appropriate configurations sections affected by the change in internet protocols. Figure 3.31: Defining the Internet Protocol Field Internet Protocol Enable Advanced IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Automatic Policies Table 3.30: Defining Connection Timeouts Description Select the type of internet protocols to be supported. Options include IPv4 only, or both IPv4 and IPv6. Select to enable automatic policies. Defining Connection Timeouts and Limiting Timeouts define how long a connection should be idle before it is marked ready to close. The result of a connection reaching timeout value differs for each protocol. For example, TCP has enough information embedded for the firewall to determine when the connection is ready to close, but with ICMP and UDP, it is generally impossible to determine when the connection is ready to close. To define timeouts for TCP, UDP and ICMP connections, navigate to Configure>Network>Preferences. Figure 3.32: Defining Connection Timeouts Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 109

110 Field TCP Wait for ACK Send Keep Alives UDP ICMP Table 3.30: Defining Connection Timeouts Description Enter the amount of time, in seconds, a TCP connection is allowed to remain idle before GB-OS closes the connection. Default is 600 seconds (10 minutes). As part of the creation of a TCP connection, the client and server exchange several IP packets. All packets sent from the server will have a header bit indicating ACK (acknowledgement). As part of GB-OS stateful packet inspection, the fi rewall keeps record of this bit. If it is not seen, it is likely that the remote server is down. If the idle time is reached without an ACK from the server, the connection is marked ready to close. Default is 30 seconds. This fi eld is enabled by default so that if a TCP connection remains idle during the timeout period, a keep alive packet is sent. If the connection is still valid, the firewall will set the idle time to zero. If the connection is invalid, the fi rewall will see a reset packet and will mark the connection ready to close. If no response is received within fi ve minutes, the fi rewall will mark the connection ready to close. If the SEND KEEP ALIVES fi eld is disabled, then the connection is marked ready for close. Enter the amount of time, in seconds, a UDP connection is allowed to remain idle before GB-OS closes the connection. Default is 600 seconds (10 minutes). Enter the amount of time, in seconds, a ICMP connection is allowed to remain idle before GB-OS closes the connection. Default is 30 seconds. Default Enter the amount of time, in seconds, that connections using supported protocols other than TCP, UDP and ICMP are allowed to remain idle. After a connection is marked ready for close, the fi rewall waits fi ve seconds before it actually closes the connection, giving redundant IP packets a chance to clear the fi rewall without causing false doorknob twist error messages. Wait for Close If the fi rewall experiences spurious blocks from reply packets (typically port 80), increasing this value gives packets from slow or distant connections more time to return before the connection is closed. Advanced Connection Limiting ICMP Packets The limit number of ICMP packets (per second). Maximum ICMP Packet Size New Connections New Connections Per Host SIP Support Enable Remote Licensing Checking Maximum ICMP packet size is disabled if set to zero (0) and has a range of 84 to 65,536 bytes. The limit number of new connections (per second). The limit number of new connections per host (per second). Enable or disable SIP support. Enable or disable. Remote license checking. Note: Remote license checking is required for subscription based options (e.g. Content Filtering) and for GB-Ware licensing. 110 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

111 Creating Advanced Security Policies GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide Security policies (Configure>Security Policies) contain additional, advanced settings not discussed in Basic Setup Tasks. These functions, located under the ADVANCED tab for each policy type, allow for the advanced configuration of a security policy. Figure 3.33: Creating Advanced Allow/Deny Policies Field Authentication Required Broadcast TCP SYN Cookies Options Priority Action Alarm ICMP IPS Log Report SMS SNMP Trap Stop Interface Table 3.31: Applying Advanced Allow/Deny Policies Description Must be authenticated before policy will be matched. Enable if the DESTINATION ADDRESS is a broadcast address. Enable or disable TCP SYN fl ood attack protection. User-defi ned priority used for alarms and logging data. Enable to notify the administrator of an event logging of Firewall Control Center alarm mechanisms. Disabled by default. Enable to notify the administrator of an event using . Disabled by default. Enable to respond to the event with ICMP unreachable or TCP reset. Disabled by default. A toggle for whether traffi c should be checked against confi gured Intrusion Prevention System policies. See Intrusion Prevention System (IPS) in the Threat Management chapter for more information. Options include <Yes>, <No> and <Default>. <Default> is the value defi ned in Configuration>Security Policies>Preferences. Enable to include policy data in reports. Enable to notify the administrator of an event using SMS. Disabled by default. Enable to notify the administrator of an event using a SNMP trap alarm. Disabled by default. Enable to shut down the arriving interface. Disabled by default. Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 111

112 Field Coalesce Source Address Source Ports Destination Address Destination Ports Table 3.31: Applying Advanced Allow/Deny Policies Description Coalescing blends similar data into a single log event: Source address/ports and destination address/ports. By default, ports and addresses are coalesced when a new or auto-confi gured policy is created. Detailed List View Firewall administrators who wish to view additional details for configured security policies can do so by appending?details to the end of the firewall s URL. For example, to view a detailed security policy list on a firewall with a URL of enter in your browser s location/address field. Policy details displayed in the list view are the policy s criteria for the TYPE, PRIORITY, INTERFACE, OPTIONS, SERVICE, SOURCE ADDRESS, DESTINATION ADDRESS, TRAFFIC SHAPING and COALESCE options. Policy Preferences Figure 3.34: Detailed List View Policy preferences allow the firewall administrator to globally define most logging and policy definitions for all defined policies in one location. Logging options for automatic policies, tunnel connections ( opens and closes ) and policy blocks may be selected. Define BLACK LIST preferences in the pulldown menu. To configure policy preferences, navigate to Configure>Security Policies>Preferences. Figure 3.35: Policy Preferences 112 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

113 Options Under Preferences, additional options are available for configuring policy preferences. From the OPTIONS table, the firewall administrator can enable or disable automatic policies, generate alarms, send , send an ICMP service not available message, or log an event. Field Automatic Policies Connection Limiting Country Deny Address Spoof Deny Doorknob Twist Deny Fragmented Packets Deny Invalid Packets Deny Unexpected Packets Ident Stealth Mode TCP Syn Cookies Default Logging Policy Blocks Tunnel Opens Tunnel Closes Description Table 3.32: Preference Options Options: Enable/Disable; Log; Report. GTA recommends leaving automatic policies enabled. Enabling or disabling automatic policies requires a reboot to take effect. Always enabled. Options: Log, Report. Always enabled. Options: Alarm, ICMP, Log, Report. Always enabled. Options: Alarm, , Log, Report. Always enabled. Options: Alarm, , ICMP, Log, Report. Options: Enable/Disable, Log, Report. Can be used to block some fragment attacks. GTA recommends leaving this option disabled. Always enabled. Option: Log, Report. Always enabled. Option: Enable/Disable, Log, Report. Option: Enable/Disable Options: Enable/Disable, Log, Report. Options: Enable/Disable, Log. Options: Enable/Disable, Log. Stealth mode has priority over all fi lters. Always enabled. Option: Log, enabled by default. Always enabled. Option: Log, enabled by default. Automatic Policies Automatic policies create the necessary security policies automatically to allow the use of enabled services and configured tunnels. The AUTOMATIC POLICIES check box is a toggle that will enable or disable automatic policies for the following services: NTP IPSec Tunnels DNS Proxy DNS Server SNMP Authentication Inbound Tunnels Remote Administration GTA recommends leaving automatic policies enabled. Note Enabling or disabling automatic policies requires a reboot for changes to take effect. Address Spoof An IP address spoof occurs when a packet arrives at one interface and its return path is through a different interface. This may be caused by an intrusion attempt made altering the packet source IP address or a mis-configured firewall (e.g., networks or hosts located on, or connected to, the internal side of a firewall have not been defined using static routes or RIP). Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 113

114 Connection Limiting Connection Limiting is configured at Configure>Network>Preferences>Advanced. Country Country blocking allows system administrators to allow/deny IP packets based upon country. Country blocking is configured at Configure>Security Policies>Country Blocking. Doorknob Twist A doorknob twist occurs when a connection is attempted on a port for which there is no service or tunnel in place and a policy has accepted the packet. A doorknob twist usually indicates that the firewall is mis-configured. Fragmented Packets By default, fragmented packets are reassembled and forwarded only if the resulting packet does not violate a security policy; otherwise, they are dropped. This option is rarely necessary. Invalid Packets Invalid packets are those that are not the expected size or have an invalid option bit (e.g., an ICMP port unreachable packet must have at least 28 bytes). Invalid packets are dropped silently by default, but the firewall can log dropped packets. Unexpected Packets If a packet is valid, but not expected by the state table, the firewall denies it (e.g., a packet can only generate a single ICMP port unreachable response). A second one may indicate an ICMP replay attack. An unexpected packet may also be a packet that does not have the correct flags during TCP s three-way handshake. Ident Option Ident receives requests as a server daemon and then sends a response identifying the user as Hidden User. When Ident is disabled, the firewall will no longer respond to Ident and may result in timeout delays and will connect slower to external servers that make Ident requests. The Ident option is enabled by default. Stealth Mode Stealth mode is the factory set default for new GTA Firewall UTM Appliances. In stealth mode, the firewall will not respond to ICMP ping requests, ICMP traceroute requests or UDP traceroute requests to external interfaces. Policies that allow pings, traceroutes, etc. from the external interface are not functional when the firewall is in stealth mode. In addition, the firewall will not respond with an ICMP message when a packet arrives for a port without a tunnel or service set on any external network interface. Stealth mode has priority over other policy types. TCP SYN Cookies TCP SYN cookies are a SYN flood defense technique that works by sending a secure cookie as the sequence number in the second packet of the TCP s three-way handshake, then discarding all state for that connection. If enabled, the firewall can also log sent cookies. Advanced: Coalesce Coalescing is enabled by default in Configure>Security Policies>Preferences. Data coalescing reduces the amount of individual policy event data logged, merging similar data into a single log event. It applies only 114 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

115 to automatic policies, such as those created by a tunnel when AUTOMATIC ACCEPT ALL POLICY is selected on an inbound tunnel definition. The INTERVAL is an option for all policy event coalescing; set the interval to zero (0) to turn off all coalescing. Field Interval Source Address Source Ports Destination Address Destination Ports Table 3.33: Advanced: Coalesce Description 60 seconds by default. Zero (0) turns off coalescing. When selected, it coalesces log messages from like source IP addresses. When selected, it coalesces log messages from like source ports. When selected, it coalesces log messages from like destination IP addresses. When selected, it coalesces log messages from like destination ports. Setting Notifications This user preference table allows the firewall administrator to enable or disable notifications by , SMS, and SNMP trap on the specified service or event. To configure notifications, navigate to Configure>System>Notifications. Figure 3.36: System Notifications The firewall will perform an MX lookup of the domain specified in the TO field. It will then attempt to send an . If it is unable to connect to the server, the firewall will try the secondary server set in MX record. Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 115

116 Note The fi rewall will attempt to send the 5 times, after which a log will be created for the failure. Field Enable From To Description Table 3.34: Send and alarm notifi cation. Disabled by default. address that will appear in From fi eld. An invalid address or a server that does not allow with an empty From fi eld can cause an loop. The address can be a fully-qualified address, such as jdoe@gta.com, or the mailbox name on the specifi ed server: jdoe. address where notifi cations should be sent, fwadmin by default. The address can be a fully-qualified address, such as jdoe@gta.com, or the mailbox name on the specifi ed server: jdoe. SMS To receive notifications via SMS text messaging, the user must have a phone which supports SMS messaging. Check with your provider to determine the formatting of your phone s address. For example, a Sprint user would use the format: phonenumber@messaging.sprintpcs.com Field Enable From To Table 3.35: SMS Description Send SMS text message notifi cations. Disabled by default. SMS messaging address from which notifi cations will be sent. SMS messaging address where notifi cations will be sent. SNMP Trap Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a standard for managing network configuration data for each host. If SNMP trap is disabled, selecting SNMP policy actions on the policy definition screen has no effect. If SNMP is checked as an action, the firewall will generate an enterprise-specific generic trap on a policy definition when the policy is matched. The SNMP manager is typically on the protected network, though it may reside on any network. Selecting <Automatic> from the BINDING INTERFACE pull down menu will select the interface configured in Configure>Network>Interface>Settings through which the packet would normally exit based on the routing table. Field Enable Manager Advanced Binding Interface Description Table 3.36: SNMP Trap Enable the SNMP alarm facility. Disabled by default. Host IP address to receive SNMP trap messages. Address from which SNMP traps are sourced, <Automatic> by default. To force the SNMP traps to have a specifi c source IP address, choose the pre-confi gured interface object from the drop down list. Normally, this is only used if an SNMP manager accessed over a VPN. 116 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

117 Alarms GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide Alarms sets the default parameters for generating alarm notifications. When a policy with alarm enabled is matched, an alarm event is activated. Each alarm event increments the alarm count by one. When the Threshold for Generating is exceeded within the Threshold Interval, a notification will be sent documenting all of the events. Multiple messages will be sent if the number of events exceeds the Maximum Alarms Per . Field Threshold for Generating Threshold Interval Maximum Alarms Per Attempt to Log Host Names Description Table 3.37: Alarms Number of alarms above which a notifi cation is sent. Length of time after which to send alarms. Maximum number of alarm messages included in a per message. An alarm message is generally 200 bytes. Attempt to resolve the host name of the IP address that generated the alarm. Applying Traffic Shaping Traffic shaping restricts users to the amount of bandwidth specified. All users affected will share the allocated bandwidth; policies and tunnels can be defined to command more or less of the allocated or available bandwidth by selecting a weight for each of the policies that use the same traffic shaping policy. The DEFAULT policy does not restrict traffic flow, allowing traffic to utilize all available bandwidth, first come, first served. If traffic shaping is enabled, the default policy cannot be disabled, but an alternate selection for a policy can be made. A security policy or tunnel using a traffic shaping policy restricts users to the amount of bandwidth specified. All users affected will share the allocated bandwidth. Security policies and tunnels can be defined to command more or less of the allocated or available bandwidth by selecting a weight for each of the security policies that utilize the same traffic shaping policy. Configure traffic shaping at Configure>Network>Traffic Shaping Figure 3.37: Applying Traffic Shaping Weight vs. Priority The weight applied to a security policy or tunnel when using a traffic shaping policy is similar, but not the same as, priority (the security policy s order in the security policy set). Two connections with different priorities in the policy list will use a connection one at a time, the one with the highest priority first. On the other hand, a connection with a higher weight applied to its matching policy or tunnel will use a higher percentage of available bandwidth, still allowing the lower weight connection to use a percentage (though smaller) of the available bandwidth. Weights of 10 have the greatest percentage, and 1 has the lowest percentage of available bandwidth. Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 117

118 Using Traffic Shaping Traffic shaping policies can be used in security policies as well as inbound tunnels. The following example shows the use of a traffic shaping policy in an outbound or pass through policy and in an inbound tunnel. Field Disable Name Description Bandwidth Figure 3.38: Creating a Traffic Shaping Policy Table 3.38: Creating a Traffic Shaping Policy Description Selecting this check box disables the traffi c shaping policy. A unique name used to identify the traffi c shaping policy throughout the confi guration. A brief description of the function of the traffi c shaping policy. The number of kilobits per second to which policies or tunnels using this pipe will be restricted. The largest amount of bandwidth that can be specified is 1,000,000 Kb. Entering a value of 0 indicates that the policy allows unlimited use of the available bandwidth. The following example traffic shaping policy is intended to limit the bandwidth that slow FTP connections can use, allowing other, faster traffic more bandwidth. 1. Create a new traffic shaping policy: Navigate to Configure>Network>Traffic Shaping Click the ENABLE check box to enable the service. Click the NEW icon to configure a new traffic shaping policy. 2. Create an outbound or pass through policy for the traffic. In the outbound policy, select the traffic shaping policy previously created from the TRAFFIC SHAPING pull down. Using this, the policy will restrict all inbound and outbound packets, including the virtual crack created for the data the size of the traffic shaping policy pipe. 3. Select a weight for the connection. The weight selected will prioritize the connections that match the policy. Figure 3.39: Selecting the Policy s Traffic Shaping Policy and Weight 4. Create an inbound tunnel (Configure>Network>NAT>Inbound Tunnels) for your bandwidth limited connection. (Other protocols can be added to the inbound tunnels list by adding the protocol/ port number combination in Configure>System>Objects>Service Groups). Under the ADVANCED tab is the TRAFFIC SHAPING section. Select the traffic shaping policy previously created for the policy. When selected, the tunnel will restrict all inbound and outbound packets, including the virtual crack created for the data the size of the traffic shaping policy pipe. 5. Select a weight for the connection. The weight selected will prioritize the connections that match the filter. 118 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

119 VPN Setup Figure 3.40: Selecting the Inbound Tunnel s Traffic Shaping Policy and Weight A Virtual Private Network (VPN) is a combined method of tunneling, authentication and encryption that allows a host on an external, untrusted network (e.g., the Internet) to connect to an internal, protected network. VPNs are typically used by telecommuters or remote offices that need access to resources on the protected network. Before manually configuring a VPN, consider running the IPSec Setup Wizard, located at Wizards>IPSec Setup. The IPSec Setup Wizard is designed to help configure a simple VPN quickly and easily. Note For detailed information on Site to Site IPSec VPN Setup, confi guration and certifi cate management, see the GB-OS VPN Option Guide for Site-to-Site VPNs. For information on Mobile IPSec Clients, PPTP and L2TP see the guide, Confi guring GTA Firewalls for Remote Access. VPN Concepts The following are concepts used when defining a VPN using a GTA firewall. Authentication When a VPN is being configured using the IKE IPSec key mode, authentication is performed with either pre-shared secrets or VPN certificates. GB-OS supports both methods of authentication for IPSec key mode VPNs. A pre-shared secret is used to identify a party during the authentication phase of the VPN connection. By its definition, a pre-shared secret is shared with the other party before the VPN connection can be established. VPN certificates, which contain a public key, can be distributed to parties that wish to connect to the VPN. During the authentication phase of the connection, the requesting party then authenticates using the VPN certificate and the private key. To create VPN certificates for authentication, see the GB-OS VPN Option Guide. Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 119

120 Security Associations A Security Association (SA) specifies the parameters connecting two hosts. Security Associations are one-way, so each active two-way VPN connection uses a minimum of two SAs, one for each direction of communication. For the total number of potential SAs used by each VPN authorization, see the VPN section in the Configure>VPN>Summary. To see the current number of VPN security associations, navigate to Monitor>Activity>VPN>IPSec Tunnels. For the number of security associations supported by a specific model, see its product specifications. Note Each authorization in the confi guration report will contain one or more VPNs, depending on the number of networks represented by each VPN or address object. Multiple Networks A VPN authorization can define one VPN connection or many, depending on the number of networks represented by each object. For example, if a VPN authorization contains an object with two separate local networks and single remote network, two VPNs are defined, for a total of four SAs. Figure 3.41: Two VPNs, Four VPN Security Associations Mobile Protocol A VPN using mobile protocol - either a mobile IPSec VPN created in the Configure>Accounts>Users section, or gateway-to-gateway VPN with FORCE MOBILE PROTOCOL selected - will use SAs while active. The number of SAs potentially used by mobile and gateway-to-gateway VPNs can be higher than the number of licensed SAs; however, the number of SAs used by active VPNs, mobile IPSec VPNs included, cannot exceed this number. IPSec Objects IPSec Objects determine how incoming VPN connections will be negotiated by defining what client or VPN gateway initiation behavior should be acceptable by your GTA firewall. 120 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

121 SSL Client and Browser Setup GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide GTA s SSL Service has two components: Browser The SSL Browser provides client-less remote network access. Using a standard Web browser, users launch a customized Web portal (the SSL Browser) for access to files, applications and internal and external web sites. Supported protocols include http, https, ftp, ftps, and cifs. Client The SSL Client is a remote access VPN client that uses SSL to establish a secure, encrypted connection to the network firewall. Via the SSL Browser, the SSL Client is downloaded and installed to the authorized remote user s machine. Browser access for SSL users is determined by their group privileges. Some users may only have access to browse files and only use bookmarks. While other users may have access to browse any internal host using http, https, CIFS or ftp. In addition, users may be restricted to read only access for browsing or have upload and download access. Client access is also determined by group privileges. A user must have SSL Browser capability in order to have Client access. The SSL Client is downloaded via the SSL Browser Interface for each user. Note For more information on SSL installation, confi guration and use, see the GTA SSL Client Guide. PPTP & L2TP Setup GTA s remote access options include PPTP and L2TP. Users can easily connect via mobile devices, such as iphone and Android phones and the ipad. For more information on connecting via PPTP or L2TP, see the GTA Remote Access Guide. VLAN Setup Short for Virtual Local Area Network and defined in the IEEE 802.1Q standard, a VLAN is a network of hosts, servers and other network devices that appear and behave as if they are on the same LAN, regardless of their physical location. With a configured VLAN, workstations scattered across an office or complex can be physically independent in their connection to the network, yet still be able to access one another. VLANs are configured through software instead of hardware, allowing for flexible implementations. A large advantage of segregating network devices by setting up a VLAN is that when a computer is physically moved to another location, it can remain on the same VLAN without any hardware reconfiguration. Each VLAN is treated as a broadcast domain. For example, if a physical network has two VLANs configured, VLAN 1 and VLAN 2, devices located on VLAN 1 can communicate with other devices on VLAN 1, but cannot connect with devices that are located on VLAN 2 unless the two networks are bridged. To configure a network managed by a GTA firewall to make use of VLANs, an IEEE 802.1Q- compliant VLAN switch is required. Note For information on how to confi gure your VLAN switch so it can direct VLAN traffi c, consult your switch s documentation. Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 121

122 Figure 3.42: Basic VLAN Topology with Two VLANs. VLAN Terms and Concepts The following are terms and concepts used when working with a VLAN. VLAN Interface A VLAN interface is the physical interface that is connected to a VLAN switch. A VLAN interface can be assigned to any physical interface, even if it is not defined in Configure>Network>Settings. For example, a VLAN interface can be assigned to eth0, which may already be assigned to your protected network. Adding a VLAN interface to a physical interface that has already been assigned as an external network, protected network or PSN will not create conflicts. Like physical interfaces, VLANs can be bridged. For more information on bridging interfaces, see Bridging Interfaces. Note See product specifi cations for the number of available VLANs for your GTA fi rewall. VLAN IDs A VLAN segregates devices that are physically separate from each other based upon the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN ID tag that has been sent and received by the devices in the VLAN. For example, packets with a VLAN ID of 1 will only be sent to network devices logically located on the VLAN 1 network. The VLAN ID can be any number between 1 and 4095, and must match the VLAN ID configured on the VLAN switch. When configuring multiple VLANs over one physical interface, it is not possible to have a VLAN interface share the same VLAN ID. It is possible, however, to add a VLAN interface to another physical interface that has the same VLAN ID. For example, a VLAN interface on eth0 with a VLAN ID of 1 and a VLAN interface on eth1 with a VLAN ID of 1 can both be created without conflict. VLAN Trunk In a typical configuration, VLAN routers or switches and GTA firewalls add VLAN IDs to packets travelling to or from a VLAN. A VLAN trunk is the physical connection between the two devices. Packets travelling along a VLAN trunk must be handled by a VLAN router, VLAN switch or GTA firewall. 122 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

123 VLAN IDs are only added to data packets when travelling along the VLAN trunk. Once the data packet passes through a VLAN network device, such as a GTA firewall or VLAN switch, the VLAN ID is stripped. VLAN Switch A VLAN switch is the network device that resides on the other end of a VLAN trunk. When data packets with a VLAN ID travel through the switch, its logic will direct the traffic to the appropriate VLAN. For example, a header with a VLAN ID of 12 will be directed to VLAN 12. Since VLAN configuration varies with each make and model, it is necessary to consult your VLAN switch s documentation for instructions on defining VLAN settings. Creating a VLAN To configure a VLAN, navigate to Configure>Network>Interfaces>Settings Note 1. Click the NEW icon to create a define a new interface. 2. Select the type of interface being created. For example, <Standard> 3. If DHCP will not be used to obtain the VLAN interface s IP address, enter it manually in the IP address field. 4. Select the DHCP check box if DHCP will be used to obtain the VLAN interface s IP address. 5. Select the VLAN check box to define the interface as a VLAN. 6. Enter the VLAN s VLAN ID. This ID must be matched on the VLAN switch or router. 7. Enter a name for the VLAN, such as Marketing. 8. Select the interface s Zone, such as <Protected>. 9. For the VLAN s NIC, select the physical interface that will be connected to the VLAN switch or router. For example, <eth0>. 10. Enter a description to explain the use of the VLAN, such as VLAN for marketing department 11. Click OK and then SAVE. VLANs are not supported if using link aggregation. Bridged interfaces are supported for IPv4 only. Figure 3.43: Creating a VLAN Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 123

124 Field Disable Type DHCP Gateway IP Address Options High Availability Router Advertisement VLAN VLAN ID Interfaces Name Zone NIC Description Description Table 3.49: Creating a VLAN A toggle to disable the confi gured VLAN. A selection for the interface s Type. Options are <Standard> and <Bridge>. If DHCP will be used to obtain the VLAN interface s IP address, enable the DHCP check box. Enabling DHCP will disable the IP Address fi eld. The GATEWAY toggle is only available if DHCP is enabled. If DHCP will not be used to obtain the VLAN interface s IP address, enter it manually. Select the HIGH AVAILABILITY check box if High Availability will be confi gured. Enabling High Availability will disable the DHCP and Gateway fi elds. Select to confi gure the router advertisement section. Select the VLAN check box to create the VLAN interface. The VLAN ID that matches the VLAN ID of packets to be received by the VLAN switch or router. Valid VLAN IDs are range from 1 to A unique name used to identify the VLAN. Determine the interface zone. Options are <External>, <Protected> or <PSN>. A selection for the network interface card to associate with the VLAN. A brief description to describe the function of the VLAN. SNMP Setup SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is a standard for managing IP devices and sending and retrieving data with designated hosts. In its full implementation, SNMP uses both read and write access. In GB-OS, SNMP is read-only (preventing write access security issues). SNMP data, contained in the Management Information Base (MIB) and organized in report form, helps the administrator ensure optimal performance in the managed devices. SNMP version 2 provides enhancements including security and an RMON (Remote Monitoring) MIB, which provides continuous feedback without being queried by the SNMP facility. SNMP version 3 introduced a revised nomenclature for SNMP, a new access method using authentication, and the ability to encrypt SNMP data packets. To configure SNMP, navigate to Configure>Services>SNMP. CAUTION GTA strongly recommends restricting SNMP access to specifi c hosts in order to reduce dissemination of information about the network. Allow access to the information only from designated, secure hosts because the data could be transmitted in clear (non-encrypted) text, providing potential attack information to any unauthorized users between the host and the fi rewall. 124 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

125 Figure 3.44: SNMP Setup Field Enable Contact Information Location Table 3.50: SNMP Description Enables the SNMP service. Disabled by default. address of the administrator. User defi ned description of the administrator s location. Version 2 Configuration Enable Enables SNMP version 2. Community Essentially, a password. With the password, those with access can see SNMP information and/or receive trap notifi cations. In the full SNMP implementation, there are three community levels: read access, read-write access and trap notifi cation. Members of a community can access information at the level allowed in the community. Version 3 Configuration Enable Enables SNMP version 3. User ID User name assigned separately from other user authorization names. An extra layer of protection against unauthorized and undesirable interest in your network. Password Password for this extra authorization level. This is an encrypted password. Once entered, this fi eld will be obscured. Select modify to enter a new password. Security Level Security levels: <AuthPriv> (Authentication, Privacy): Access to SNMP information only with both authentication and data encryption of all SNMP packets (privacy). <AuthNoPriv>: Access to SNMP information with only authentication. Advanced Automatic Policies Enable to have the fi rewall generate a set of automatic policies to allow use of the SNMP service. If disabled, remote access policies must be created. Remote Logging Setup GTA firewalls support remote logging of events. Remote logging provides a means to configure how and where log information is sent. Recent events are stored in a local buffer on the firewall and can be accessed under Monitor>Log Messages. To enable remote logging: 1. Navigate to Configure>Services>Remote Logging. 2. Select the Enable check box. 3. Select the source IP address object from the BINDING INTERFACE drop down box. 4. Enter the server IP address and port number in the SYSLOG SERVER field. See Reference E: Log Messages for more information about logs and default logging. Figure 3.45: Remote Logging Setup Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 125

126 Field Enable Syslog Server Advanced Binding Interface Facility Policy Facility NAT Facility WWW Facility Description Table 3.52: Remote Logging Enables remote logging. Disabled by default. IP address or host name of a system that will accept the remote logging data. Data can be accepted by any program that accepts the syslog protocol. The port is 514 by default. To enter a different port number, use the standard format, e.g :514 or example.gta.com:514. Address from which logging is sourced. <Automatic> by default. Selecting <Automatic> will indicate the fi rewall s usual source IP address to the syslog server location. To force the logging packets to have a specifi c source IP address, choose the interface object from the drop down menu. Logs information associated with any policy that has logging enabled. Any attempts at unauthorized access will be logged to the policy log stream. Logs information associated with Network Address Translation. Essentially, outbound packets. Logs all URLs accessed through the fi rewall. WELF (WebTrends Enhanced Log Format) The remote logging facility uses the WebTrends Enhanced Logging Format (WELF) to record log messages. The following table shows the fields used: Field arg attribute cat_action cat_action country dst dstport duration flags fw id interface msg nat nat_port op pol_action Description Table 3.53: WELF Fields For HTTP and FTP, this is the URL. Action taken when the policy was triggered, e.g. Alarm, , Stop. Action performed by the fi lter: Block or Pass. Action performed by the fi lter: Block or Pass. Two letter country code of the external side of the connection. IP address that received the event. Port number where the event was generated. In the case of ICMP this is the ICMP type code. Time required for the event operation, in seconds. The fl ags associated with a given protocol TCP or ICMP in hexadecimal (e.g. fl ags=0x02) Firewall logging the event. Type of record. Network interface where the event occurred. Details events such as a VPN starting, the confi guration changing, or a port scan being detected; also captures the index/rule number of the generating fi lter or facility. IP address where NAT was performed for the event. Port number where NAT was performed for the event. For HTTP and FTP, an operation such as GET or POST. Security policy action: Block or Accept. pol_type Security policy description: Default, OBP - Outbound Policy, IBP - Inbound Policy, PTP - Pass Through Policy, IPSEC - IPSec VPN, SSL - SSL VPN, PPTP - PPTP Remote Access, L2TP - L2TP Remote Access, ATP - Automatic Policy, CBP - Country Blocking Policy 126 Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks

127 pri proto rcvd rule sent src srcport time type user vpn Event priority: 0=emergency, 1=alert, 2=critical, 3=error, 4=warning, 5=notice, 6=information, 7=debug. Protocol or service used by the event. Number of bytes transferred from destination to source. Index number of the item that triggered the entry. Number of bytes transferred from source to destination. IP address that generated the event. Port number where the event was generated. In the case of ICMP this is the ICMP type code. Local date and time of the event in UTC format. VPN or management events. Values can be combined (e.g. type=vpn, mgmt) Values: vpn, ssl or mgmt User name. Specifi c VPN object shows the most used connections. Unix Facilities A syslog service (daemon) that can accept and record the log data is a standard feature on Unix or Linux operating systems. GB-OS logging provides for Unix syslog, as well as auth, authpriv, console, cron, daemon, ftp, kern, lpr, mail, news, ntp, security, user, uucp and local0 through local7. Since syslog redirects logs to another location, a configuration file must direct the log stream to a file or receiving software. The priority (set on each policy definition under the ADVANCED tab) is used by the remote log host to determine if and where the information in the syslog log stream should be displayed or stored. Policy Policy log messages are generated due to a policy rule, either explicit or automatic. Policy messages are logged by default to local1. NAT (Network Address Translation) Network Address Translation log messages are generated due to a NAT action, which can be both outbound traffic and inbound tunnel traffic. All NAT messages are logged by default to local0 and NAT session closes are logged at priority. Notice, and NAT session opens are not logged. WWW WWW log messages are generated when an outbound HTTP access occurs. The complete URL is logged. By default, all HTTP URLs are logged to local2. Log messages are sent at priority Notice. Chapter 3: Advanced Setup Tasks 127

128 4 Management Threat 128

129 Threat Management Threat Management covers the configuration of GB-OS standard threat management features, which ensure unhindered user productivity by defending against dynamic Internet-based threats. Threat management features described in this chapter are: Intrusion Prevention System (IPS): IPS acts as a front line defense to safeguard your network against Internet-based attacks. Powerful policy definitions create a secure, tailored solution that helps protect against the theft and destruction of sensitive data. Mail Proxy: Mail Proxy allows you to take back control of your . Basic Mail Proxy features allow for customized delivery settings. Use the Anti-Virus feature and the Anti-Spam subscription based option to unlock Mail Proxy s full potential as a gateway-level solution. Content Filtering: Content Filtering assists organizations by reducing risk of legal and privacy issues with the implementation of Internet content filtering on a per policy basis. When the Content Filtering subscription based option has been activated, Web requests are not only filtered by policies, but by rating categories as well. GTA s full featured threat management suite of products provides a robust gateway level solution. While enabling all services will provide the greatest level of protection possible, it may affect network performance, especially during high traffic loads. GTA Firewall UTM Appliance administrators should adjust configuration settings to ensure a proper balance between performance and threat management. Note 30-day evaluations are available for Mail Proxy Anti-Spam and Content Filtering. Simply click on Request Evaluation besides the specifi c header on the System Overview screen or visit the GTA Web site at com/options. CAUTION The GB-250 and GB-250e were designed for small business networks, yet offer a full complement of threat management and network services to allow administrators to select the features that best match their needs. In order to provide network administrators with the broadest range of choices, GTA offers all threat management features (Anti-Spam, Anti-Virus, and Content Filtering) on the GB-250 and GB-250e. Additionally, many advanced network services (traditional and transparent proxy, authentication server, SNMP server, DHCP server, and VPN) are also available on these units. However, the hardware specifi cations of these products necessitates limitations on utilizing every threat management and network service, as each additional service places greater demands the fi rewall s CPU and memory. Firewall administrators should carefully select which threat management features and network services to activate on the fi rewall, and monitor the results to prevent undesired interruptions of service. By activating all threat management and network services it is possible to exceed the available resources of the GB-250 and GB-250e. Should enabled services exceed the GB-250 or GB-250e s resources, administrators will notice that GB-OS will restart enabled services as they exceed available memory and will generate a log message. These periodic restarts may result in a temporary loss of enabled services or network connectivity. GB-250 and GB-250e administrators with multiple threat management services should monitor GB-OS log messages to ensure continuous network connectivity. If the GB-250 or GB-250e consistently exceeds available memory, administrators should consider disabling unnecessary GB-OS services or reducing defi ned threat management settings. If all services are desired, administrators may wish to consider one of GTA s more powerful products, such as the GB-850, GB-2100 or GB-2500 Firewall UTM Appliance family, which are designed to meet the needs of more robust network implementations. Chapter 4: Threat Management 129

130 Intrusion Prevention System (IPS) As network attacks become more sophisticated, viruses and spam are not the only threats that network administrators must face. Increasingly powerful network attack tools and applications are readily available on the Internet, which makes intrusion prevention a vital component for a secure network. A successful attack or network intrusion can result in the loss of confidential information, bring the network down, or even use network resources to launch other attacks. GB-OS Intrusion Prevention System (IPS) uses robust signature-based policy definitions to recognize attacks and protect against network anomalies. IPS carefully analyzes traffic and automatically blocks attacks before they can reach the network. Administrators are notified of intrusions and intrusion attempts using either log messages or alerts. GB-OS comes with a standard set of policies that are designed to help create a powerful, customized IPS configuration. GTA Firewall UTM Appliances that have a current GTA support contract and IPS activation code can receive automatically updated IPS policies. Administrators can incorporate these updated policies into their IPS configuration as new security threats are identified. Although IPS settings are configured using the IPS Setup Wizard or the IPS proxy and IPS policy screens, IPS settings are applied when defining security policies, security policy preferences and inbound tunnels. Security policies and inbound tunnels that have the IPS checkbox enabled will have GB-OS IPS settings applied to their traffic. If the IPS checkbox is not enabled in a security policy or inbound tunnel, traffic allowed by the security policy or inbound tunnel that would otherwise be restricted by IPS settings will pass through the firewall unhindered. Note For more information on selecting the IPS checkbox in a security policy and inbound tunnels, see Creating Advanced Security Policies and Creating Inbound Tunnels in Advanced Setup Tasks. Figure 4.1: The IPS Checkbox in a Security Policy (Left) and an Inbound Tunnel (Right) To effectively use IPS, a network administrator is required to monitor and analyze log messages in order to determine the nature and potential threat of an attack. Small businesses or home offices that do not have a dedicated network administrator may find themselves overwhelmed with log messages. The IPS Setup Wizard is designed to help such users by providing a simple two-step configuration process. IPS settings can either be configured using the IPS Setup Wizard or manually using the IPS proxy and IPS policies screens. The IPS Setup Wizard is designed to quickly configure and define settings to establish an Intrusion Prevention System for network traffic. Manually defining the IPS proxy and IPS policies allows for a custom, tailored IPS solution. 130 Chapter 4: Threat Management

131 Running the IPS Setup Wizard GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide The IPS Setup Wizard is used to configure and define IPS settings suitable for most networks. Settings are defined for a group of similar exploits and anomalies. For example, if the IM CLIENTS group toggle is selected, GB-OS will handle all IM client traffic according to settings applied by the IPS Setup Wizard. When defining settings for a group, the following actions may be available: Block: The Block action blocks all traffic related to the selected group from passing through the firewall. Protect: The Protect action protects all traffic related to the selected group by blocking known vulnerabilities while allowing legitimate traffic to pass through the firewall. Log: The Log action logs all traffic related to the selected group. For example, an administrator would like to protect a network from vulnerabilities that stem from IM client traffic. To do so, the administrator will use the IPS Setup Wizard and select the IM CLIENTS toggle. Since the administrator wants to protect against IM client vulnerabilities, and does not want to block all IM client traffic, they will select the Protect option from the pull down. After saving the IPS Setup Wizard s settings, GB-OS will now protect the network from known exploits and vulnerabilities related to IM client traffic. To run the IPS Setup Wizard, navigate to Wizards>IPS Setup. 1. The first screen of the wizard will allow you to select the groups to configure, and whether GB-OS should block or protect traffic related to the selected groups. Once settings have been configured as desired, select the NEXT icon to continue. Note Confi guring IPS settings for a network that does not receive traffi c related to a group can add unnecessary overhead and may impact network performance. For example, IPS settings designed to protect against known Web server vulnerabilities should not be enabled if the GTA Firewall UTM Appliance is not protecting any Web servers. Figure 4.2: Protecting IM Clients Using the IPS Setup Wizard 2. The final screen of the IPS Setup Wizard is a summary view of all entered settings. Please review the wizard s settings prior to committing the displayed configuration. To make changes to your setup, select the BACK icon to return to the appropriate screen. Click the SAVE icon to save the displayed configuration, or select the CANCEL icon to abort. Figure 4.3: Reviewing the IPS Setup Wizard s Settings Chapter 4: Threat Management 131

132 Configuring the IPS Proxy The IPS proxy contains settings to enable the IPS service, the IPS rule set as well as performance tuning options. If the GTA Firewall UTM Appliance has a valid GTA support contract, administrators can elect to have GB-OS automatically download updated IPS policies as they become available. Up-to-date IPS policies provide an additional level of defense against known exploits and anomalies. As new IPS policies are downloaded into GB-OS configuration, administrators can configure them as desired. To automatically download new IPS policies from GTA servers, select the Subscription checkbox. If the IPS Setup Wizard has been previously used to configure IPS settings, a WIZARD SETTINGS box will be visible. The WIZARD SETTINGS box displays a summary of the settings applied by the IPS Setup Wizard and contains a PERSISTENT checkbox. If the PERSISTENT checkbox is enabled, the IPS proxy will persistently use settings defined by the IPS Setup Wizard and will lock configuration options for the IPS policies screen. Disabling the PERSISTENT checkbox will result in the loss of all settings applied by the IPS Setup Wizard. To enable the IPS proxy, navigate to Configure>Threat Management>IPS>Proxy and select the ENABLE checkbox. Figure 4.4: Configuring the IPS Proxy Field Name Enable Subscription Advanced Table 4.1: Configuring the Intrusion Prevention Proxy Description A toggle for whether the Intrusion Protection proxy should be enabled or not. Default is unselected. A selection for the IPS rule set used by the IPS proxy. GTA Firewall UTM Appliances that do not have a valid GTA support contract will be set to Default. 132 Chapter 4: Threat Management

133 Performance Tuning Networks External Protected External Servers AIM Internal Servers DNS FTP SIP SNMP SQL SSH Telnet Web Services DNS File Inspection FTP SIP SSH Telnet Web Table 4.1: Configuring the Intrusion Prevention Proxy Any external IP the IPS applies to; not editable. A selection for the GTA Firewall UTM Appliance s internal networks the IPS proxy should protect. Default is FW-Networks-Local. A selection for the address object that contains addresses of known AOL Instant Messenger servers. A selection for defi ning the IP of internal DNS servers. A selection for defi ning the IP of internal servers. A selection for defi ning the FTP server. A selection for defi ning the SIP server. A selection for defi ning the IP of internal SNMP servers. A selection for defi ning the SQL server. A selection for defi ning the SSH server. A selection for defi ning the internal servers allowing telnet. A selection for defi ning the internal Web server IP address. A selection for defi ning the DNS service. A selection for defi ning the File Inspection service. A selection for defi ning the FTP service. A selection for defi ning the service. A selection for defi ning the SIP service. A selection for defi ning the SSH service. A selection for defi ning the Telnet service. A selection for defi ning the Web service. * Wizard settings are only displayed if the IPS Setup Wizard has been used to configure IPS settings. Configuring Performance Tuning Settings Additional, advanced options designed to fine tune the performance of the IPS proxy are available under the ADVANCED tab. Performance tuning settings can be used to improve the overall performance of the IPS proxy. Networks The PROTECTED NETWORKS pull down selects an address object that contains the networks to be protected and monitored by the IPS proxy. Assigning a protected network to the IPS proxy can improve performance and reduce the occurrence of false positives. To select two or more networks, add additional IP addresses, as required, to the address object. Note If no network is selected for the PROTECTED NETWORKS pull down, Intrusion Prevention will monitor and analyze all traffi c, which may impact network performance. External Servers Chapter 4: Threat Management 133

134 The AIM pull down selects an address object that contains IP addresses of known AOL Instant Messenger (AIM) servers. By enabling the IPS policies related to AOL Instant Messenger traffic, network administrators can effectively restrict access to AOL Instant Messenger and other similar chat programs. Internal Servers The internal servers section allows the administrator to further define the specific internal servers for which the IPS policies will apply. Services The services section allows the administrator to further define the specific services for which the IPS policies will apply. Configuring IPS Policies IPS policies define which traffic is allowed to pass through the firewall to the networks protected by the IPS proxy. Each IPS policy contains specific criteria that checks for known vulnerabilities and weaknesses. By default, the majority of the IPS policies are disabled to prevent interference with legitimate traffic. For each enabled IPS policy, configure the action the policy should perform against any packet that triggers it. Three actions are available when configuring an IPS policy: Drop: GB-OS drops the packet that triggered the IPS policy. Pass: GB-OS allows the packet that triggered the IPS policy pass through the firewall. Reset: GB-OS drops the packet that triggered the IPS policy and sends a reset to both the client and server. IPS policies that are designed to protect against similar vulnerabilities are organized into groups. For example, all IPS policies that detect known P2P (peer to peer) vulnerabilities are organized in the P2P group. Administrators who wish to block all P2P traffic can filter displayed policies that contain P2P in their group name, enable them and select their ACTION to drop all packets. Note Disabling unneeded IPS policies can improve system performance and reduce the amount of log messages generated. For example, IPS policies designed to protect against known Web server attacks should be disabled if the GTA fi rewall is not protecting any Web servers. To configure IPS policies, navigate to Configure>Threat Management>IPS>Policies. Figure 4.5: Defining Intrusion Prevention System Policies Table 4.2: Configuring Intrusion Prevention Policies 134 Chapter 4: Threat Management

135 Field Enable Log Alarm Action Group Name ID Description Enables the IPS policy. If enabled, GB-OS will generate a log message when the policy is triggered. If enabled, GB-OS will generate an alarm when the policy is triggered. Selections include <Drop>, <Pass> and <Reset>. The policy s group. The policy s name. Clicking the policies name will launch a new browser window with detailed information on the IPS policy. The policy s unique ID. Filtering Displayed IPS Policies GB-OS ships with a diverse set of IPS policies designed to protect networks from a variety of attacks. Displayed policies can be filtered down to a more manageable amount by using filtering options located along the top of the IPS policies screen. The UP and DOWN arrows allow for navigation through the displayed policies. Adjusting the displayed rows changes the number of policies shown on each page. Note Displaying 500 or more rows per page may impact the Web browser s performance. Under the ADVANCED tab are additional filtering options. Each column has a set of options that can be used to sort through the available IPS policies. Filtered columns will have the filter icon displayed next to the column name change from blue to red. Once filtering options have been configured as desired, select the FILTER icon to display the filtered results. For example, to display only IPS policies that have been enabled, select Enable from the COLUMN pull down, toggle the FILTER checkbox on and select Yes from the FIELD pull down. Then select the FILTER icon to display only IPS policies that have been enabled. Figure 4.6: Filtering Displayed IPS Policies Mail Proxy Chapter 4: Threat Management 135

136 The Mail Proxy can be used to shield an internal server from unauthorized access and reduce unsolicited ( spam ). Basic Mail Proxy features provide a foundation that allows you to control your by utilizing customized policies. The Anti-Virus feature and the Anti-Spam subscription option build upon the capabilities of the basic feature set by adding a strong defense at the perimeter that safeguards against unsolicited spam and viruses (subscription charges apply). Mail Proxy configures an SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) proxy for inbound on TCP port 25. To enable the proxy, navigate to Configure>Threat Management>Mail Proxy>Proxy and select the ENABLE checkbox. Mail Proxy s connection settings define how long an idle connection to an server should remain active, as well as the maximum number of simultaneous connections Mail Proxy should allow. Note For information on instructions on confi guring the Anti-Virus feature and the Anti-Spam subscription option, please refer to the Mail Proxy Feature Guide. Figure 4.7: Enabling Mail Proxy Field Enable Connection Timeout Maximum Connections Advanced Options Automatic Policies Log Report Table 4.3: Configuring Mail Proxy Description Enables the Mail Proxy. The amount of time before an idle connection will be dropped. The number of simultaneously allowed connections. The maximum number of connections for GB-250, GB-820, and GB-Ware 10 user license is 50. GB-2100 has a maximum of 1000 connections and GB-2500 and GB-Ware Enterprise have a maximum number of 5000 connections. Enables GB-OS to automatically confi gure the necessary security policies to allow Mail Proxy to operate. Enables Mail Proxy logging. Enables saving of Mail Proxy data for Reports. Mail Proxy Policies 136 Chapter 4: Threat Management

137 With every message, Mail Proxy must choose to accept or deny transmission. Mail Proxy policies contain the criteria that cause an to be accepted or denied (much like white lists and black lists), and can define the destination server. Policies also contain Anti-Spam and Anti-Virus options which you may apply on a per-policy basis. By default, the proxy denies all . This default will be enacted if an does not match any listed policy. To ensure that is not rejected by default, at least one policy of type <Accept> must be created. Note Mail Proxy policies are evaluated in the order in which they are listed. When the proxy receives an , policies are each tested for matching conditions. Once an property is matched with a policy indicating acceptance or denial, that policy action is performed and no further policies will be tested for matching. If the policy list has been exhausted but no match has been found, the will be rejected. Policies accept or deny based upon address objects, reverse DNS, message size, mail exchange (MX) or mail abuse prevention system (MAPS) criteria. Using multiple policies in conjunction can sort types to different destination SMTP servers. When considering the destination domain for a policy match, three cases arise: No recipients match the policy s destination domain One or more recipients match the policy s destination domain All the recipients match the policy s destination domain If no recipients match, Mail Proxy checks the next policy for a match. Behavior for the other two cases is controlled by the MATCH ALL ADDRESSES check box: when unchecked, any one or more matching recipients will cause a policy match, but when checked, all of the recipients must match to cause a policy match. To create a new Mail Proxy policy, navigate to Configure>Threat Management>Mail Proxy>Policies and click the NEW icon. Note To accept or reject regardless of their fi le size, enter 0 (zero) as the maximum fi le size in your Mail Proxy policy. A maximum size of zero does not mean that only with no fi le size will be considered; instead, it means that the size limit consideration has been removed from the policy. CAUTION The IP address receiving from the Mail Proxy should not simultaneously have an inbound tunnel on TCP port 25 because this will bypass the proxy, and could compromise your security. Chapter 4: Threat Management 137

138 Figure 4.8: Configuring Mail Proxy Policies Field Disable Description Server Type Source Address Destination Address Match Against MX Table 4.4: Configuring Mail Proxy Policies Description Disables the confi gured Mail Proxy policy. Enter a description to explain the function of the policy. Specifi es which server should receive if the policy s criteria has been matched. Specifi es the action that should be done to an matching the source, destination and other criteria. <Accept> allows transmission while <Deny> disallows it. Specifi es a source (sender) match criteria for . Only address objects of type ALL or MAIL PROXY are available for selection. Specifi es a destination (recipient) match criteria for . Makes a DNS MX (Mail Exchanger) recorded query that tries to match the target IP address to the recipient in the SMTP mail header. The is rejected if there is no match, preventing the domain from being used to relay to other domains. 138 Chapter 4: Threat Management

139 Field Match All Addresses Options DNS White List Mail Abuse Prevention System Maximum Size Reject if RDNS Fails Anti-Spam * Enable Anti-Spam - Confirmed * Reject Anti-Spam - Suspect * Reject Anti-Virus Enable Reject Table 4.4: Configuring Mail Proxy Policies Description If checked, the policy will match only if all recipients contain the destination address. If unchecked, the policy will match if any one or more recipients contain the destination address. Select the check box to enable the DNS whitelist and then select an address object. MAPS; a special DNS server that contains only reverse DNS entries of known spam servers. The maximum size (in kilobytes) of an message to be accepted. Confi guring a maximum size can prevent bombs (large attachments that cause problems for clients). Enter a value of 0 to allow any message size. If enabled, the policy will perform a Reverse DNS lookup on the remote host and refuse the connection if the lookup fails to match the host s offered identity. Enables the Anti-Spam service. Rejects evaluated as confi rmed spam if enabled. Rejects evaluated as suspect spam if enabled. Enables the Anti-Virus service. Rejects containing known viruses if enabled. *The Anti-Spam subscription option is purchased separately. Feature activation codes must be entered before Anti- Spam can be utilized. Instructions for Anti-Spam and/or Anti-Virus are available in the Mail Proxy Feature Guide. Defining White (Allow) or Black (Deny) Lists White lists and black lists consist of policies set to unconditionally accept or deny connections from a group of servers. For example, you may wish to white list the server of a known business partner to accept all from that IP, or black list a known spam server to reject all from that IP. To define a white (allow) or black (deny) list: 1. Create an address object of type MAIL PROXY (you may use the pre-defined white list and black list defaults as templates). 2. Add the IP addresses from which you want to accept or deny transmissions and save the object. 3. Save the address object. 4. Create Mail Proxy policy that specifies an accept or deny action for that address object. Click the OK and then the SAVE button. To ensure that your white list or black list has priority over other policy rules, place it at the top of your Mail Proxy policy list. White listing or black listing by source, destination, or a combination of the two may have very different effects. For example, black listing a sender (source) will prevent everyone on your network from receiving from that source; however, setting a destination of employee@example.com in addition to a source will block from that source only when it is sent to employee@example.com. Conversely, setting a white list for all with a destination of sales@ example.com would allow anyone to that address, but allow you to black list sources sending to any other destination in subsequent policies. A combination of policy order (priority) and source and/or destination contents can provide for complex accept and deny rules. Chapter 4: Threat Management 139

140 RDNS (Reverse DNS) Selecting the REJECT IF RDNS FAILS check box can prevent the reception of spoofed or spam . It performs a reverse DNS lookup on the IP address of the remote host trying to make an SMTP connection, and then compares it to a DNS lookup of the offered host name. If the lookup fails or domain name and IP address records don t match (as may be the case with illegitimate mail servers), the connection is refused. RDNS requires a defined DNS server to function correctly. Note If REJECT IF RDNS FAILED is selected, legitimate hosts with misconfi gured DNS entries will not be able to deliver to your domain. Defining a Mail Abuse Prevention System (MAPS) When deciding to accept or reject , you may wish to check the message for criteria known to a Mail Abuse Prevention System (MAPS). When validating connections, you may use one of the pre-defined MAPS or specify a custom MAPS by using an Abuse type address object. A custom MAPS object may refer to a MAPS provider (such as zen.spamhouse.org) or to your own MAPS server. A MAPS server is a DNS server whose reverse DNS entries are spam servers. Any name resolved by the MAPS server therefore indicates that the originated from a spam server. Additional information on creating your own MAPS server or subscribing to MAPS services is available from many sources. To specify which address object to use as a MAPS, select an object from the pull-down menu labeled MAIL ABUSE PREVENTION SYSTEM under the TO BLOCK heading in your Mail Proxy policy. To define a custom MAPS solution: 1. Create an address object of type MAIL PROXY and name it MAPS server. 2. Specify your domain name or IP address under the ADDRESS field and add a DESCRIPTION if you wish. Note that you can define multiple MAPS servers in a single address object; this can be useful if the first MAPS is slow or unresponsive. 3. Save the address object. 4. In the Mail Proxy policy, select the MAIL ABUSE PREVENTION SYSTEM toggle and select the previously defined address object. To finalize your MAPS object definition, click the OK and then the SAVE button. 140 Chapter 4: Threat Management

141 Content Filtering GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide With every Web page request, GB-OS must choose to accept or deny transmission. Content Filtering controls Web site access based upon the domain name and content of the site. Content Filtering policies allow the use of the Content Filtering subscription option (subscription charges apply). Note Content Filtering s performance relies on an effi cient, enabled DNS server. Content Filtering requires the use of an HTTP proxy. The Content Filtering Proxy section allows the administrator to specify a traditional proxy, a transparent proxy, or both. In addition, an action concerning blocked content can be selected. Note For information on instructions on confi guring the Content Filtering subscription option, please refer to the Content Filtering Feature Guide. Configuring the Content Filtering Proxy To configure the Content Filtering HTTP proxy, navigate to Configure>Threat Management>Content Filtering>Proxy. Field Figure 4.9: Configuring the Content Filtering Proxy Table 4.5: Configuring the Content Filtering Proxy Description Traditional Proxy Enable Enables the traditional proxy. Disabled by default. Port The port through which the proxy will run. Default is Advanced Automatic Policies A toggle for whether the fi rewall should automatically generate the required policies for the proxy to function. If unselected, it is necessary to defi ne remote access policies. Log Enables Content Filtering logging. Report Enables saving of Content Filtering data for Reports. Transparent Proxy Enable Enables the transparent proxy. Disabled by default. Chapter 4: Threat Management 141

142 Block Action Action Message URL A selection for the action to be performed when a request for blocked content is performed. If <Use message> is selected for the ACTION, the message will be displayed. If <Redirect to URL> is selected for the ACTION, the user will be directed to the entered URL. Enabling the Traditional Proxy When the firewall is operating without Content Filtering enabled, it does not use a proxy. When the HTTP proxy is used in conjunction with a Content Filtering facility, it runs on TCP port 2784 by default. To run the HTTP proxy on a different port, enter the desired port number in the PORT field. In order to enable access to the traditional proxy, a remote access policy that allows connection to the entered PORT value must be configured and enabled. The traditional proxy requires users located on protected networks to have browsers configured to use a proxy connection with the proxy IP address and port number. Only users specifying the traditional proxy port will use Content Filtering for their traffic. Transparent Proxy This method is invisible to users located on the protected network. No modification to their browser s settings is required, and there is no PORT field. The transparent proxy allows the firewall to filter and mediate HTTP traffic transparently to end users. The following are inspected by the transparent proxy: Port 80 Port 8080 (http) Port 443 (https) HTTP represents URL based filtering, while HTTPS represents DNS and IP address based filtering. Block Actions If a policy blocks a Web address (URL) and a user attempts to load a page from that address, the user will see a custom message, or be redirected to a URL (e.g., an internal Web site that defines the company s Internet policies and the administrative process to gain access to a blocked Web site). Content Filtering Policies Content Filtering policies contain the criteria that cause a Web page to be accepted or denied and define any scripts or applets that should be blocked. Note Content Filtering policies are evaluated in the order they are listed. When the fi rewall receives a Web page request, policy rules are each tested for matching conditions. Once a Web page request is matched with a policy indicating acceptance or denial, the policy s actions are performed and no further policies will be tested for matching. If the policy list has been exhausted and no match has been found, the Web page will be denied. By default, Content Filtering denies all Web page requests. This default will be enacted if a Web page request does not meet any listed policy. To ensure that all Web page requests are not rejected by default, at least one policy of type <Accept> must be in place. 142 Chapter 4: Threat Management

143 To configure Content Filtering policies, navigate to Configure>Threat Management>Content Filtering>Policies and click the NEW icon to create a new policy. Figure 4.10: Configuring Content Filtering Policies Field Disable Description Source Address Time Group Advanced Authentication Required Destination Address HTTPS Filtering Content Filtering Facilities Local Allow List Local Deny List Web Filtering * Content Blocking ActiveX Objects Java Javascript Unknown HTTP Commands Categories * Accept / Deny * Table 4.6: Configuring Content Filtering Policies Description Disables the policy. A description for the policy. If a request matches an element of the specifi ed address object of type CONTENT FILTERING, the packet will be compared to the policy. Select a user-defi ned time group in which the policy will be enabled. Time groups are defi ned at Configure>Objects>Time Groups. Enable to require user authentication. A selection for restricting access based on the destination address. Enable fi ltering of https protocols. Enable to use the fi rewall s local allow list by selecting its address object. Enable to use the fi rewall s local deny list by selecting its address object. Enable to use the Content Filtering Categories list. Enable to block ActiveX controls. Enable to block Java applets. Enable to block Javascript. Enable to block unknown HTTP commands and unencrypted HTTP protocols. Specify allowed or blocked Content Filtering categories. Switch a category from one list to the other by selecting the item and clicking the left or right arrow button. * Requires a feature activation code and a valid Content Filtering subscription (purchased separately). Chapter 4: Threat Management 143

144 Local Allow and Deny Lists Local allow and deny lists allow customization of content filtering using customized address objects. You can choose to execute all content filtering locally, allow access to sites that are disallowed by another content filtering facility or deny access to sites that are otherwise allowed. To add domain names to the local allow and deny lists: 1. Navigate to Configure>Objects>Address Objects. 2. Select the local list you wish to edit. 3. In the ADDRESS field, enter the desired domain name and an optional description. 4. For additional domain names, select the ADD button for additional rows. 5. Click OK and then SAVE. Enter domain names in the following format: example.com. WWW and other such subdomain prefixes (www2, www3) limit the effectiveness of the local allow or deny lists. For example, the value only accepts or denies access for the specific site only, not to sites such as www2.example.com or subdomain.example.com. Thus, if you wish to block an entire domain and all of its subdomains, enter example.com. Additionally, you may use regular expressions to create more elaborate local allow and deny lists. See Using Regular Expressions for more information. Content Blocking Figure 4.11: Editing Local Allow List Portable code blocking for ActiveX objects, Java, Javascript and unknown HTTP commands can protect your network from malicious programs such as viruses spread by Web pages (applets or scripts appear in inbound TCP ports 80 and 8080). In addition to blocking mobile programs embedded in Web pages, CONTENT BLOCKING can also prevent tunneled, unencrypted non-http connections over standard HTTP ports. Non-HTTP protocols (such as FTP) or unknown HTTP commands may be transmitted over standard HTTP ports. For example, if your firewall is configured to allow only Web traffic, this may indicate an effort of internal network users to bypass your policy by redirecting blocked non-http protocols ports to open HTTP ports. To block transmission of non-standard HTTP commands and unencrypted non-http protocols over HTTP ports, check the UNKNOWN HTTP COMMANDS box in the CONTENT BLOCKING section. 144 Chapter 4: Threat Management

145 Content Filtering Categories GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide Content Filtering is a subscription option that provides firewall system administrators with a user-friendly interface and easy access to an exhaustive list of Web categories for content filtering. Content Filtering is superior to local allow and deny lists alone. Using local allow and deny lists, an administrator is able to enter only a limited number of URLs. With Content Filtering, the administrator can easily allow or deny whole categories of content. Local allow and deny lists then allow further customization. Specific time groups can also be applied to Content Filtering policies, allowing the administrator to specify more or less access during various time periods. Content Filtering is specifically designed for firewalls as a complete content filtering solution. It features a small, ultra-light footprint. An annual subscription for Content Filtering can be purchased from GTA, or through an authorized GTA Channel Partner. With your subscription, use the Content Filtering Feature Guide, which provides more information and understanding on using Content Filtering categories. Creating Advanced Content Filtering Policies Content Filtering policies contain additional, advanced settings. Policies can require user groups to authenticate with the firewall using GBAuth or Single Sign-On authentication as well as control Internet access based on the destination address. Restricting access by destination address is useful if the administrator wishes to block content on a certain Web site, such as ActiveX objects. Regular expression can also be used when defining the policy s DESTINATION ADDRESS. For example, entering a value of *.edu will result in a policy match whenever a destination address ending in.edu is entered. CAUTION Using regular expression in policy defi nitions may result in an unexpected policy match. See Using Regular Expressions for more information on using regular expressions. Advanced settings for Content Filtering policies are configured from Configure>Threat Management>Content Filtering>Policies under the ADVANCED tab. Field Authentication Required Destination Address HTTPS Filtering Figure 4.12: Advanced Content Filtering Policies Table 4.7: Advanced Content Filtering Policies Description Enable to require users to authenticate with the GTA fi rewall using GBAuth or Single Sign-On auhentication. When enabled, a pull down will appear with confi gured user groups that will have the policy applied to them. A selection of address objects that are of type Content Filtering. Select <USER DEFINED> to manually enter a destination address. Enable to allow fi ltering of HTTPS protocols. Chapter 4: Threat Management 145

146 5 Monitoring Reports & Administrative Tools 146

147 Monitoring, Reports, and Administrative Tools GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide This chapter details the administrative tools which are available, monitoring capabilities such as viewing activities, and reporting features. Administrative Tools The Tools section under the Monitor action button contains a number of tools useful for administrating and troubleshooting the firewall s configuration. Interfaces The Interfaces configuration screen, located at Monitor>Tools>Interfaces, allows a network interface on the firewall to be <Up> (capable of sending/receiving packets), or <Down> (incapable of sending/receiving packets). CAUTION Disabling the network interface on which your computer resides will result in loss of connectivity to the fi rewall. Network Diagnostics Figure 5.1: Configuring Firewall Interfaces The Network Diagnostics configuration screen, located at Monitor>Tools>Network Diagnostics, contains ping and trace route tests, which are useful for verifying connectivity. Ping The ping function executes the network ping connectivity test by using the ICMP protocol. The ping is executed from the GTA firewall, not from your computer. Pinging an IP address is useful for verifying connectivity from the firewall to any target host on the external or internal network. The firewall will attempt to send five ICMP ping packets to the target destination and will display relevant statistics. Note Pinging IP addresses instead of domain names is recommended when possible, as it eliminates the possibility of DNS errors. Pinging a domain name may only function when a DNS proxy or DNS server has been enabled. Chapter 5: Monitoring and Administrative Tools 147

148 To ping an IP address or domain name: Navigate to Monitor>Tools>Network Diagnostics and select the PING radio button. In the HOST fi eld, enter the desired IP address or fully qualifi ed domain name to ping. If an IP address is entered, it must be entered in dotted decimal notation. Click the SUBMIT to execute the ping command. Figure 5.2: Pinging an IP Address Trace Route Figure 5.3: Reviewing Ping Results The trace route function performs a routing trace from the firewall to a designated IP address or domain name. Like PING, TRACE ROUTE is useful for testing network connectivity. To determine whether a route to an Internet host is viable, the trace route function launches UDP probe packets with a short time to live (TTL), and then listens for an ICMP time exceeded reply from a gateway. When the trace is active, three probes are launched from each gateway, with the output showing the TTL, address of the gateway, and round trip time of each probe. Note Performing a trace route on IP addresses instead of domain names is recommended when possible, as it eliminates the possibility of DNS errors. Tracing a domain name may only function when a DNS proxy or DNS server has been enabled. To perform a trace route: Navigate to Monitor>Tools>Network Diagnostics and select the TRACE ROUTE radio button. In the HOST fi eld, enter the desired IP address or fully qualifi ed domain name to ping. If an IP address is entered, it must be entered in dotted decimal notation. Click the SUBMIT to execute the trace route command. Figure 5.4: Tracing a Domain Name Figure 5.5: Reviewing Trace Route Results 148 Chapter 5: Monitoring and Administrative Tools

149 Packet Capture GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide Packet captures can be monitored at Monitor>Tools>Packet Capture. Select the EDIT button to define packet capture filters. Shutdown Figure 5.6: Packet Capture The Shutdown configuration screen, located at Monitor>Tools>Shutdown, contains halt and reboot services plus the ability to release licenses for GB-Ware firewalls. Under the ADVANCED tab, selecting the disk purge options for country blocking, historical statistics, IPS, Mail Proxy and reporting will clean up all old files. Figure 5.7: Shutting down the Firewall Note GTA recommends halting the system prior to disconnecting the fi rewall to ensure proper shutdown. Additionally, use the reboot feature as necessary. Halt HALT properly shuts down all services, preparing the firewall so it can be powered off. Once halted, the firewall must be restarted from the Console interface or be physically reset. Reboot REBOOT will restart the firewall. Release License Selecting RELEASE LICENSE will free licenses to be used by another firewall and will halt the system. This option is only available for GB-Ware firewalls using online licenses. Chapter 5: Monitoring and Administrative Tools 149

150 Audit Events Audit Events, located at Monitor>Audit Events, contains a log of activity performed by administrators to the firewall s configuration. Normal events are displayed in black text, while warnings and higher priority events will be displayed in red. The audit events are divided into two sections: access and system. Viewing Firewall Logs Recent event messages are locally stored in a buffer on the firewall. The size of the buffer is dependent on the GTA Firewall UTM Appliance s memory configuration. When the buffer is filled, it will begin writing over the oldest data. Log messages are displayed in reverse order, with the most recent message appearing at the top. Messages are written in the standard WebTrends Enhanced Log Format (WELF). Warning messages are displayed in red. For more information on interpreting log messages, refer to Reference E: Log Messages. To view log messages, navigate to Monitor>System>Log Messages. The Log Messages menu allows for log messages to be viewed in their entirety by selecting the All menu item, or they can be filtered based upon menu selections such as Connections or Management. The display is static; if you wish to update the list, click the REFRESH button, or configure the REFRESH button to automatically reload after a desired time frame. Figure 5.8: Viewing Firewall Logs 150 Chapter 5: Monitoring and Administrative Tools

151 Viewing Activity The Activity section under the Monitor action button provides direct access to firewall account, network, threat management and VPN statistics. System data is continuously updated, so activity snapshots will always be current. Some statistics may not appear if they are not activated in your configuration. Data displayed on-screen is static; to update the displayed data click the REFRESH button located along the top of the screen, or configure the REFRESH button to automatically reload after a desired time frame. To review system activity navigate to Monitor>Activity. Note Accounts All activity reported is based upon the fi rewall s Live Mode confi guration. Accounts activity, located at Monitor>Activity>Accounts, displays statistics for authenticated users and failed authentication attempts. Authenticated Authenticated tracks access by users authenticated through the firewall with GBAuth for GTA, GB SSOAuth, LDAP and RADIUS authentication. The record includes: The outbound user s name as defi ned in Configure>Accounts>Authorization The LDAP confi guration or the RADIUS confi guration The GBAuth IDENTITY fi eld The source IP address The user s group The number of minutes the user has been active, and when their lease expires (if applicable) The last column, lease duration (time remaining), applies only to mobile VPN users. If a user is actively connected with the GTA Mobile VPN Client, the lease will renew each time a request is made. If the user remains inactive for the timeout period, the lease duration column will report an expiration until the license is required for another user or the original user renews the lease. Note Flush Authenticated Users: Flush will drop all authenticated users from the fi rewall. Users will need to reauthenticate. Locked Out Locked Out lists IP addresses from which unsuccessful login attempts exceed the threshold number of attempts set in the Configure>Accounts>Preferences LOCKOUT THRESHOLD field. A failed logon attempt occurs when the wrong firewall administration user name and/or password has been entered. The duration shows how long the IP address will be locked out and is expressed as a count-down, (e.g. if the administrator has set five minutes as the lockout duration, the counter will start at 00:05:00 and count down to zero (00:00:00)). At that time, the user may again attempt logon from the IP address. When the lockout time duration expires, the IP address will disappear from Locked Out. Sessions Sessions displays recent firewall account sessions. Information displayed includes the user, the location from which the firewall was accessed, whether or not the user has administrative privileges, SSL and the duration of the session. Chapter 5: Monitoring and Administrative Tools 151

152 Network Network activity, located at Monitor>Activity>Network, displays statistics for the ARP table, connections, routes and more. ARP Table Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is used to dynamically map host addresses to Ethernet addresses. When an interface requests a routing map for an IP address not in the cache, ARP queues the message and broadcasts a request for the map on the associated network. If a response is provided, the new map is cached, and any pending message is transmitted. ARP will queue at most one packet while waiting for a response to a map request and only the most recent packet is kept. If the target host does not respond after several requests, the host is considered to be down for a short period (20 seconds), allowing an error to be returned for transmission attempts during this interval. The error host is down indicates a non-responding destination host, and host unreachable indicates a non-responding router. The ARP Table list displays a list of currently known ARP addresses. The list displays the IP address to MAC address translations and the TTL (Time to Live) for each entry. ARP table entries are kept for 20 minutes and are scanned every five (5) minutes to check for expired entries. Once an entry is expired, the firewall will not try to re-map the address for 20 seconds. Flushing the ARP Table Clicking the FLUSH X at the top will clear the cache of IP addresses resolved by the address resolution protocol and recorded in the ARP table. Connections Connections displays a list of currently active inbound and outbound connections by protocol, port, type, internal, NAT and address, route, time the connection has been active and/or idle as well as packets and bytes that have been sent and received. Select and define the FILTERS to Not display selected connection types. Figure 5.9: Connections 152 Chapter 5: Monitoring and Administrative Tools

153 Hosts GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide Hosts appears only on firewalls with a restricted number of concurrent users. For the number of concurrent users licensed on your model, navigate to Monitor>System>Overview. Hosts tracks and regulates outbound access. The number of licenses used is determined by the number of IP addresses from which outbound requests are currently being made. This count includes: Connections from a protected to external network Connections from a protected to PSN Connections from a PSN to external network Outbound connections opened by a protected network or PSN when responding to requests The record includes the outbound user s IP address and lease duration (time remaining). If the user continues to send outbound requests, remaining active, the lease will renew each time a request is made. If the user remains inactive for the timeout period, the lease duration column will report expired until the license is required for another user or the original user renews the lease. Routing Routing displays the active routing tables for BGP, OSPF, RIP, Neighbor Discovery and normal routes, which can be helpful in troubleshooting routing problems. The list displays destination, gateway and flags. Flags are defined in the table below. Field Description Table 5.1: Routes B Recently discarded packets. b The route represents a broadcast address. C Generate new routes on use. c Protocol-specified generate new routes on use. D Created dynamically. G Destination requires forwarding by intermediary. H Host entry. L Valid protocol to link address translation. M Modifi ed dynamically. R Host or network unreachable. S Static route, manually added. U Route is usable. W Route was generated as a result of cloning. X External daemon translates protocol to link address. 1 Protocol specifi c. Chapter 5: Monitoring and Administrative Tools 153

154 Statistics Statistics displays the firewall s current connections of TCP, UDP, ICMP or other protocols by utilization and bandwidth used. A summary of the information appears at the bottom of the list, including total packets, current average packets, peak average packets, date, CPU usage percentage of user process, percentage of system process, percentage of interrupt, and percentage of idle - and firewall update. Security Policies Figure 5.10: Viewing Activity Statistics Security Policies, located at Monitor>Activity>Security Policies, displays a list of policies for each of the policy types: Country Blocking, Inbound, Outbound, IPSec, Pass Through, PPTP, L2TP, SSL Client and Automatic. Information includes the policy s order in its policy list (index number) the number of hits (count) and a description of the policy. Inactive time-based policies have a red asterisk (*) next to the entry. Services Services, located at Monitor>Activity>Services, contains statistics on DHCP lease activity. DHCP Leases DHCP Leases lists DHCP-assigned IP addresses and their host identities. If activated, DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) automatically assigns IP addresses to internal hosts logging onto a TCP/IP network. It eliminates having to manually assign permanent IP addresses. DHCP dynamically updates DNS servers after making assignments. Flushing DHCP Leases Clicking the FLUSH X at the top will clear all DHCP-assigned IP addresses resolved by the DHCP Server and recorded in the DHCP Leases table. 154 Chapter 5: Monitoring and Administrative Tools

155 Threat Management GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide Threat Management, located at Monitor>Activity>Threat Management, contains statistics on IPS, the Mail Proxy Anti-Spam, Anti-Virus, and Content Filtering with Web Filtering. Note Mail Proxy Anti-Spam activities will not be available unless you have purchased and activated the Anti-Spam subscription option. See the Mail Proxy Feature Guide for more information. Rejected s are those for which a message undeliverable signal has been returned to the sender. Quarantined s are those that have been sent to a quarantine address. Other s are delivered normally. Percentages are relative to the total for the section. For example, the percentage of rejected Confirmed spam is relative to the total number of processed by Anti-Spam, and is not relative to the total number of processed by the proxy as a whole. IPS IPS displays a statistical summary on IPS activity. Mail Proxy Anti-Spam Anti-Spam displays a statistical summary on the number of processed s with spam, number of rejected s that are both suspected and confirmed, number of quarantined s that are both suspected and confirmed as well as the total number of received s of unknown status, as well as greylisting statistics. Anti-Virus Anti-Virus displays a statistical summary on the number of processed s with viruses, number of rejected s, number of quarantined s as well as the total number of confirmed viruses. The bottom table displays a current list of the most recent viruses identified by Anti-Virus. Statistics The Mail Proxy Statistics statistical summary includes fields describing total connections, rejected and timed-out connections, as well as processed by Mail Proxy s policies. Access Control List statistics assist troubleshooting by indicating the count of messages that triggered a Mail Proxy policy of a given index number. The index and description columns describe which Mail Proxy policy was triggered by of the given number (count). Because the last time the Mail Proxy policies were saved or changed may not be the time when the Mail Proxy engine was last initialized, the total count of Mail Proxy policy matches may be less than the total number of processed by Mail Proxy. Note Not all processed by the proxy are necessarily processed by Anti-Spam or Anti-Virus, so these totals may not be equivalent. Content Filtering The Content Filtering Statistics statistical summary includes fields describing total Web access and the percentage denied as well as policy counts with descriptions. Inactive time based policies are marked with a red asterisk. Chapter 5: Monitoring and Administrative Tools 155

156 VPN VPN, located at Monitor>Activity>VPN, displays IPSec tunnel statistics. IPSec Tunnels IPSec Tunnels displays all current active IPSec tunnels. There is an inbound and outbound tunnel for each VPN connection. Field Security Associations Active Connections Source Destination Type Hash Algorithm State Active Idle Bytes Description Description Table 5.2: IPSec Tunnels The percent of active security associations. Source IP address of the gateway. Destination IP address of the gateway. The type of VPN connection. The hash algorithm used by the VPN. Values include: larval, mature, dying and dead. Larval and dead states frequently occur to quickly to be observed. The amount of time the VPN connection has been active. The amount of time the VPN connection has been idle. The number of bytes transferred by the connection. The description used in the IPSec tunnel s confi guration for identifi cation. 156 Chapter 5: Monitoring and Administrative Tools

157 Reporting The Reporting section, located at Monitor>Reporting, provides access to configurations, executive reports and historical statistics. Scheduling reports and defining graph preferences are available at Configure>Reporting. Report Configuration Navigate to Monitor>Reporting>Configuration, to send via , or download, system configuration and reports. 1. Select the report FORMAT. 7-Zip and Zip require a password. 2. Customize the SUBJECT and COMMENT(S) fi elds as necessary. 3. Select the CONFIGURATION fi le and specify the REPORTS format to be included as attachments. Reports can be generated in 7-Zip, Zip, or HTML format. 7-Zip and Zip require a password. 4. If was selected as the FORMAT, enter the destination and origination addresses. 5. Under Advanced, select the reports to be included. 6. Click SUBMIT at the top of the confi guration page to download or the confi guration and reports. Figure 5.11: Generating Configuration Reports Chapter 5: Monitoring and Administrative Tools 157

158 Generating Reports Navigate to Monitor>Reporting>Reports, to generate a report. 1. Select the TYPE of report to be generated. Options include Allowed, Country, Denied, Executive, Inbound, Mail Proxy, Network Traffi c, Outbound, Web Filtering, System Resources and VPN. 2. Select the DURATION of the report to be generated. Options include Hourly, Daily, Weekly, Monthly or Yearly. 2. Select the FORMAT for the report. Option include HTML, MHTML, 7-Zip and Zip. Passwords are required for 7-Zip and Zip. 3. Under Advanced, modify the data that will be generated with the report as necessary. This list will change depending on the type of report selected. 4. Click SUBMIT at the top of the page to generate and download the report. Figure 5.12: Generating Reports 158 Chapter 5: Monitoring and Administrative Tools

159 Scheduling Reports GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide Reports can be scheduled by navigating to Configure>Reporting>Schedule. Edit an existing schedule or select Create New. 1. Check DISABLE to disable a scheduled report. 2. Enter a DESCRIPTION for the scheduled report. 3. Under Report, choose the TYPE of report to be generated. Options include Allowed, Country, Denied, Executive, Inbound, Mail Proxy, Network Traffi c, Outbound, Web Filtering, System Resources and VPN. 4. Select the DURATION of the report to be generated. Options include Hourly, Daily, Weekly, Monthly or Yearly. Note Daily will include data from the past 24 hours, weekly the past 7 days, and monthly the past 30 days. 5. Select the language LOCALE. 6. Under Schedule, designate the frequency and time at which the report will run. Reports can be scheduled to run daily, weekly, or monthly. Note Reports scheduled to run monthly will run on the fi rst of every month. 7. Under , customize the Subject line of the as necessary. Enter the destination address or lists. 8. Under Advanced, select and modify the data that will be generated for the report as necessary. This list will change depending on the type of report selected. 9. Click OK to save changes. Figure 5.13: Scheduling Reports Chapter 5: Monitoring and Administrative Tools 159

160 Graphs Historical Statistics, located at Monitor>Reporting>Graphs, contains graphical information representing past activity. Activity is displayed in Hourly, Daily, Weekly, Monthly and Yearly graphs. The graphs are organized in four main categories: System Resources - CPU, Memory Usage, Licences Used, Security Associations Network Traffi c - Connections, Packets Denied Bandwidth - Bandwidth, External, Protected Mail Proxy - Mail Proxy, SPAM, Rejected Web Filtering - Web Filtering, Categorized, Licenses Used Current time period is an average for each graph, representing the last set of data points in an interval: Hour - average for the last 10 seconds of the period Day - average for the last 3 minutes of the period Week - average for the last 21 minutes of the period Month - average for the last 2 hours of the period Year - average for the last 18 hours and 15 min of the period Figure 5.14: Historical Statistics (Network Traffic-Packets Denied shown) 160 Chapter 5: Monitoring and Administrative Tools

161 Preferences GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide Report preferences are set by navigating to Configure>Reporting>Preferences. 1. Under GRAPHS, define the colors to be used for graph data. Enter the Hex code or click to use the color picker to select a color. 2. Under HISTORICAL STATISTICS and REPORTING, administrators have the options to enable storage. Storage options are INTERNAL or USB. 3. Click SAVE when fi nished. Figure 5.15: Report Preferences Chapter 5: Monitoring and Administrative Tools 161

162 Updating Your Firewall s Software GTA routinely publishes updates to GB-OS. These updates provide new features and enhanced security options. When GTA publishes an update to GB-OS, availability will be announced at Configure>Configuration>Runtime>Update in the AVAILABLE UPDATE(S) section. In order to check for available updates, GB-OS requires that the firewall is registered in the GTA Online Support Center, that the firewall has access to the Internet and that SSL connections are allowed. Available updates are displayed depending on whether a current support contract is available for the GTA Firewall UTM Appliance. If there is a current support contract, the following will be displayed: The highest available patch level upgrade The latest available version of GB-OS Any intermediate versions of GB-OS that are required to upgrade to the latest available version If there is no current support contract, the following will be displayed: The highest available patch level upgrade The latest available version of GB-OS Note Updating the GB-OS runtime always takes place as a Live Mode change. To check for and install updates to GB-OS: 1. Navigate to Configure>Configuration>Runtime>Update. 2. In the AVAILABLE UPDATE(S) section, click the CHECK NOW button. 3. Download the available runtime by clicking DOWNLOAD. The runtime will be stored on the fi rewall until installed. Rebooting the fi rewall or selecting CHECK NOW will remove the stored runtime. 4. Install the runtime by clicking INSTALL. Figure 5.16: Updating GB-OS 162 Chapter 5: Monitoring and Administrative Tools

163 Scheduling Checks for Automatic Updates GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide GB-OS can automatically check for eligible software updates. By enabling automatic updates, administrators can rest assured knowing their GTA Firewall UTM Appliance is operating the most current available version of GB-OS. To schedule automatic runtime updates, navigate to Configure>Configuration>Runtime>Update. Field Schedule Update Check Enable Frequency Day Time Notification Figure 5.17: Scheduling Automatic Updates Table 5.3: Scheduling Automatic Updates Description Select the ENABLE checkbox to schedule automatic runtime updates. Select the frequency that GB-OS will check for updates. Options are Daily and Weekly. Select the day that GB-OS will check for updates. Select the time that GB-OS will check for updates. Performing a Manual Software Update Select the NOTIFICATION checkbox to have GB-OS the fi rewall administrator when a new runtime is available, or when an automatic update has been performed. If a new version of GB-OS has been announced at Configure>Configuration>Runtime>Update, administrators can log into the GTA Support Center ( to download the runtime. If you are not eligible for an upgrade, contact the GTA Sales staff (sales@gta.com) or your local GTA Channel Partner for information on support contracts. Once the runtime has been downloaded, navigate to Configure>Configuration>Runtime>Update and click the ADVANCED tab. In the RUNTIME section, click the CHOOSE FILE button and select the runtime. The file will have an extension of.rtm. Select UPLOAD to upload the runtime file. GB-OS will then validate the file. If it is valid, the system will install it. Figure 5.18: Manually Updating Your Firewall s Software Note If upgrading to a major version (such as 6.1 to 6.2) new activation codes are required. The activation codes can be obtained from the GTA Support Center. Chapter 5: Monitoring and Administrative Tools 163

164 6 Troubleshooting 164

165

166 Troubleshooting Guidelines Log messages, reports and activity snapshots are your first resource for general troubleshooting. This section contains useful troubleshooting procedures and frequently asked questions for solving firewall configuration errors. GTA Support recommends the following guidelines as a starting point when troubleshooting network problems: Check your policies. Are the correct policies in place for the type of traffi c you are trying to allow or disallow? Start with the simplest case of hosts directly attached to the fi rewall. Use IP addresses, not names. The problem could be DNS. Work with one network segment at a time. Verify your fi rewall system confi guration by navigating to Configure>Verify. The verifi cation check is the best method of ensuring that your system is confi gured correctly. Correct all errors and warnings listed. Your fi rst tests should be connectivity tests. Ping and traceroute are very useful tools for testing connectivity. Make sure the network cabling is connected to the correct network interface. Some useful guidelines are: Verify the network interface numbers, MAC addresses and logical names listed on the Monitor>System>Overview screen and in log reports. Use the logical elimination method. Connect a network cable to the fi rst network interface and use the ping facility to test for connectivity with a host on the desired network. If unsuccessful, move the cable to the next network interface and perform the test again. Repeat until successful, or all network interfaces have been tested. View the hardware report located at Monitor>System>Hardware. Check the report to ensure all your network devices have been recognized by the system at boot time. 166 Chapter 6: Troubleshooting

167 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) Common configuration errors or questions are grouped by the feature type. Select a question from the list below. If your question is not answered below, please contact GTA Support for more information. Administration I lost my user name and/or password. How can I log on to my firewall? Why can t I access the Web interface from the protected network? How do I revert to my previous runtime after a version upgrade? Network Connectivity Why is my GB-250 or GB-250e periodically resetting services? Which policy should I use? How do I determine which rule or policy is causing rejected traffic? Why can t ALL hosts (computers and devices) behind the firewall reach the Internet? Why can t ONE host (computers and devices) behind the firewall reach the Internet? I can t access a tunnel that I have created. Why? Why can t I see or ping the protected network interface? How do I bypass NAT, allowing no-nat routing to an IP address on the internal network? I get a bridging loop error message when I am in bridging mode. My Microsoft Exchange server located on the PSN can t find the PDC (Primary Domain Controller) on the protected network. Why? Services and Options IPS policies cannot be configured. Why? I enabled Mail Proxy options. Why did the firewall automatically disable them? My quarantine does not work. Why? Mail Proxy rejects too little . Why? Mail Proxy rejects too much . Why? Mail Proxy rejects all . Why? Hardware Why are the interface s green LEDs not lighting up? I get an alarm: Interface down message. Other I get errors when using GBAuth. What do they mean? AOL Web access is blocked when I use Content Filtering. How do I allow it? Automatic Backup I get an error message Hardware does not support USB devices. Firewall shows as not licensed for Cloud backup. Chapter 6: Troubleshooting 167

168 Administration Q: I lost my user name and/or password. How can I log on to my firewall? If login information has been irretrievably lost, a firewall can be reset to factory defaults, erasing all current configuration data and resetting both the case-sensitive user name and password to fwadmin. CAUTION Resetting the fi rewall will cause it to lose current confi guration data, The confi guration data can only be restored by loading a saved confi guration, or by manually entering the information. To reset your firewall to factory defaults, attach either a terminal (using a serial console cable), or a computer with terminal emulation software (using a DB-9 null-modem cable). Enter these settings for the console connection: Table 5.1: Connecting to the Console Interface Field Description Emulation VT-100 or PuTTY Port COM port connected via DB-9 cable to the firewall Baud Rate or 115,200 (GB-300 and GB-850) Data/Bit Rate 8 Parity None Stop 1 Flow Control Hardware Power on the GTA firewall. The following will be displayed: GB-OS 6.x.x loading... When the word loading appears, immediately press CONTROL-R. The system will begin to load, and configuration and hardware data will appear on screen. Finally, a confirmation question displays: Are you sure you want to reset your firewall configuration?: ( yes or no ) To reset to factory defaults, type the word yes in lower case letters. Typing any other key will reboot the system without resetting to defaults. If there is no input after two minutes, the firewall will continue its boot process. Q: Why can t I access the Web Interface from the protected network? The default remote access policy set is generated from the configuration parameters entered in the Basic Setup Wizard or in the Configure>Network>Interfaces>Settings screen. It is possible that the firewall s protected network interface is on a different subnet from your host. Enable automatic policies or check the remote access policy for the Web interface; it may need to be adjusted. 168 Chapter 6: Troubleshooting

169 Q: How do I revert to my previous runtime after a version upgrade? GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide The firewall s flash memory is in two sections ( slices ); one contains the current software version plus any saved configuration, the other contains the previous software version and configuration. A new firewall s two memory slices are identical. When the firewall is upgraded to a new runtime, the upgrade process automatically overwrites the memory slice not in use with the new software version and the existing configuration, leaving the production firewall version and configuration intact. When the firewall is rebooted, the updated memory slice will load by default. To select a memory slice other than the default, navigate to Configure>Configuration>Runtime>Options. CAUTION Changing the active slice will cause the fi rewall to reboot. Network Connectivity Q: Why is my GB-250 or GB-250e periodically resetting services? The GB-250 and GB-250e were designed for small business networks, yet offer a full complement of threat management and network services to allow administrators to select the features that best match their needs. In order to provide network administrators with the broadest range of choices, GTA offers all threat management features (Mail Proxy Anti-Spam, Mail Proxy Anti-Virus, and Content Filtering with optional Web Filtering) on the GB-250 and GB-250e. Additionally, many advanced network services (traditional and transparent proxy, authentication server, SNMP server, DHCP server, and VPN) are also available on these units. However, the hardware specifications of these products necessitates limitations on utilizing every threat management and network service, as each additional service places greater demands the firewall s CPU and memory. Firewall administrators should carefully select which threat management features and network services to activate on the firewall, and monitor the results to prevent undesired interruptions of service. By activating all threat management and network services it is possible to exceed the available resources of the GB-250 and GB-250e. Should enabled services exceed the GB-250 or GB-250e s resources, administrators will notice that GB-OS will restart enabled services as they exceed available memory and will generate a log message. These periodic restarts may result in a temporary loss of enabled services or network connectivity. GB-250 and GB-250e administrators with multiple threat management services should monitor GB-OS log messages to ensure continuous network connectivity. If the GB-250 or GB-250e consistently exceeds available memory, administrators should consider disabling unnecessary GB-OS services or reducing defined threat management settings. To assist administrators in evaluating threat management features and their impact on performance of these units, GTA offers 30 day evaluation versions of Mail Proxy Anti-Spam and Web Filtering. These evaluation versions may be requested at If all services are desired, administrators may wish to consider one of GTA s more powerful products, such as the GB-850, GB-2100 or GB-2500 Firewall UTM Appliance family, which are designed to meet the needs of more robust network implementations. Q: Which policy should I use? As packets flow into the firewall, they may be stopped, redirected or transformed depending on the types of policies that the packet hits. If a packet succeeds through all possible checks and transformations, it is transmitted to a network destination on the other side of the firewall. But which policy set should you use to create your desired traffic flow to your desired destination? You must use policies to tell the firewall how traffic should be handled by the firewall s logic. Chapter 6: Troubleshooting 169

170 Policies are enacted according to the firewall s logical order. Based upon the type of packet, remote access, outbound, and/or pass-through policies may be required to permit a connection. Is the packet outgoing from a network protected by the fi rewall? Create an outbound policy. Is the packet incoming to a network protected by the fi rewall (including from a PSN)? If it has NAT or VPN tunnel encapsulation, create a remote access policy. If it has no NAT, or has had NAT removed during decapsulation, use a pass through policy. Note that for encapsulated traffi c, this may mean that you need both a remote access and a pass through policy. Also note that even if all your firewall policies are correct, a packet without a valid route cannot be delivered, even if it is allowed! If policies have been ruled out as the source of your problem, check routing settings. Q: How do I determine which rule or policy is causing rejected traffic? When the firewall evaluates a packet for acceptance or rejection, many rules may be used. However, they are not evaluated in a random order, but sequentially, and you can use this knowledge to help you trace conditions that may be causing firewall misconfiguration. Order of evaluation is indicated on some screens by the index number (listed order on the screen) of a rule. Start by testing the configurations on the top of the page, and work your way down until all configurations have been tested. For example, a rule/policy with an index of 1 will be evaluated before a rule/policy with an index of 5, and should be tested first. Q: Why can t ALL hosts (computers and devices) behind the firewall reach the Internet? This is usually a routing problem. The traceroute facility can be very useful in debugging routing problems. Check for these problems: Are the hosts that can t reach the Internet on a different network subnet from the fi rewall? Have you added a static route on the fi rewall to tell it which router is used to reach the Internet? Have you set the router s default route to be the fi rewall? Have you set the default route for hosts on the problem network to be the router or fi rewall? Is the wrong IP address assigned to the hosts or fi rewall? All network interfaces on the fi rewall must be on different logical networks. Is the default route incorrectly assigned? The default route should always be on the same subnet as the network interface of the host (this is true for all hosts, not just the fi rewall). For a fi rewall, the default route must be an IP address on the network which is attached to the network interface. Note When using PPP, PPTP or PPPoE, the default route is not necessarily on the same subnet. The route is assigned by your PPP provider. Q: Why can t ONE host (computers and devices) behind the firewall reach the Internet? This may indicate that the default route is assigned incorrectly (or not at all) to hosts on the protected or Private Service Networks. All hosts protected by the firewall must use the IP address of the firewall s network interface for the respective network. Hosts that reside behind routers or other gateways on these networks generally use the IP address of the gateway or router instead. 170 Chapter 6: Troubleshooting

171 Q: I can t access a tunnel that I have created. Why? There are a few key points to remember about tunnels: GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide You cannot access a tunnel from the protected network, since you can access the host directly (use the real IP address of the host). The source side of the tunnel must use an interface or alias that is on the external network for tunnels from the external network to the PSN or to the protected network. The source side of the tunnel must use an interface or alias that is on the Private Service Network for tunnels from the PSN to the protected network. You must have a inbound security policy that allows access to the tunnel from the host in question. A tunnel that has no inbound security policy, or an improperly confi gured policy assigned to it, will generate a blocked packet message to the log file. Policies can be defi ned by using the tunnel s automatic policies, located under the Advanced tab, or by manually creating inbound security policies. Ensure that your tunnel is active. Check the Monitor section to verify that both your tunnel and remote access policies are active. Check the log messages for policy blocks when a remote host attempts to access the tunnel. If you see a block message, your remote access policy is most likely not confi gured correctly. If no block message appears, check the host that is specifi ed as the target in the tunnel defi nition. The target host should have a default route confi gured, with the service in question running on the specifi ed port. From the target host try to ping the remote host. Q: Why can t I see or ping the protected network interface? You may have the wrong cable for your connection. For a direct connection (GTA Firewall to host or router) you need a crossover cable. For a connection to a hub or switch you need a straight-through cable. A yellow crossover cable and grey straight-through cable may be included with hardware appliances. Note Distinguish between crossover cables and straight-through cables by comparing the connection ends. On a straight-through cable, the wire order matches; on a crossover cable: pins 1->3, 2->6, 3->1, 6->2. Also check that your computer belongs to the same subnet as the IP address of the protected network interface. Q: How do I bypass NAT, allowing no-nat routing to an IP address on the internal network? NAT is applied by default, using connection state tracking to hide and protect internal IP addresses from the external network. In some cases, it is desirable to bypass NAT and make an internal host s IP address visible to the external network. To bypass NAT, use pass through. Chapter 6: Troubleshooting 171

172 Pass through connections require two main configuration aspects on the firewall: Hosts/Networks to defi ne groups of hosts that may bypass NAT Policies to specify conditions (such as specifi c ports or times) pass through hosts/networks connections must satisfy to be accepted Note that pass through hosts must have an externally routable IP address; internal (RFC 1918) IP addresses (e.g ) cannot be used with pass through, because they do not have valid routes. Additionally, some paths may need to be added to external routers, indicating the firewall s external interface as the gateway for the pass through hosts/networks. Because pass through bypasses NAT, its policies are bidirectional: they can allow both inbound and outbound connections from pass through hosts/networks. An outbound policy is not necessary. Q: I get a bridging loop error message when I am in bridging mode. A bridging loop message indicates a physical loop in the network cabling. Feb 2 02:04:30 pri=4 msg= Bridging loop (13) 00:00:5e:00:01:60->01:00:5e:00:00:12 eth1->eth0 (muted) src= dst= Check physical wiring of hubs and switches to be sure there are no crossed wires. Bridged networks must be physically isolated. Q: My Microsoft Exchange server located on the PSN can t find the PDC (Primary Domain Controller) on the protected network. Why? Normally, NetBIOS locates the primary domain controller (PDC) and other peer hosts by using broadcast packets. Since the firewall blocks all broadcast packets, another method of locating the PDC needs to be used. The solution is to use an LMHOST file and add an entry for the PDC providing a conduit for NetBIOS traffic to the PDC via a tunnel and allow access via remote access policies. 1. Create a LMHOST fi le and insert an entry for the PDC. This entry will use the PDC s NetBIOS name, the NetBIOS domain name, and the PSN interface IP address where the tunnel will be created. 2. Create three tunnels from the PSN interface to the PDC for NetBIOS services. UDP NetBIOS name resolution UDP NetBIOS datagrams TCP NetBIOS data transfer 3. Create three remote access policies that allow the MS Exchange server on the PSN to access the three tunnels you created in step Reboot the Microsoft Exchange server. Services and Options Q: IPS policies cannot be configured. Why? 172 Chapter 6: Troubleshooting

173 If IPS settings are initially configured using the IPS Setup Wizard, the IPS Proxy will persistently use settings defined by the wizard. As a result, settings in the IPS policies screen will be locked. To unlock settings defined by the IPS Setup Wizard and to manually configure IPS policies, navigate to Configure>Threat Management>IPS>Proxy and disable the PERSISTENT checkbox in the WIZARD SETTINGS section. Q: I enabled Mail Proxy options. Why did the firewall automatically disable them? Mail Proxy Anti-Spam and Anti-Virus require Internet access over TCP port 443 (SSL) in order to authorize and update from GTA servers. If Mail Proxy cannot access GTA servers (*.gta.com) on TCP port 443, or if there is no DNS Proxy or Service enabled, then the proxy may wait for the option authentication that it cannot get; if the SSL connection times out, the proxy will disable Mail Proxy options and continue processing according to standard policy rules. The proxy will then log that it has disabled the options, and will periodically check for Internet SSL connection restoration. If the connection is restored and activation codes are valid, the proxy automatically re-enables those options that were automatically disabled. To correct this problem, check that your network allows SSL connections to the Internet over an external network interface (no routing rules may deny port 443). Use ping and traceroute to verify connectivity to the Internet, including gta.com and its sub-domains, and check all routers that may block Internet SSL access. Q: My quarantine does not work. Why? An quarantine object must be an address object that contains only a single address such as -quarantine@gta.com. It is not valid to enter only the domain name of your server; your quarantine object must have a full address that contains an account as well as a domain name. Use of wild card (regular expression) characters is also not allowed. If you wish to use multiple addresses as quarantines in different firewall configuration areas, you should create one quarantine address object per quarantine address. For example, if you wish to separate suspect spam and virus , you might create address objects named Suspect Quarantine (containing suspect-quarantine@gta.com) and Virus Quarantine (containing virusquarantine@gta.com). Q: Mail Proxy rejects too little . Why? First check that your proxy policies reject those domains or IP address ranges that are known spam servers. Remember that proxy policies evaluate in the order they are listed. Make sure that Chapter 6: Troubleshooting 173

174 an all-accepting policy is listed underneath those exclusion policies to ensure that every is not accepted before being tested for a spam domain. Check the specific policy that you expected the to match for configuration errors that may cause failed matches. Correct configuration errors in any policies before they may cause a premature match. To rule out either Anti-Spam or Anti-Virus options as a source of the problem, uncheck all of the ENABLE check boxes in the Anti-Spam and Anti-Virus sections of your proxy s access control lists (policies). When you re-enable Anti-Spam and Anti-Virus in each policy, be sure to do it one at a time so you can narrow down the source of the misconfiguration. Note The Mail Proxy System Activity report can provide useful diagnostic information to determine whether Mail Proxy options are causing rejection. Indicating a large maximum file size in either the TO BLOCK or Anti-Virus sections of your proxy policy will allow larger through. To limit the size of that your firewall accepts for transmission, reduce the maximum file size to a small, non-zero number. Be sure to allow external Internet access from your firewall to the Internet. Mail Proxy uses various servers to keep its options up-to-date; if you have routing rules preventing this access, your options may lapse or use old spam and virus definitions, allowing newer spam and viruses through. Note A maximum size of zero does not mean that only zero-sized will be considered; instead, it means that the size limit consideration has been removed from the policy. If you notice that some spam is still not being caught by Anti-Spam, consider adjusting your Anti- Spam threshold or greylisting options to a more aggressive setting. You might also choose to restrict Suspect category as well as Confirmed category . Additional use of a MAPS (a kind of realtime black list, or RBL) can also help. Q: Mail Proxy rejects too much . Why? When the firewall evaluates a packet for acceptance or rejection, many rules may be used. It is important to check other rules such as routing rules before investigating Mail Proxy policy rules. 174 Chapter 6: Troubleshooting

175 Remember that proxy policies evaluate in the order they are listed. Make sure that any white list policies are listed above any black list policies to ensure that all is not rejected before being tested for a known-good address. To rule out Mail Proxy options as a source of the problem, un-check the ENABLE check box in the ANTI- SPAM and ANTI-VIRUS headings of your proxy s access control lists (policies). When you re-enable Anti-Spam and Anti-Virus, be sure to do it one at a time so you can narrow down the source of the misconfiguration. Note The Mail Proxy System Activity report can provide useful diagnostic information to determine whether options or other policy rules are causing rejection. Indicating a small maximum file size is also a common cause for rejected . Indicating a low threshold for the Anti-Spam categories can also be a common cause. Q: Mail Proxy rejects all . Why? If your firewall rejects all , first check to see that TCP ports (especially the standard SMTP port 25) have not been filtered out in other policies, and that your proxy is enabled. If your firewall accepts port 25 connections but still rejects all , check your proxy s policy settings. If your policies are set to reject fitting your rules and all matches your rules, all will be rejected. Make sure you have at least one proxy policy set to accept ; denial-type policies or an absence of policies will cause to be rejected. Note The Mail Proxy activity reports (Monitor>Activity>Threat Management>Mail Proxy) can provide useful diagnostic information to determine whether Mail Proxy options or other policy rules are causing rejection. Additionally, if all servers are listed on your MAPS, all could be rejected. Hardware Q: Why are the interface s green LEDs not lighting up? Chapter 6: Troubleshooting 175

176 This indicates that you do not have network connectivity. Make sure all cables are functional, the firewall is powered on, and the connected computers are correctly configured. You may have selected the wrong network connection type. Check under the ADVANCED tab in Configure>Network>Interfaces>Settings to ensure the appropriate connection type is selected. If you have selected one of the specific settings, try resetting to Auto, the factory setting. Q: I get an alarm: Interface down message. Other An interface down error message indicates that an interface has dropped. Feb 2 13:44:18 pri=4 msg= alarm: Interface EXTERNAL (rl1) down type=mgmt This could be caused by a loose or disconnected cable or disconnected Internet service. Q: I get errors when using GBAuth. What do they mean? GBAuth requires use of remote access policies, users, SSL certificates, and authorization services on your firewall. GBAuth and Java Runtime Environment 1.4 are also required to be installed on the client computer. If any of these are set up improperly, if your password or other entry was incorrect, or if you are using an older version of GBAuth, errors may be generated. RMCAuth: Command authloginget (400) rejected, incorrect size errors may be caused by using an older version of GBAuth. This error is logged on the firewall as well as displayed on the GBAuth client. To correct this error, upgrade to GBAuth IOException errors generally refer to inability to form a network connection (e.g. incorrect remote access policies cause traffic denial by the firewall and the connection times out, or incorrect Firewall field entry) or problems with the SSL certificate (e.g. the computer and firewall have out-of-sync clocks so that according to the computer s clock, the SSL certificate has not yet become valid). Verify your remote access policies, network connections and your computer s clock. If you have repeated java.security.cert.certificateexception: Certificate not yet valid. problems with SSL certificates due to your computer s or firewall s clock, you may wish to use an NTP service such as the firewall s Network Time Service to keep its clock correct. Q: AOL Web access is blocked when I use Content Filtering. How do I allow it? AOL uses pr.atwola.com, an advertisement server, to redirect to Webmail.aol.com. If Web Filtering is set to block the Advertisement category, access to pr.atwola.com will be blocked, and Webmail.aol.com will never be reached. To allow AOL Web access, first create an address object of type Content Filtering that contains pr.atwola.com. Next, create a Content Filtering policy that uses the address object as the local allow list. AOL Web should now be accessible. Automatic Backup Q: I get an error message Hardware does not support USB devices. 176 Chapter 6: Troubleshooting

177 Confirm hardware USB ports are properly functioning and enabled. GB-250 Rev A devices do not support USB devices. Q: Firewall shows as not licensed for Cloud backup. Confirm that DNS is configured. Confirm valid support or maintenance contract. Cloud backup and restore requires a valid support or mainenance contract. Chapter 6: Troubleshooting 177

178 A User Interface 178

179 Reference A: User Interface GB-OS introduces an updated user interface with this release. Used as the primary interface, it includes comprehensive administrative access and user-friendly hints. A second interface, the console, is primarily a fail-safe. It is used for resetting a misconfigured firewall to default, recovering a GTA firewall and for basic configuration. The console interface has limited functionality. Note See the Console Interface User s Guide for additional information on using the Console interface. In this reference, the Web interface is illustrated and described, including navigation, tool bars, menu items and buttons. For configuration, use the setup chapters of this user s guide. Web Interface The Web interface is platform-independent and can be used on any frames-capable, Javascript-enabled browser such as Internet Explorer, Apple Safari or Mozilla Firefox running on platforms such as Windows, Mac and Unix. Figure A.1: The Web Interface Reference A: User Interface 179

180 Features SSL Encryption Option Secure administration from any location connected to the Internet Intuitive browser-based user interface Platform-independent, compatible with most browsers and platforms Immediate modification as changes are saved to the firewall Live Mode and Test Mode configurations Web Interface Access By default, the firewall s Web server operates on the standard SSL-encrypted port 443. Characteristics Changes take place immediately upon saving when operating in Live Mode Re-sizing the browser window will change the size of the main screen Password authorization is persistent for a session The firewall contains a built-in Web server that only serves the firewall s remote administration Web pages; it cannot be used for other purposes The factory default user ID and password are both fwadmin How to Access the Web Interface To access the Web interface, start a JavaScript-enabled, frames-capable Web browser. Enter the IP address or host name of the firewall s protected network interface as a URL in the address/ location field (e.g. If your computer does not have an IP address on the same logical network as the firewall s protected network interface, you will need to adjust the remote access policy that controls access. CAUTION Firewall login persists until the user quits the browser application. To prevent unauthorized access, remember to quit the browser application. 180 Reference A: User Interface

181 Navigation and Data Entry GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide The Web interface uses HTML frames to subdivide the browser s display. The main parts of the Web interface screen are: Menu: Provides access to all command functions. Main Window: Work area where data is entered and displayed. Hints: Brief explanations of the functions of the section being worked on. Menu The menu is the main navigation tool, and is displayed on the left side of the browser window. There are four main categories within the menu: Wizards: Contains setup wizards. Configure: Contains settings and options for configuring the GTA Firewall UTM Appliance. Monitor: Contains an overview based on the GTA Firewall UTM Appliance s log files. SSL: Contains the set up for the SSL Browser. Support: Contains helpful links and documentation. Each category is divided into sections. When selected, sections expand to reveal items in a functional area. Click on functions within the sections to display their configuration screen. While optional features will appear within sections on your GTA Firewall UTM Appliance, they will not be functional until a valid activation code has been entered. Figure A.2: Menu Categories Verification Icons The menu is dynamically updated to display the verification status of a configuration area. Icon states move up through the menu tree. Errors take precedence over warnings, and warnings take precedence over verified settings. Thus, menus that contain configuration screens with both errors and warnings will be identified with an error icon. Button Value Description Default Settings Verified Warning Error Table A.1: Verification Icons Menu items with a grey icon are either using default settings or cannot be confi gured (such as Summary display screens, which do not contain confi guration options). Menu items with a green icon have been verifi ed to be confi gured correctly and should not confl ict with the firewall s confi guration. Menu items with a yellow icon may be confi gured incorrectly and can confl ict with the fi rewall s confi guration. Menu items with a red icon are verifi ed to be confi gured incorrectly and can confl ict with the fi rewall s confi guration. Reference A: User Interface 181

182 Main Window The main window displays screens selected from the menu located along the left hand side of the screen. The main window can be broken down into three sections: 1. Control Bar: Contains screen buttons that vary depending on the nature of the display. 2. Display Screen: The main work area where data is entered and displayed. 3. Hints: Displays a brief summary of the nature of the display screen. By clicking the LIVE or TEST tab you can change the firewall s configuration mode. When the firewall is operating in Test Mode, the background behind the Hints area will change to a construction theme. The hints area can be hidden to maximize workspace by clicking the arrow in HINTS tab. When the hints area is hidden, clicking either tab will make the hints area reappear. Advanced Tab Figure A.3: Main Window Displaying the Control Bar (Red), Display Screen (Green) and Hints (Blue) The ADVANCED tab allows for the configuration of additional settings that are generally not required for basic configuration. By default, advanced configuration settings are hidden by the ADVANCED tab. To reveal advanced configuration settings, click the ADVANCED tab. Figure A.4: Advanced Tab Note For information on settings available under advanced tabs, please refer to Advanced Setup Tasks and Reference B: System Parameters. 182 Reference A: User Interface

183 Buttons and Icons Screen Buttons Screen buttons, located along the top of the Web interface, allow the user to navigate, manipulate data and display information. Not all buttons are always displayed, they only appear when they pertain to the data being displayed. Table A.2: Screen Buttons Button Value Description Back Goes back to the previous screen or sorts backwards through IPS policy rows. Copy Default Delete Add Duplicate Edit Filter Forward New OK Paste Print Refresh Reset Save Sort Sync Copies the selected list entry to memory. Uses default values for a list or confi guration screen. Deletes the selected items. Adds a new row in the network settings, address objects, service groups, time groups, account groups, DHCP static leases, DNS hosts and DNS subnet sections. Duplicates the selected list item. Allows editing of the selected list item. Filters displayed list items according to specifi c criteria. Sorts forwards through IPS policy rows Creates a new list item or object. Applies changes to the modifi ed list entry. Pastes a copied list entry from memory. Prints the displayed screen. Refreshes the displayed screen. Resets the confi guration screen to initial values. Saves the section and applies it to the fi rewall s confi guration. Re-sorts the index order. Synchronizes confi guration section from Live mode to Test mode. Only available in Test mode. Reference A: User Interface 183

184 List Icons List icons, which are always the left most object in a table s row, provide quick at-a-glance information regarding the line item. Button Value Description General List Icons Locked Table A.3: List Icons Indicates that the list entry is built-in and cannot be modified. To edit a locked list entry, select the DUPLICATE button to duplicate the item s confi guration in to a new object or policy., Edit Indicates that the list entry is editable. If the icon is greyed out, then the list item has been disabled. Configure>Accounts, Admin Status, User Status Indicates the status of the confi gured administrator account. If the icon is greyed out, then the administrator account has been disabled. Indicates the status of the confi gured user account. If the icon is greyed out, then the user account has been disabled., Groups Indicates the status of the confi gured group. If the icon is greyed out, then the group has been disabled. Download Select to download the user confi guration and policies. Configure>Network>Interfaces>Settings, Interface Status Indicates the status of the confi gured logical interface. A green, upwards pointing arrow means the interface is up, while a red, downwards pointing arrow means the interface is down. Configure>Security Policies / Configure>Threat Management>IPS>Policies, Accept Indicates the status of the confi gured policy of type accept. If the icon is greyed out, then the policy has been disabled., Deny Indicates the status of the confi gured policy of type deny. If the icon is greyed out, then the policy has been disabled. Flags Flags are displayed along the top of the Web interface when the configuration screen contains an error, a warning or if the screen s Test mode settings differ from the screen s Live mode settings. Table A.4: Flags Button Value Description Warning Indicates a verifi cation warning. The fl ag is hyperlinked to the confi guration screen s verifi cation section in Configure>Verify. Error Test mode Indicates a verifi cation error. The fl ag is hyperlinked to the confi guration screen s verifi cation section in Configure>Verify. Indicates that the confi guration screen s Test mode settings differ from the screen s Live mode settings. The fl ag is hyperlinked to Configure>Configuration>Apply. 184 Reference A: User Interface

185 Index Numbers GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide Index numbers are used in lists. In some instances they are editable, allowing the data to be resorted based on importance. For instance, since policies are evaluated in sequential order, sorting the order affects their primacy. To sort editable index numbers, simply enter new values corresponding to the order you wish to sort the table rows and click SORT or save the configuration screen to update the listing. Figure A.4: Index Numbers Note Sorting will not take effect until the section has been saved. Text Fields Text fields allow the user to enter data by typing. Pull Down Menus Values available in pull down menus vary by the configuration screen in which they are found. Click on the downward pointing arrow to open a pull down menu, then click on an item to select it. An item labeled as <* EDIT *> will allow for the configuration of a new configuration object. An item labeled with three question marks, <???>, indicates an unknown value. Fields with a value of <???> require information in order to be used in the configuration being attempted. Figure A.5: Pull Down Menus Reference A: User Interface 185

186 System Overview Screen The Overview screen, initially displayed after successfully logging on to a configured firewall, displays a snapshot of the firewall s current status. Displayed data includes the current state of the firewall s interfaces, CPU and memory usage, traffic flow, and more. The Overview screen can be accessed by clicking next to the GTA logo at top of the Web interface, which acts as a shortcut. Additionally, the Overview screen can also be viewed by navigating to Monitor>System>Overview. When working in Live mode, EDIT buttons will be available next to editable fields. When working in Test mode, the Overview screen will only display configuration data and will not be editable. Figure A.5: System Overview Shortcut At the top of the Overview screen, the REFRESH button also includes a drop down menu to select a time frame for which the page will automatically refresh. Available time fields are: Off, 30 seconds, 1 minute, 5 minutes and 10 minutes. Figure A.6: Refresh Button The Overview screen displays the following containers: AUDIT EVENTS contains a log of activity performed by administrators to the firewall s configuration. VERIFICATION displays the number of verification warnings and errors in the GB-OS configuration. RUNTIME displays the GB-OS version the GTA Firewall UTM Appliance is running, the current slice, whether updates are available and the last update check. If a runtime update has been downloaded, but not yet installed, the update status will be displayed here. SYSTEM displays basic information regarding the firewall s configuration, such as the firewall administrator, host name, product, license, serial number, date/time and firewall uptime. HISTORICAL STATISTICS displays graphical information representing past activity. Categories include CPU Usage, Memory Usage and Security Associations. By placing the mouse over each graph, a larger graph will display. Clicking on any of the graphs will open the Historical Statistics screen. ACTIVATION CODES displays all entered activation codes. INTERFACES provides a summary view of the firewall s logical interfaces and their status (up or down). SYSTEM RESOURCES gives an overview of the firewall s CPU usage, memory usage and security associates. The enabled/disabled status of the High Availability feature with total user licences and feature licenses shown as percentage used. The GTA SSL Browser and Client, and IPSec/ L2TP/PPTP licenses percentage used are also displayed. NETWORK TRAFFIC shows the amount of denied packets from policy blocks, the number of active connections to the firewall as well as current and peak bandwidth usage. CONTRACTS displays current contracts and licenses for GB-OS, Mail Proxy Anti-Spam, Anti- Virus, IPS, Web Filtering, and support contracts. The date/time of the last update check is also displayed. ANTI-SPAM displays information on Anti-Spam activity. If this feature has not been activated and configured, no data will be displayed. ANTI-VIRUS provides a summary on Anti-Virus activity. If this feature has not been activated and configured, no data will be displayed. WEB FILTERING displays information on Web Filtering activity. If this feature has not been activated and configured, no data will be displayed. IPS displays the rule set used by the IPS proxy. CURRENT ADMINISTRATORS displays a list of administrators currently logged in to GB-OS. 186 Reference A: User Interface

187 Figure A.7: System Overview Reference A: User Interface 187

188 B Parameters System 188

189 Reference B: System Parameters This section describes the input type, range and general results of each field in the firewall configuration. It is most useful for network engineers who are already familiar with networking terminology but wish to know the exact specifications of a configuration option. How to find your section: For rapid lookups on a particular configuration section or field, this reference contains sections indexed by a number formatted as x.y.z where: x: Menu button s number y: Menu tree item s number within the button area z: Menu tree sub-item s number within the parent section As shown in this example, a configuration section located in the second section, second tree item and fifth tree sub-item would be indexed as Import/Export. Tables within a reference section contain field details from the configuration section. Entries are in order from top- and left-most positions on the screen. Groups of fields that are labeled areas will be titled by their label. Fields listed under an ADVANCED tab will be labeled as such. Note that not all areas may not be immediately visible, as they may be hidden under an ADVANCED tab. Reference B: System Parameters 189

190 2. Configure The Configure section provides access to manual configuration options. This area may be especially useful to network engineers who are designing more complex configurations as it allows for total customization. 2.1 Verify The Verify sub-section allows the user to verify their configuration. Verification points out potential problems with the firewall s configuration. Containers and sub-containers can be expanded or collapsed to navigate through displayed data. CAUTION Verifi cation may not catch all errors in the confi guration. GTA recommends that administrators always check their confi guration to ensure that no potential security issues are present. Note GTA recommends that verifi cation should always be performed before applying a Test Mode confi guration to a Live Mode confi guration. This prevents errors in the Test Mode s confi guration from being applied to network traffi c. 2.2 Configuration The Configuration section allows the user to toggle between Live and Test configuration modes, verify or apply configurations, change the active slice and import or export saved configurations Summary The Summary sub-section provides on overview of the current firewall mode s configuration settings. Links to containers pertaining to specific sections of the firewall s configuration are provided along the top of the screen. Containers and sub-containers can be expanded or collapsed to navigate through displayed data Apply The Apply sub-section allows the user to apply their Test Mode configuration to the firewall to make it Live, as well as copy their Live Mode configuration to the Test Mode configuration. Table 2.2.2: Configure > Configuration > Apply Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Apply Test Configuration Copy Live Configuration Radio Button Enabled/Disabled A toggle to apply the test confi guration to the fi rewall, making it Live. Radio Button Enabled/Disabled A toggle to copy the Live mode confi guration to the Test mode confi guration. This option is only available when GB-OS is in Test mode. Default is selected. Reset Configuration Radio Button Enabled/Disabled A toggle to reset the Test mode confi guration to factory defaults. This option is only available when GB-OS is in Test mode. 190 Reference B: System Parameters

191 2.2.3 Backup GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide The Backup sub-section provides automatic backup settings and access to backups on the GTA Cloud Server. Table 2.2.3: Configure > Configuration > Backup Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Automatic Backup Format Pulldown XML, 7-Zip, Zip The format for the confi guration. Password Text Up to 255 characters Enter the password for the confi guration fi le. Maximum Backup Count Pulldown 50, 100 The format for the confi guration. Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enable the ing of automatic backups created when changes/modifi cations during live mode are saved. From Text Up to 255 characters Enter the address from which the backup confi gurations will be sent. To Text Up to 255 characters The address to which backup confi gurations will be sent. Cloud Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enable cloud storage. Service Pulldown Dropbox, Box.net Select the Cloud service to be used for automatic backups. Account Name n/a n/a Login user name for Cloud service. n/a n/a Login for cloud service. Storage Total n/a n/a Displays total size of connected USB device. Usage n/a n/a Displays total usage of connected USB device Available Backups Upload/Restore Button Restore Backups available on the GTA Cloud Server. Click Restore to restore to the selected backup. Download Button Download Click Download to save the selected backup to the host machine, without restoring to the fi rewall. Delete Button Delete Click Delete to delete to the selected backup. USB Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enable USB device backup storage. Available Backups Upload/Restore Button Restore Backups available on the attached USB device. Click Restore to restore to the selected backup. Download Button Download Click Download to save the selected backup to the host machine, without restoring to the fi rewall. Delete Button Delete Click Delete to delete to the selected backup. Reference B: System Parameters 191

192 2.2.4 Change Mode The Change Mode sub-section allows the user to toggle between Live Mode and Test Mode configuration modes. Live Mode is useful for immediately applying a configuration change to the firewall. Test Mode is useful for modifying and verifying a new configuration for correctness and adherence to your security policy before applying it. Table 2.2.4: Configure > Configuration > Change Mode Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Live Mode Test Mode Import/Export Radio Button Radio Button Enabled/Disabled Enabled/Disabled A toggle to set the fi rewall s confi guration mode to Live Mode. A toggle to set the fi rewall s confi guration mode to Test Mode. The Import/Export sub-section allows the user to back up their configuration, upload a partially updated back up configuration or a complete back up configuration. Import/Export settings are only available when the firewall is operating in Live Mode. Table 2.2.5: Configure > Configuration > Import/Export Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Configuration Mode: Live Mode: Test Radio Button Radio Button Enabled/Disabled Enabled/Disabled A toggle to set the fi rewall to Live confi guration mode. Default is selected. A toggle to set the fi rewall to Test confi guration mode. Default is unselected. File Text n/a File name of the confi guration fi le. Browse Button n/a Opens a window to select the confi guration fi le. Import Button n/a Imports the selected confi guration fi le. Partial Update Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Partially updates the fi rewall s confi guration if the confi guration fi le contains partial, selective confi guration changes. Default is unselected. Preserve Section Activation Codes Toggle Enabled/Disabled Preserves correct serial numbers and activation codes when importing confi gurations. Export Button n/a Downloads the selected confi guration. Format Drop Down XML, 7-Zip, Zip File format Runtime The Runtime section contains options to change the firewall s active slice as well as the ability to update the firewall s runtime and schedule automatic updates Options The Options sub-section allows the user to select the memory section of the firewall s flash memory to be used when configuring the firewall. The firewall s flash memory is in two sections ( slices ); one contains the current software version plus any saved configuration, the other contains the previous software version and configuration. CAUTION Changing the active slice will cause the fi rewall to reboot. 192 Reference B: System Parameters

193 Table : Configure > Configuration > Runtime > Options Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Runtime Slice Current Slice Radio Button Enabled/Disabled The current runtime slice used by the firewall. Default is selected. Alternate Slice Radio Button Enabled/Disabled A toggle to change to the alternate runtime slice. Console Mode Video Radio Button Enabled/Disabled A toggle to defi ne Video for the Console Mode. Serial Radio Button Enabled/Disabled A toggle to defi ne Serial for the Console Mode. Advanced Update MBR Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle to enable an update of MBR. Default is selected Update The Update sub-section allows the user to schedule checks for available updates to GB-OS and to update the firewall s runtime by either applying an automatically downloaded runtime or by importing a new runtime manually. CAUTION Updating the fi rewall s runtime will cause the fi rewall to reboot. Note Settings for updating the fi rewall s runtime are only available in Live Mode. Table : Configure > Configuration > Runtime > Update Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Current Version n/a n/a The current version of GB-OS installed. Last Update Check n/a n/a The last time a check for an available update was performed. Available Updates Check Now Button n/a Checks for available updates. Download Button n/a Downloads available updates. Install Button n/a Installs available updates. Option only available after available updates have been downloaded. Schedule Update Check Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle to enable scheduling to check for updates. Default is unselected. Frequency Pulldown <Daily>, <Weekly> A selection for the frequency of checks for available updates. Day Pulldown <Sunday> - <Saturday> A selection for the day the check for available updates should be performed. This fi eld is only available when the Frequency pulldown is set to <Weekly>. Time Pulldowns <00> - <24>, <00> - <50> A selection for the time the check for available updates should be performed. Advanced File Text n/a File location of the runtime fi le. Import Button n/a Uploads the selected runtime fi le. Reference B: System Parameters 193

194 2.3 System The System section contains the Objects, which allows the user to configure address, encryption objects, service group objects, time group objects and IPSec Objects Summary The Summary sub-section provides on overview of the current firewall mode s configuration settings found in the System section. Links to containers pertaining to specific sections of the firewall s configuration are provided along the top of the screen. Containers and sub-containers can be expanded or collapsed to navigate through displayed data Information The Information sub-section displays an overview of the current firewall mode s functionality. Editable fields can be edited by selecting the EDIT icon. The display is static; if you wish to update the list, click the REFRESH icon Activation Codes The Activation Codes sub-section allows the entry of the firewall s serial number and activation codes that unlock additional firewall features. Activation codes can be found on the card that shipped with your firewall or in the GTA Online Support Center. Selecting the NEW icon allows for entry of new activation codes. Table 2.3.3: Configure > System > Activation Codes Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Serial Number Text Up to 8 characters The fi rewall s serial number. Activation Code Text Up to 35 characters The product activation code Contact Information The Contact Information sub-section allows for the entry of the firewall administrator s contact information. Table 2.3.4: Configure > System > Contact Information Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Administrator Name Text Up to 119 characters The fi rewall administrator s name. Company Text Up to 119 characters The fi rewall administrator s company. Address Text Up to 119 characters The fi rewall administrator s address. Phone Number Text Up to 119 characters The fi rewall administrator s phone number. Country Pulldown n/a The fi rewall administrator s country. State/Region Text Up to 119 characters The fi rewall administrator s state or region. City/Locality Text Up to 119 characters The fi rewall administrator s city. Advanced Support Address Text Up to 119 characters The address for the fi rewall s support contact. Default is gbconfig@gta.com. 194 Reference B: System Parameters

195 2.3.5 Date/Time GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide The Date/Time sub-section allows the configuration of the firewall s local time and network time service. The network time service allows the administrator to synchronize the firewall and the computers behind it with an NTP server located on the Internet. Table a: Configure > System > Date/Time Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Date/Time Date (yyyy-mm-dd) Pulldown Up to 10 characters The local date, to be entered in YYYY-MM-DD format. For example, December 31st, 2008 would be entered as Time (hh-mm-ss) Pulldown Up to 8 characters The local time, to be entered in HH-MM-SS format. The fi eld uses the 24 hour time format. Time Zone Pulldown n/a Select to edit the fi rewall s local time zone. Default is UTC (Coordinated Universal Time). Network Time Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle to enable the network time service. Default is selected. Advanced Automatic Policies Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle to enable the fi rewall to generate an automatic set of policies to allow the network time service to function properly. Default is selected. Selecting the NEW icon allows for entry of a new network time server. Table b: Configure > System > Date/Time > Edit Network Time Server Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the network time server should be enabled or not. Default is unselected. Description Text Up to 79 characters A description of the network time server. Server Text Up to 79 characters The network time server s IP address or DNS resolvable host name. Advanced Peer Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether or not Peer should be used. Disabled by default. Key Text Up to 5 characters The key of the network time server, if any Notifications The Notifications section allows the firewall administrator to manage settings for all notifications. Table 2.3.6: Configure > System > Notifications Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the server should be enabled or not. From Text Up to 55 characters address that will appear in From fi eld. To Text Up to 55 characters address where notifications will be sent. Reference B: System Parameters 195

196 Table 2.3.6: Configure > System > Notifications SMS Enable Checkbox Enable/Disable A toggle for whether SMS should be enabled or not. From Text Up to 55 characters SMS messaging address from which notifications will be sent. To Text Up to 55 characters SMS messaging address where notifications will be sent. SNMP Trap Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether SNMP Traps should be enabled or not. Default is unselected. Manager Text Up to 55 characters Host IP address to receive SNMP trap messages. Type Pulldown SNMPv1 Trap, SNMPv2c Trap, SNMPv2 c Inform Selects the SNMP Trap version. Advanced Binding Interface Pulldown <AUTOMATIC>, all defi ned interfaces, all defined aliases, all defined VLANs Notifications Alarms Checkboxes Enable/Disable: , SMS, SNMP Trap Gateway Failover Checkboxes Enable/Disable: , SMS High Availability Checkboxes Enable/Disable: , SMS IPSec Tunnels Checkboxes Enable/Disable: , SMS, SNMP Trap License Checkboxes Enable/Disable: , SMS Lockout Checkboxes Enable/Disable: , SMS Runtime Updates Checkboxes Enable/Disable: , SMS Security Policies Checkboxes Enable/Disable: , SMS, SNMP Trap Advanced Alarms Threshold for Generating Address from which SNMP traps are sourced. Default is <AUTOMATIC>. Enable to send an alarm notifi cation when Alarm threshold is met. Enable to send a notifi cation when the Gateway fail over event occurs. Enable to send a notifi cation when HA state change occurs. Enable to send a notifi cation with IPSec Tunnel changes and events. Enable to send a notifi cation when License changes occur. Enable to send a notifi cation when Login failure occurs for specifi ed number of times. Enable to send a notifi cation an update to the runtime is ready. Enable to send a notifi cation when a security policy is matched and /sms/snmp is confi gured on the alarm. Text Up to 5 characters Number of alarms above which a notifi cation is sent. Default is 50. Threshold Interval Text Up to 5 characters Length of time after which to send alarms. Default is 120. Maximum Alarms Per Attempt to Log Host Names Text Up to 5 characters Maximum number of alarms per sent. Default is 500. Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether an attempt should be made to resolve the host name of the IP address that generated the alarm or not. Default is unselected. 196 Reference B: System Parameters

197 2.4 Accounts GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide The Accounts section allows the administrator to edit, delete and create new administrator or user accounts, assign them to groups, configure authentication and customize preferences Summary The Summary sub-section provides an overview of the current firewall mode s configuration settings found in the System section. Links to containers pertaining to specific sections of the firewall s configuration are provided along the top of the screen. Containers and sub-containers can be expanded or collapsed to navigate through displayed data Authentication The Authentication sub-section allows the administrator to require users to authenticate using GBAuth before initiating a connection to or through the firewall. Table 2.4.2: Configure > Accounts > Authentication Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether authentication should be used or not. Must be enabled if LDAPv3 or RADIUS authentication is to be used. Default is unselected. Advanced Automatic Policies Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle to enable the fi rewall to generate an automatic set of policies to allow confi gured authentication settings to function properly. Default is selected. Service Port Text Up to 5 characters The service port used. The default port for GTA Authentication is 76. Valid Text Up to 5 characters The valid duration for an authenticated user (in minutes). If using one-time passwords, this should be a high value. Send Keep Alives Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for selecting whether or not keep alives are sent. FIPS Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Applies FIPS compliant algorithms for authentication. LDAPv3 Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the LDAPv3 authentication should be used or not. Default is unselected. Server Text Up to 79 characters Server IP address or host name and port number of the LDAP server. The service port number defaults to 389. To enter a specifi c port number, use the format ldap.example.com:398. Use SSL Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether SSL should be used or not. Default is unselected. Base DN Text Up to 127 characters Root distinguished name on the LDAP server. Group Field Text Up to 127 characters Advanced Automatically Add Groups Use Full Group Name The group name field where group names are stored on the LDAP server. Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether groups will be added automatically. Default is unselected. Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the entire group name should be returned or not. Default is unselected. Binding Interface Pulldown <AUTOMATIC>, all defi ned interfaces and aliases A selection for the binding interface to be used. Reference B: System Parameters 197

198 Table 2.4.2: Configure > Accounts > Authentication Timeout Text Up to 5 characters The amount of time, in seconds, that the GTA fi rewall will wait on results from an LDAP search. Default is 120. Bind Options Bind Method Pulldown User, Username Search, Anonymous User Bind String Text Up to 127 characters Select the method that the user will use to bind (authenticate) with the LDAP server. To bind with the user, select <User>; to bind anonymously, select <Anonymous>; to bind using the root distinguished name and password, select <Username Search>. Default is <User>. Enter the user name to bind with the user. This fi eld is only available if <User> is selected for the BIND METHOD. Append Base DN Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Select to have the value entered in the BASE DN string appended to the USER BIND STRING value. This fi eld is only available if <User> is selected for the BIND METHOD. Default is selected. Bind DN Text Up to 127 characters Password Text Up to 127 characters Enter the distinguished name used for searching the LDAP server. This fi eld is only available if <Username Search> is selected for the BIND METHOD. Enter the password of the bind DN. This fi eld is only available if <Username Search> is selected for the BIND METHOD. RADIUS Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the RADIUS authentication should be used or not. Default is unselected. Server Text Up to 79 characters Server IP address or host name and port number of the RADIUS server. The service port number defaults to To enter a specifi c port number, use the format radius.example.com:1812. Pre-shared Secret Text Up to 127 characters Advanced Binding Interface Pulldown <AUTOMATIC>, all defi ned interfaces and aliases NAS Identity Text Up to 127 characters Pre-shared secret as defi ned in the RADIUS service. Alphanumeric value. A selection for the binding interface to be used. Match the RADIUS server s expected identity for authentication requests. If this fi eld is empty, then it is the firewall s IP by default. NAS Channel Text Up to 5 characters Matches the RADIUS server s channel number. Only necessary if the RADIUS server distinguishes between its NAS ports (channels). NAS Channel Type Pulldown Async, Sync, ISDN Sync, ISDN Async v. 120, ISDN Async v.110, Virtual Active Directory Single Sign-On Matches the RADIUS server s connection type, namely a modem (async etc.) or TCP/IP (virtual) connection. 198 Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enables Single Sign-On authentication. AUTHENTICATION must be enabled to allow for Single Sign-On authentication. Server Text Up to 79 characters The server IP address or host name and port number of the Single Sign-On server used. The port number defaults to To enter a specifi c port number, use the format :8443. Certificate Pulldown All defi ned certifi cates. Reference B: System Parameters A selection of certifi cate the Active Directory Single Sign-On server will use.

199 Table 2.4.2: Configure > Accounts > Authentication Binding Interface Pulldown <AUTOMATIC>, all defi ned interfaces and aliases Groups A selection for the binding interface to be used. The Groups section allows the administrator to define a pool to group users. Additional groups can be combined in the GROUPS section to create a broader definition. Table 2.4.3: Configure > Accounts > Groups Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the group should be disabled or not. Default is unselected. Name Text Up to 19 characters A unique identifi er for the group. Description Text Up to 79 characters A description used to further identify the group. Administrator Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A selection for creating a group with Administrator privileges. Read Only Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A selection for creating a read-only Administrator group. Remote Access L2TP Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A selection for enabling L2TP remote access for the group. PPTP Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A selection for enabling PPTP remote access for the group. Mobile IPSec Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enables the group to access the fi rewall using the GTA Mobile VPN Client. Advanced Authentication Required Override Local Network Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether users associated with the group should require authentication or not. Default is unselected. Pulldown???, <USER DEFINED>, all defi ned address objects of type All or VPN, *EDIT * A selection for the local network that the user group will connect to. Select <USER DEFINED> to manually enter the network s IP address. Select <* EDIT *> to define a new local network. This will override configuration settings defi ned under Configure>VPN>Remote Access>IPSec. SSL Browser Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enables SSL browser access for the user group. Bookmarks Only Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Displays only Bookmarks for SSL Browser access. Read Only Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Read only access. Users can only download files via the browser. Bookmarks Pulldown All confi gured Displays the defi ned bookmarks for the group. bookmark objects Client Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Allows SSL Client access. Reference B: System Parameters 199

200 Groups Sub Group Pulldown <???>, all defi ned groups Table 2.4.3: Configure > Accounts > Groups A selection of groups to be pooled under the group being confi gured. <???> means no group has been selected. Description Text Up to 79 characters A description of the selected group Remote Administration The Remote Administration section allows the administrator to set account preferences such as remote administration and lockout. 200 Reference B: System Parameters Table 2.4.4: Configure > Accounts > Preferences Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Lockout Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether lockout should be enabled or not. Default is selected. Allowed Pulldown???, <USER DEFINED>, all available address objects, *EDIT * A selection for specifying a network (address object) as exempt from lockout. Advanced Threshold Text Up to 3 characters Number of tries a user can make from an IP address before that IP address is locked out. Default is 5. Duration Text Up to 5 characters The amount of time, in minutes and seconds, that an IP address is locked out. Default is 300. Remote Administration Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether remote administration should be enabled or not. Default is selected. Port Text Applicable port number Authentication The TCP port allowing Web administration. SSL encryption default is 443. LDAP Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enables LDAP users to administer the fi rewall. RADIUS Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enables RADIUS users to administer the fi rewall. Advanced Encryption Pulldown <SSL>, <None> The level of SSL encryption. Default is <SSL>,. FIPS Mode Checkbox Enable/Disable Enables FIPS mode for Remote Administration and the SSL Browser. If FIPS is enabled, the fi rewall MUST use SSL encryption. Default is disabled. Policy Compatibility Checkbox Enable/Disable Preserve previous remote administration settings for fi rewalls that do not properly upgrade to GB-OS and above. Disabling this option allows the web administration to send CAs imported on the fi rewall to a connecting client to assist in validating the authenticity of the remote administration certifi cate. Timeout Sessions Checkbox Enable/Disable A toggle for whether sessions should be timed out after a period of inactivity or not. Default is unselected. Valid range is 5 to 1440 minutes. Virtual Keyboard Pulldown Disable/Enable/ Require A selection for whether the virtual keyboard is used. Automatic Policies Enable Radio Button Enable/Disable A toggle for whether automatic policies should be disabled for remote administration or not. Default is unselected.

201 Table 2.4.4: Configure > Accounts > Preferences Zone Pulldown <Enable>, <Disable>, <Force Use> Source Address Pulldown???, <USER DEFINED>, all available networks, *EDIT * Specifi es the Zone which will be allowed to connect. Options are External, Protected, and PSN. Specifi es the source address allowed to connect. Customization Login Title Text Up to 62 characters Customized title to be displayed upon login. Logo Browser fi eld 32 x 32 pixels; 100KB max Logo to be displayed upon login. JPEG, GIF or PNG Users The Users section allows the administrator to edit, delete and create new user accounts. User accounts are used for controlling connections passing through the firewall or services running on the firewall. Table 2.4.5: Configure > Accounts > Users Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the user account should be disabled or not. Default is unselected. Identity Text Up to 127 characters The user s identity to be used when authenticating with the fi rewall. Typically, this is an address such as user@example.com. Full Name Text Up to 59 characters A unique identifi er for the account. The user s name cannot begin with a number. Description Text Up to 79 characters A description used to further identify the account. Primary Group Pulldown???, all defi ned user groups, * EDIT * Certificate Pulldown???, <Generate>, all defi ned certifi cates, *EDIT* A selection for the user group to pool the confi gured user. Selecting <* EDIT *> allows for the creation of a new user group. Administrator accounts are confi gured by choosing a confi gured Admin user group. If the Authentication method is set to Certifi cates, select the certifi cate from the pulldown. Authentication Modify Password Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Select to edit or set a password. Password Text Up to 127 characters A text string used to protect access to the account. Remote Access L2TP / PPTP Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the L2TP/PPTP should be disabled or not. Default is unselected. Mobile IPSec Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the account can connect over a mobile VPN. Default is selected. Authentication Radio Button Certifi cates/ Pre-shared secret A selection for the authentication method the user will use when connecting over a mobile VPN. Default is Pre-shared secret. Pre-shared secret Pulldown/ Text ASCII, HEX/Up to 59 characters If the Authentication method is set to Pre-shared secrets, then enter the pre-shared secret as either ASCII or HEX. Valid HEX characters: 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,A,B,C,D,E,F Reference B: System Parameters 201

202 Table 2.4.5: Configure > Accounts > Users Remote Network Pulldown <???>, <USER DEFINED>, * EDIT *, all defi ned address objects of type All or VPN If the Authentication method is set to Pre-shared secrets, then enter the Remote Network to be used by the VPN connection. 2.5 Network The Network section allows the administrator to adjust network settings, define aliases as well as configure NAT, pass through and routing Summary The Summary sub-section provides an overview of the current firewall mode s configuration settings found in the Network section. Links to containers pertaining to specific sections of the firewall s configuration are provided along the top of the screen. Containers and sub-containers can be expanded or collapsed to navigate through displayed data Interfaces The Interfaces section contains configuration settings for network interfaces, PPP connections, VLANs and aliases a Settings The Settings sub-section allows the administrator to adjust network settings such as the host name and default gateway, as well as define logical interfaces. Table a: Configure > Network > Interfaces > Settings Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Settings Host Name Text Up to 51 characters The host name of the GTA fi rewall. GTA recommends using a fully qualified domain name as the host name for your GTA fi rewall. Logical Interfaces Name n/a n/a The name of the defi ned logical interface. Type n/a n/a The type of the defi ned logical interface. Zone n/a n/a The zone of the defi ned logical interface. IP Address n/a n/a The IP address of the defi ned logical interface. NIC n/a n/a The NIC used by the defi ned logical interface. Options n/a n/a The actual connection option of the logical interface. Values differ based on the logical interface s TYPE. Description n/a n/a The description of the defined logical interface. Advanced Network Interface Cards NIC n/a n/a Network interface (Ethernet) cards detected, including confi gured PPP (modem) connections. Device n/a n/a The device name of the confi gured NIC. MAC Address n/a n/a If the physical interface device is an Ethernet card, the card s MAC address will be displayed. Otherwise, the fi eld will be blank. Connection Pulldown <AUTO>, <10baseT/UTP>, <100baseTX> <AUTO> is generally recommended. <AUTO>: Auto-select the active network connection. <10baseT/UTP>: Unshielded twisted pair interface at 10 Mbps. <100baseTX>: Unshielded twisted pair interface at 100 Mbps. 202 Reference B: System Parameters

203 Table a: Configure > Network > Interfaces > Settings Option Pulldown <Default>, <full_ Default (full- or half-duplex) full duplex or half duplex. duplex> MTU Text Up to 5 characters. Maximum Transmission Unit. Default is Incorrect MTUs can cause poor performance, but it may be benefi cial to increase MTU for a gigabit Ethernet interface when jumbo packets are to be used b Edit Logical Interface Selecting EDIT or NEW icon from the Network Settings screen allows for the configuration of an existing or new logical interface as well as bridged interfaces, High Availability interfaces and VLANs. Table b: Configure > Network > Interfaces > Settings > Edit Logical Interfaces Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle to disable the selected/defi ned interface. Default is unselected. Type Pulldown <Standard>, <Bridge>, <Link Aggregation (Failover)>, <Link Aggregation (LACP)>, <Link Aggregation (Load Balance)>, <Link Aggregation (Round Robin)>, <PPP(PPPoE)>, <PPP(PPTP)>, <PPP(serial)> Defi nes the type of interface that will be confi gured. When confi guring a bridged interface, bridge must be selected. Selecting Bridge will also disable the DHCP, Gateway, and High Availability fi elds below. IP Address DHCP Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether DHCP should be used to obtain the logical interface s IP address or not. This fi eld is disabled if the primary interface uses PPP. Default is unselected. SLAAC Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for enabling SLAAC (Stateless Address Auto confi guration) for IPv6 interfaces. Gateway Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle enabling the interface as the default gateway. IP Address Text IP address The IP Address of the logical interface. This fi eld is disabled if DHCP is toggled or if the primary interface uses PPP. IPv4 and IPv6 fi elds will be available as confi guration is allowed. Options High Availability Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Select the High Availability Checkbox if High Availability will be confi gured. Enabling High Availability will disable the DHCP and Gateway fi elds. Router Advertisement Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for enabling router advertisement confi guration. VLAN Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle defi ning the interface as a VLAN. VLAN ID Text The VLAN ID that matches the VLAN ID of packets to be received by the VLAN switch or router. Valid VLAN IDs are range from 1 to Interfaces Name Text Up to 19 characters The interface object name for this bridged connection. Reference B: System Parameters 203

204 Table b: Configure > Network > Interfaces > Settings > Edit Logical Interfaces Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Zone Pulldown <External>, <Protected>, <PSN> NIC Pulldown <???>, <eth0> - <ethx> A selection for the interface zone. A selection for the NIC to associate with the bridged network. Description Text Up to 79 characters A description of the bridged interface. High Availability (only available if High Availability is enabled above) Description Text Up to 127 characters Enter a description to describe the nature of the High Availability interface. Virtual IP Address Text IP address Enter the virtual IP address that will be used for a given network interface. This IP address is used by fi rewall users. Beacon IP Address Text/Text/ Text IP address/ IP address/ IP address Enter up to three beacon IP addresses. Normally, one beacon is the IP address of the interface on the other high availability system, but do not confi gure it as the only beacon. Doing so could lead to improper confi guration. Router Advertisement (only available if Router Advertisement is selected above; required for IPv6 DHCP servers) DHCPv6 Override Pulldown Disable, Non-Address Information, All Select the setting for the DHCPv6 override. Domain Text Up to 31 characters Enter the domain assigned to the hosts using the prefi x advertisement. Name Server IP Address Text Up to 31 characters Enter the DNS server IP. Up to two (2) DNS servers may be defi ned. Preference Pulldown Low, Medium, High Select the preference as a gateway. Advanced Maximum Interval Text Up to 4 characters Enter the maximum time allowed between sending unsolicited multicast router advertisements from the interface, in seconds. Valid range is seconds. MTU Text Up to 4 characters The maximum transmission unit to ensure that all nodes on a link use the same MTU. Must not be greater than the MTU specifi ed on the interface. Preferred Lifetime Text Up to 4 characters Enter the length of time that addresses generated from the prefi x via Stateless Address Auto confi guration (SLAAC) remain preferred. Valid Lifetime Text Up to 4 characters Enter the length of time the prefi x is valid. Table c: Configure > Network > Interfaces > Settings > PPP Common Fields Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Name n/a n/a PPP0, 1, 2 or 3. The name is automatically assigned. Description Text Up to 31 characters The IP Address of the logical interface. Table d: Configure > Network > Interfaces > Settings > PPP (Serial) Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Transport Radio Button Serial PPP connection using a serial transport. 204 Reference B: System Parameters

205 PPP Connection Type Table d: Configure > Network > Interfaces > Settings > PPP (Serial) Pulldown <On-Demand>, <Dedicated> Primary COM Port Pulldown <COM1>-<COM4>, <USB> A selection for the connection type of the PPP connection. A selection for the COM port or USB port used by the PPP connection. Phone Number Text Up to 39 characters The phone number used to dial the remote site. User Name Text Up to 51 characters The user name used for remote access. Password Text Up to 51 characters The password used for remote access. Local IP Address Default Text IP address The default local IP address of the PPP link. Default is Remote IP Address Default Text IP address The default remote IP address of the PPP link. Default is Advanced Connection Login User Name Text Up to 51 characters For cases in which CHAP or PAP is negotiated, and a separate name and password are required to login. Login Password Text Up to 51 characters For cases in which CHAP or PAP is negotiated, and a separate name and password are required to login. Speed Pulldown 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 76800, , The speed at which the fi rewall communicates with the modem. Time Before Retry Text Up to 4 characters The amount of time, in seconds, before the fi rewall attempts to retry establishing a connection. Default is 10. Timeout Text Up to 4 characters The number of seconds during which a connection will stay connected during periods of inactivity. Default is 600. Link Control Protocol Local/Remote Address Field Compression Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether address/fi eld compression should be enabled or not. Default is selected. Line Quality Report Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the line quality report should be enabled or not. Default is unselected. Protocol Field Compression Van Jacobson Compression Debug Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether protocol fi eld compression should be enabled or not. Default is selected. Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether Van Jacobson compression should be enabled or not. Default is selected. Chat Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether dialing and logging chat scripts should be recorded or not. Default is unselected. LCP Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether LCP conversations should be recorded or not. Default is unselected. Phase Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether network phase conversations should be recorded or not. Default is unselected. Reference B: System Parameters 205

206 ISDN Don t Bond Channels Table d: Configure > Network > Interfaces > Settings > PPP (Serial) Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether or not channels should be bonded. Default is unselected. Switch Type Pulldown <Default>, <NI-1>, <DMS-100>, <5ESS P2P>, <5ESS MP> A selection of the switch type used to confi gure ISDN connections. Table e: Configure > Network > Interfaces > Settings > PPP (PPPoE) Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Transport Button PPPoE PPP connection using PPPoE transport. PPP Connection Type Pulldown <On-Demand>, <Dedicated> A selection for the connection type of the PPP connection. NIC Pulldown <eth0>-<ethx> A selection for the NIC on which PPPoE will run. User Name Text Up to 51 characters The user name used for remote access. Password Text Up to 51 characters The password used for remote access. Local IP Address Default Text IP address The default local IP address of the PPP link. Default is Remote IP Address Default Text IP address The default remote IP address of the PPP link. Default is Advanced Connection PPPoE Provider Text Up to 51 characters Designation for the PPPoE provider. MTU Text Up to 4 characters The Maximum Transmission Unit of the PPPoE connection. Time Before Retry Text Up to 4 characters The amount of time, in seconds, before the fi rewall attempts to retry establishing a connection. Default is 10. Timeout Text Up to 4 characters The number of seconds during which a connection will stay connected during periods of inactivity. Default is 600. Link Control Protocol Local/Remote Address Field Compression Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether address/fi eld compression should be enabled or not. Default is selected. Line Quality Report Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the line quality report should be enabled or not. Default is selected. Protocol Field Compression Van Jacobson Compression Debug Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether protocol fi eld compression should be enabled or not. Default is selected. Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether Van Jacobson compression should be enabled or not. Default is unselected. Chat Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether dialing and logging chat scripts should be recorded or not. Default is unselected. LCP Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether LCP conversations should be recorded or not. Default is unselected. Phase Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether network phase conversations should be recorded or not. Default is unselected. 206 Reference B: System Parameters

207 Table f: Configure > Network > Interfaces > Settings > PPP (PPTP) Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Transport Button PPTP PPP connection using PPTP transport. PPP Connection Type Pulldown <On-Demand>, <Dedicated> A selection for the connection type of the PPP connection. Interface Pulldown Confi gured logical A selection for the interface on which PPTP will run. interfaces PPTP Server IP Text IP address The IP address of the internal PPTP server. Address Phone Number Text Up to 39 characters The phone number used to dial the remote site. User Name Text Up to 51 characters The user name used for remote access. Password Text Up to 51 characters The password used for remote access. Local IP Address Default Text IP address The default local IP address of the PPP link. Default is Remote IP Address Default Text IP address The default remote IP address of the PPP link. Default is Advanced Connection Time Before Retry Text Up to 4 characters The amount of time, in seconds, before the fi rewall attempts to retry establishing a connection. Default is 10. Timeout Text Up to 4 characters The number of seconds during which a connection will stay connected during periods of inactivity. Default is 600. Link Control Protocol Local/Remote Address Field Compression Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether address/fi eld compression should be enabled or not. Default is selected. Line Quality Report Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the line quality report should be enabled or not. Default is unselected. Protocol Field Compression Van Jacobson Compression Debug Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether protocol fi eld compression should be enabled or not. Default is selected. Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether Van Jacobson compression should be enabled or not. Default is unselected. Chat Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether dialing and logging chat scripts should be recorded or not. Default is unselected. LCP Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether LCP conversations should be recorded or not. Default is unselected. Phase Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether network phase conversations should be recorded or not. Default is unselected Aliases Aliases allow a network interface to possess multiple IP addresses. An IP alias may be assigned to any network interface. Aliases can be used wherever interfaces can be selected, such as in security policies, inbound tunnels and IPSec tunnels. The Aliases sub-section displays the name and description of all defined aliases. The administrator is able to edit, delete and create new aliases from this sub-section. Reference B: System Parameters 207

208 Table : Configure > Network > Interfaces > Aliases Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the alias should be disabled or not. Default is unselected. Name Text Up to 19 characters A unique identifi er for the alias, used for reference elsewhere in the confi guration. Description Text Up to 79 characters A description used to further identify the alias. Interface Pulldown???, all defined A selection for the interface to assign to the alias. logical interfaces IP Address Text Up to 31 characters The IP Address of the alias. If no netmask is entered, it will default to /32. IPv4 and IPv6 IP address fi elds are available NAT The NAT sub-section allows the administrator to configure the Inbound Tunnels and Static Mappings aspects of the NAT facility Inbound Tunnels The Inbound Tunnels sub-section displays the name and description of all defined inbound tunnels. Inbound tunnels allow a host to initiate a connection with an otherwise inaccessible host. The administrator is able to edit, delete and create new inbound tunnels from this sub-section. Table : Configure > Network > NAT > Inbound Tunnels Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the inbound tunnel should be disabled or not. Default is unselected. Description Text Up to 79 characters An identifi er used to describe the function of the inbound tunnel. Service Pulldown <ANY_SERVICE>, <TCP>, <HTTP>, etc. From Pulldown All defi ned interfaces and aliases, <ANY_IP>, * EDIT * To Pulldown???, all defi ned address objects of type All or Network, * EDIT * A selection for the IP Protocol to be used by the inbound tunnel. A selection for the source side of the tunnel. Select <* EDIT *> to define a new address object. A selection for the destination side of the tunnel. If multiple IP addresses are referenced in the inbound tunnel, the inbound tunnel will utilize round-robin load balancing. Select <* EDIT *> to defi ne a new address object. Advanced Automatic Policies Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the inbound tunnel should use automatic policies or not. Hide Source Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the source side of the tunnel should be hidden from the destination side or not. Default is unselected. Options Authentication Required Checkbox / Pulldown Enabled/Disabled /???, ALL_USERS, all confi gured user groups, * EDIT * A toggle for whether a user should be required to authenticate or not. If selected, select the user group that is to require authentication. Select <* EDIT *> to defi ne a new user group. Default is unselected. If the AUTOMATIC ACCEPT ALL POLICY Checkbox is unselected, this fi eld will uneditable. 208 Reference B: System Parameters

209 Table : Configure > Network > NAT > Inbound Tunnels IPS Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether traffi c on the inbound tunnel should be checked against confi gured IPS policies. Default is unselected. Source Pulldown All defi ned interfaces, <ANY_ IP>, * EDIT * A selection for the source interface/ip. SYN Cookies Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether TCP SYN Cookies should be used or not. Default is selected. If the AUTOMATIC ACCEPT ALL POLICY Checkbox is unselected, this fi eld will uneditable. Time Group Pulldown All defi ned time groups Traffic Shaping Policy Pulldown <DEFAULT>, Defi ned Policy, * EDIT * A selection for which, if any, time group the inbound tunnel options will be applied. Traffi c Shaping policy to be used as defi ned in Configuration>Configurations>Network>Traffic Shaping. Selecting <* EDIT *> allows for the creation of a new traffi c shaping policy. If the AUTOMATIC ACCEPT ALL POLICY Checkbox is unselected, this fi eld will uneditable. Weight Pulldown 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 A selection for the weight of the allocation of the inbound tunnel s bandwidth. A weight of 10 has the highest priority, a weight of 1 has the lowest. If the AUTOMATIC ACCEPT ALL POLICY Checkbox is unselected, this fi eld will uneditable Static Mappings The Static Mappings sub-section displays the name and description of all defined static mappings. Static mappings allow an internal IP address or subnet to be statically mapped to an interface during NAT. The administrator is able to edit, delete and create new static mappings from this sub-section. Table : Configure > Network > NAT > Static Mappings Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the static mapping should be disabled or not. Default is unselected. Description Text Up to 79 characters An identifi er used to describe the function of the static mapping. From Pulldown???, <USER DEFINED>, all defi ned address objects of type All or Network, * EDIT * Service Pulldown???, <USER DEFINED>, all defi ned address objects of type All or Network, * EDIT * NAT Pulldown???, <USE_IP_ ADDRESS>, all defi ned address objects of type All or Network, all defi ned aliases, all defi ned H 2 A interfaces * EDIT * A selection for the object to be statically mapped. Select <* EDIT *> to define a new address object. If <USER DEFINED> has been selected in the FROM fi eld, the IP address will need to be entered manually. To map a single IP address, use a subnet mask of /32 ( ). A selection to specify a service group to statically map to an Alias. A selection for the object to which the source will be matched. Select <* EDIT *> to define a new address object. Reference B: System Parameters 209

210 Table : Configure > Network > NAT > Static Mappings Destination Pulldown???, <USE_IP_ ADDRESS>, all defi ned address objects of type All or Network, all defi ned aliases, all defi ned H 2 A interfaces * EDIT * Pass Through A selection for the object to which the destination will be matched. Select <*EDIT*> to defi ne a new address object. The Pass Through sub-section allows the administrator to configure the Bridged Protocols and Hosts/ Networks aspects of the Pass Through facility Bridged Protocols The Bridged Protocols sub-section displays the name, type and description of all defined bridged protocols. The administrator is able to edit, delete and create new bridged protocols from this sub-section. Table : Configure > Network > Pass Through > Bridged Protocols Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether or not the bridged protocol should be used. Default is selected. Description Text Up to 59 characters Description of the bridged protocol type. Type Text Up to 6 characters Hexadecimal number of the Ethernet protocol. 0x0 is a placeholder for the full hexadecimal protocol type number. Use the 0x prefi x when entering a number in hex format. Allowed Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Allows the protocol s traffi c on the bridged interface. Default is unselected. Log Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Logs events of the protocol type. Default is selected Host/Networks The Hosts/Networks sub-section displays all defined hosts/networks. The administrator is able to edit, delete and create new hosts or networks from this sub-section. Table : Configure > Network > Pass Through > Host/Networks Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the host or network should be disabled of not. Default is selected. Description Text Up to 79 characters An identifi er used to describe the function of the host or network. From Pulldown <USER DEFINED>, <ANY_IP>, all defi ned address objects of type All or Network, * EDIT * Destination Interface Pulldown???, <ANY>, all defi ned fi rewall interfaces and VLANs A selection of objects for use as a host. Select <* EDIT*> to defi ne a new address object. A selection of the destination interface to have NAT not applied when outbound IP packets are received. 210 Reference B: System Parameters

211 Table : Configure > Network > Pass Through > Host/Networks Destination Pulldown <USER DEFINED>, <ANY_IP>, all defi ned address objects of type All or Network, * EDIT * A selction of objects from use as a destination. Select <*EDIT*> to defi ne a new address object. Inbound Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether unsolicited IP packets should be accepted for the selected address Preferences The Preferences section defines timeout settings for network connections. Table 2.5.6: Configure > Network > Timeouts Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Internet Protocol Enable Pulldown IPv4, IPv4 and IPv6 A toggle for defi ning the internet protocol. Options include IPv4 only or both IPv4 and IPv6. Advanced IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Automatic Policies Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for enabling automatic policies for IPv6 neighbor discovery. Timeouts TCP Text Up to 4 characters The amount of time, in seconds, before a TCP packet will time out. Default is 600. Wait for ACK Text Up to 4 characters The amount of time, in seconds, for the fi rewall to wait for an Acknowledgement code. Default is 30. Send Keep Alives Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the fi rewall should send TCP Keep Alives or not. Default is selected. UDP Text Up to 4 characters The amount of time, in seconds, before a UDP packet will time out. Default is 600. ICMP Text Up to 4 characters The amount of time, in seconds, before a ICMP packet will time out. Default is 15. Default Text Up to 4 characters The amount of time, in seconds, before a supported protocol other than TCP, UDP or ICMP packet will time out. Default is 600. Wait for Close Text Up to 4 characters If the fi rewall experiences spurious blocks from reply packets (typically port 80), increasing this value gives packets from slow or distant connections more time to return before the connection is closed. Default is 20. Advanced Connection Limiting ICMP Packets Text Up to 5 characters The limit number of ICMP packets (per second). Maximum ICMP Text up to 5 characters The maximum size limit of an ICMP packet. Packet Size New Connections Text Up to 5 characters The limit number of new connections (per second). New Connections Per Host SIP Support Text Up to 5 characters The limit number of new connections per host (per second). Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for enabling or disabling SIP support. Default is selected. Reference B: System Parameters 211

212 2.5.6 Routing The Routing sub-section allows the administrator to configure the Gateway Policies, RIP and Static Routes aspects of the Routing facility BGP The BGP (Border Gateway Protocol) sub-section displays the name, type and description of all BGP protocols. The administrator is able to edit, delete and create new BGPs from this sub-section. Table a: Configure > Network > Routing > BGP Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enables the BGP interface and starts the service. Default is unselected. Router AS Text Up to 5 characters The number assigned to a router or set of routers in a single technical administration. Router ID Text Up to 31 characters Router ID number. Networks Pulldown, Text???, <USER DEFINED>, all defi ned networks, *EDIT*; A selection for the network(s) which will use BGP. Advanced Automatic Policies Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enables the fi rewall to generate a set of automatic policies to allow a confi gured BGP interface to function properly. The policy created is for TCP port 179 and is viewable in the Monitor> Activity>Security Policies>Automatic section. Default is selected. Redistribute (Categories for Connected, OSPF, RIP, and Static) Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether redistribution should be used or not. Metric Checkbox, Text Enabled/Disabled, Up to 2 characters Confi gure the metric when the route is redistributed. Route Aggregation Aggregate Addresses Pulldown???, <USER DEFINED>, all defi ned networks, *EDIT* The network(s) to aggregate. AS Set Checkbox Enabled/Disabled This selection will generate or send the AS set of other routers to the remote router. Default is unselected. Summary Only Checkbox Enabled/Disabled This selection fi lters the more specifi c routes when sending updates. Default is unselected. To edit an existing BGP interface, select the EDIT icon. To create a new BGP interface, select the NEW Icon. Table b: Configure > Network > Routing > BGP > Edit BGP Interface Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Disables the BGP interface. Default is unselected. Description Text Up to 70 characters A short description to identify the BGP interface. Neighbor Text Up to 31 characters A selection for the IP address used to confi gure the peer routers the firewall will use to connect to BGP. Remote AS Text Up to 5 characters The AS number of the peer router. Advertise Default Route Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enable if the fi rewall will advertise itself as the default route. Default is unselected. 212 Reference B: System Parameters

213 Table b: Configure > Network > Routing > BGP > Edit BGP Interface Advanced Next Hop Self Checkbox Enabled/Disabled This selection disables the NEXT HOP SELF attribute for BGP. Default is unselected Gateway Policies The Gateway Policies sub-section displays the name, type and description of all defined gateway policies. The administrator is able to enable or disable various options in this sub-section. Table a: Configure > Network > Routing > Gateway Policies Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Gateway Failover Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether gateway failover capabilities should be used or not. Default is unselected. Advanced Add Static Routes For Beacons Ping Secondary Only if Primary Down Gateway Sharing Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether static routes should be added for defi ned beacons. Default is selected. Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the failover gateway should be pinged only if pinging the primary gateway is unsuccessful. Default is unselected. Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether traffi c connection sharing between the selected gateways should be enabled or not. Default is unselected. Policy Based Routing Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the ability to select a gateway for connections with outbound policies should be enabled or not. Default is unselected. Source Routing Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the ability to select a return gateway for connections with inbound policies or not. Default is unselected. The Edit Gateway Policy screen can be accessed by selecting NEW along the top right of the Gateway Policies screen. Table b: Configure > Network > Routing > Edit Gateway Policies Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether gateway policy should be used or not. Default is unselected. Name Text Up to 19 characters A unique identifi er for the gateway policy, used for reference elsewhere in the confi guration. Description Text Up to 79 characters A description used to further identify the gateway policy. Route Pulldown???, <USER DEFINED>, all defi ned dynamic, external interfaces A selection for the route to be used by the gateway policy. IP Address Text Up to 15 characters The IP address of the gateway policy s route if <USER DEFINED> is selected in ROUTE. Reference B: System Parameters 213

214 Table b: Configure > Network > Routing > Edit Gateway Policies Failover Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether gateway failover should be enabled for the gateway policy (if gateway failover is enabled). Default is selected. Beacons Text / Text IP address / IP address Advanced Do Not Ping Gateway Pingable IP addresses that are within five (5) hops of the gateway. Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle to allow or disallow pinging of the gateway. Maximum Failures Text User defined number An entry for defi ning the maximum amount of failures are allowed before failover. Sharing Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether to share traffi c load with this gateway (if gateway sharing is enabled). Default is selected OSPF The OSPF (Open Shortest Path First Protocol) sub-section displays the name, type and description of all defined OSPF protocols. The administrator is able to edit, delete and create new OSPFs from this sub-section. Table a: Configure > Network > Routing > OSPF Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether or not OSPF should be used. Default is unselected. Router ID Text Up to 31 characters Uniquely identifi ed for the fi rewall/router. Must be in the form of (Example: ) Advertise Default Route Advanced Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether or not the fi rewall will advertise itself as the default route. Automatic Policies Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enables the fi rewall to generate a set of automatic policies to allow a configured OSPF interface to function properly. The policy created is for IP Protocol 89 and is viewable in the Monitor>Activity>Security Policies>Automatic section. Default is selected. Default Metric Text Up to 8 characters The value used by a routing algorithm by which one route is determined to perform better than another. When metrics do not convert, the default metric will provide a substitute, enabling redistribution to proceed. Distance Text Up to 3 characters A selection used to determine which routes a router should trust if the router receives two routes with identical information. Redistribute (Categories for Connected, OSPF, RIP, and Static) Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether redistribution should be used or not. Metric Checkbox, Text Enabled/Disabled, Up to 2 characters Confi gure the metric when the route is redistributed. 214 Reference B: System Parameters

215 To edit an existing OSPF interface, select the EDIT icon. To create a new OSPF interface, select the NEW Icon. Table b: Configure > Network > Routing > OSPF > Edit OSPF Interface Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Disables OSPF for the specifi ed area. Default is unselected. Area Text Up to 19 characters This selection specifi es the OSPF area. Description Text Up to 79 characters A short description to identify the OSPF area. Type Pulldown Normal, NSSA, NSSA-No Summary, Stub, Stub-No Summary Networks Pulldown???, <USER DEFINED>, all defi ned networks, *EDIT*; This selection is used to determine the behavior of the fi rewall/router. A selection for the network(s) which will use OSPF. Advanced Link Cost Text Up to 5 characters The cost to send a packet via an interface. Priority Text Up to 3 characters A selection for the priority status of the route. Dead Interval Text Up to 5 characters Defi ne the period of time (in seconds) after which the route will be considered down. Hello Interval Text Up to 5 characters Defi ne the period of time (in seconds) in which updates will be sent. Retransmit Interval Text Up to 5 characters Defi ne the period of time (in seconds) in which the router will wait after an update is sent. If time expires, the router will resend the update. Transmit Delay Text Up to 5 characters Defi ne the estimated time (in seconds) to send an update. This value must be greater than zero. Authentication KeyID Text Up to 3 characters KEYID identifi es secret key used to create the message digest. This ID is part of the protocol and must be consistent across routers on a link. Valid numbers Password Text Up to 16 characters The password that must be used to collect routing information through OSPF. Virtual Links Router ID Text Up to 31 characters Uniquely identifi ed for the fi rewall/router. Must be in the form of (Example: ) RIP The RIP (Routing Information Protocol) sub-section displays the name, type and description of all defined routing information protocols. The administrator is able to edit, delete and create new RIPs from this sub-section. Table a: Configure > Network > Routing > RIP Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether or not RIP should be used. Default is unselected. Advertise Default Route Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether or not the default route (gateway) on any protected network or PSN should be advertised or not. Default is unselected. Reference B: System Parameters 215

216 Table a: Configure > Network > Routing > RIP Advanced Automatic Policies Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle to enable the fi rewall to generate an automatic set of policies to allow confi gured RIP interface settings to function properly. Default is selected. Default Metric Field Up to 2 characters The value used by a routing algorithm by which one route is determined to perform better than another. RIP Timers Update Text Up to 5 characters The rate at which RIP sends a message containing the complete routing table to all neighboring RIP routers. Timer limit is 30 seconds. Timeout Text Up to 5 characters Upon expiration of the timeout, the route is no longer valid. The route is retained in the routing table for a short time so neighbors can be notifi ed that the route has been dropped. Timer limit is 180 seconds. Garbage Text Up to 5 characters Upon expiration of the garbage timer, the route is completely removed from the routing table. Timer limit is 120 seconds. Redistribute (Categories for Connected, OSPF, RIP, and Static) Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether redistribution should be used or not Metric Checkbox, Text Enabled/Disabled, Up to 2 characters A toggle for whether a metric should be used and to what degree. To edit an existing RIP interface, select the EDIT icon. To create a new RIP interface, select the NEW Icon. Table b: Configure > Network > Routing > RIP > Edit RIP Interface Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the RIP Interface should be disabled or not. Default is unselected. Interface n/a n/a The interface being used. Description Test Up to 79 characters A description of the RIP interface. Input Pulldown <None>, <Both>, <v1>, <v2> Output Pulldown <None>, <Both>, <v1>, <v2> Password Pulldown <None>, <Clear>, <MD5> A selection to determine what version of RIP will be accepted by other routers. A selection to determine what version of RIP will be exported or broadcast. A selection for the type of encryption that will be used for the password. Password Text Up to 19 characters The password that must be used to collect routing information through RIP version 2. Key ID Text Up to 5 characters Pre-shared secret key ID. This only applies to RIPv2 when MD5 encryption is used. 216 Reference B: System Parameters

217 Static Routes The Static Routes sub-section displays the name, type and description of all defined static routes. The administrator is able to edit, delete and create new static routes from this sub-section. Table a: Configure > Network > Routing > Static Routes Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Default Gateway IPv4 Text IP Address IPv4 IP address. IPv6 Text IP Address IPv6 IP address. Table b: Configure > Network > Routing > Static Routes Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the static route should be disabled or not. Default is unselected. Description Text Up to 79 characters A description of the static route. Network IP Address Pulldown All confi gured address objects of type All or Network Gateway Traffic Shaping Pulldown/ Text All defi ned address objects of type All or Network The address object(s) whose traffi c will be reached via the static route. The address object or IP address of the destination/ gateway selected for this static route. The Traffic Shaping section list displays the name and description of all defined Traffic Shaping policies. Traffic Shaping policies allow the administrator to allocate available bandwidth for specific security policies and tunnels by defining a bandwidth pipe. Traffic shaping policies are used in tunnels and security policies. The DEFAULT policy does not restrict traffic flow, allowing traffic to utilize all available bandwidth, first come, first served. If traffic shaping is enabled, the default policy cannot be disabled, but an alternate selection can be made. Traffic Shaping is enabled by selecting the ENABLE Checkbox on the top of the Traffic Shaping list. Table a: Configure > Network > Traffic Shaping Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the Traffi c Shaping should be disabled or not. Default is unselected. Default Text???, all defi ned traffi c shaping policies To create a new traffic shaping policy, select the NEW icon. A selection for the traffi c shaping policy to be used by default if Traffi c Shaping is enabled. Table 2.5.7b: Configure > Network> Traffic Shaping > Edit Traffic Shaping Policy Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the Traffi c Shaping Object should be disabled or not. Default is unselected. Name Text Up to 59 characters A unique identifi er for the object, used to reference it elsewhere in the confi guration. Description Text Up to 79 characters A brief description used to further identify the use of the Traffi c Shaping Object. Bandwidth Text Up to 10 characters The data transfer speed limit of the Traffi c Shaping Object. Values entered as kilobits per second. Reference B: System Parameters 217

218 2.6 Objects The Objects section allows the administrator to add or edit address objects, encryption objects, service group objects, time group objects and IPSec Objects. An object needs only to be defined once, after that it can be selected throughout the Configuration section where the defined object is required. Note If an object that is used throughout the confi guration is updated, confi guration settings may inadvertently change Summary Address Objects The Address Object list displays the name, type and description of all defined address objects. The administrator is able to edit, delete and create new objects from this sub-section by double-clicking on a previously configured object or by selecting the NEW icon. Additional address objects can be pooled together in the ADDRESS OBJECTS section to create a broader definition. Table 2.6.2: Configure > Objects > Address Object > Edit Address Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the confi gured address object should be disabled or not. Default is unselected. Name Text Up to 19 characters A unique identifi er for the address object. The object s name must not begin with a number. Description Text Up to 79 characters A brief description of the address object. Type Checkboxes All, Content Filtering, Mail Proxy, Network, Security Policies, VPN Address Objects Object Pulldown All defi ned address objects A selection for how the address object will be used. ALL allows for the object to be used throughout the confi guration, while other options restrict use to their specifi c section. Not selecting a TYPE creates an internal object that can only be pooled into another object s defi nition. A selection for the previously defi ned address object to be pooled in the defi nition. Address Text Up to 499 characters If <USER DEFINED> has been selected, enter the address manually. Description Text Up to 79 characters A brief description explaining the use of the additional address object Bookmark Objects The administrator is able to edit, delete and create new objects from this sub-section by double-clicking on a previously configured object or by selecting the NEW icon. Table 2.6.3: Configure > Objects > Bookmark Objects > Edit Address Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the confi gured bookmark object should be disabled or not. Default is unselected. Name Text Up to 19 characters A unique identifi er for the bookmark object. The object s name must not begin with a number. Description Text Up to 79 characters A brief description of the bookmark object. Label Text Up to 19 characters A brief label for the bookmark object. 218 Reference B: System Parameters

219 Table 2.6.3: Configure > Objects > Bookmark Objects > Edit Address Bookmarks Object Pulldown All defi ned bookmark objects A selection for the previously defi ned bookmark object to be pooled in the defi nition. Icon Pulldown None, Browser, Document, , A selection to display a built-in icon for the bookmark. Folder, Network, Web Label Text Up to 19 characters Enter a label for the bookmark object. Type Pulldown <cifs://>, <ftp://>, <ftps://>, < < The type of protocol used for the bookmark object s URL. URL Text Up to 499 characters The URL for the bookmark object. Description Text Up to 79 characters A brief description explaining the use of the additional bookmark object Encryption Objects Encryption objects define encryption settings and are used when creating IPSec Objects. The Encryption Object list displays the name, type and description of all defined encryption objects. The administrator is able to edit, delete and create new objects from this sub-section by double-clicking on a previously configured object or by selecting the NEW icon. Table 2.6.4: Configure > Objects > Encryption Objects > Edit Encryption Object Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the confi gured encryption object should be disabled or not. Default is unselected. Name Text Up to 19 characters A unique identifi er for the encryption object. It is recommended that the encryption object s NAME includes the encryption algorithms used. The object s name must not begin with a number. Description Text Up to 79 characters A brief description of the encryption object. Object Pulldown <???>, <USER DEFINED>, all defined objects. Encryption Method Pulldown <none>, <null>, <Camilla>, <AES- 128>, <AES-192>, <AES-256>, <blowfish>, <des>, <3des>, <strong> Hash Algorithm Pulldown <none>, <hmac-md5>, <hmac-sha1>, <hmac-sha2>, <all> Key Group Pulldown <any>, <DH Group 1>, <DH Group 2>, <DH Group 5>, <DH Group 14>, <DH Group 15>, <DH Group 16> A selection for a user defi ned encryption object or a default encryption object. A selection for the encryption method to be used by the object. For an explanation on available encryption methods, see Encryption Methods. A selection for the hash algorithm to be used by the object. For an explanation on available hash algorithms, see Hash Algorithms. A selection for the key group to be used by the object. For an explanation on key groups, see Key Group. Description Text Up to 79 characters A brief description of the encryption object to identify multiple objects contained in an encryption object. Reference B: System Parameters 219

220 2.6.5 IPSec Objects IPSec Objects are used when defining IPSec tunnels and user groups. The IPSec Object list displays the name and description of all defined IPSec Objects. IPSec Objects configure how incoming VPN connections will be negotiated by defining what client or VPN gateway initiation behavior should be accepted by your GTA firewall. Table 2.6.5: Configure > Objects > VPN Object Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether access to the VPN Object should be disabled or not. The Default is unselected. Name Text Up to 19 characters A unique identifi er for the network connection, used to reference it elsewhere in the configuration. The object s name cannot begin with a number. Description Text Up to 80 characters A description used to further identify the use for the specifi c VPN Object. IKE Checkbox Version 1, Verson 2 Select the IKE version to be supported by the IPSec object Phase I Exchange Mode Pulldown Main, Aggressive A selection for fl exible (Main) or forced (Aggressive) negotiation of acceptable encryption algorithms for IKE. Aggressive mode is required if one component of the VPN has a dynamic (DHCP or PPP) IP address, such as with a dynamically addressed VPN gateway or mobile VPN client. Encryption Object Pulldown???, All defi ned encryption objects, *EDIT * Force Mobile Protocol A selection for the encryption object to be used during Phase I. Selecting * EDIT * allows for the editing of an existing or creation of a new encryption object. Checkbox Enable/Disable Forces mobile protocl for gateway to gateway VPNs Advanced NAT-T Pulldown <Automatic>, <Disable>, <Force> A selection for whether the NAT-Transversal (a method for circumventing IPSec NATing problems) should be forced. Default is <Automatic>. Lifetime Text Up to 5 characters The length of time in minutes before the Phase I (IKE) security associations must be renewed. Shorter times are generally more secure, but may reduce performance by adding renewal overhead time to the connection. DPD Interval Text Up to 5 characters The interval in seconds between checks for continued viability of the VPN connection (also known as dead peer detection). To disable DPD queries made by the fi rewall, set the interval to 0. The fi rewall will continue to respond to DPD signals from other VPN gateways and clients, but will not initiate any signals of its own. Phase II Encryption Object Pulldown???, All defi ned encryption objects, * EDIT * Advanced A selection for the encryption object to be used during Phase II. Selecting * EDIT * allows for the creation of a new encryption object. Lifetime Text Up to 5 characters The length of time in minutes before the Phase II security associations must be renewed. This time must be smaller than the Lifetime value set for Phase I. Shorter times are generally more secure, but may reduce performance by adding renewal overhead time to the connection. 220 Reference B: System Parameters

221 2.6.6 Service Groups GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide Service group objects are used when defining security policies and inbound tunnels. The Service Group object list displays the name, type and description of all defined service group objects. The administrator is able to edit, delete and cr eate new objects from this sub-section. Additional service group objects can be pooled together in the SERVICES section to create a broader definition. Table 2.6.6: Configure > Objects > Service Groups Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the confi gured service group object should be disabled or not. Default is unselected. Name Text Up to 19 characters A unique identifi er for the service group object. The object s name must not begin with a number. Description Text Up to 79 characters A brief description of the service group object. Services Object Pulldown <???>, <USER DEFINED>, All defi ned service group objects A selection for the service group object to be used. Protocol Pulldown <TCP>, <UDP>, <ICMP>, <IP> Port(s) Text Up to 12 port and/or port ranges If <USER DEFINED> has been selected, select the protocol to be added. If <USER DEFINED> has been selected, enter the port number manually. Port numbers can be entered individually (1,2,3,4,5) or as a pool (1-5). Description Text Up to 79 characters A brief description of the service Time Groups The Time Group object list displays the name, type and description of all defined time group objects. Time Group objects can be used when creating security policies. The administrator is able to edit, delete and create new objects from this sub-section. Additional time group objects can be pooled together in the TIME GROUPS section to create a broader definition. Table 2.6.7: Configure > Objects > Time Groups Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the confi gured time object should be disabled or not. Default is unselected. Name Text Up to 19 characters A unique identifi er for the time group object. The object s name must not begin with a number. Description Text Up to 79 characters A brief description of the time group object. Time Groups Object Pulldown <???>, <USER DEFINED>, all defi ned time group objects. A selection for the time group object to be used. Selecting a previously defi ned object allows for additional edits. Start Pulldowns 00:00-24:00 If <USER DEFINED> has been selected, a selection for the start period of the time group. End Pulldowns 00:00-24:00 If <USER DEFINED> has been selected, a selection for the end period of the time group. Sun, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thr, Fri, Sat Checkboxes Enabled/Disabled If <USER DEFINED> has been selected, a toggle for the days of the week that the start and end times will be applied to the time group. Default is unselected. Reference B: System Parameters 221

222 2.7 Reporting The Reporting section allows the administrator to schedule executive reports and configure preferences for historical statistic graphs Summary The Summary sub-section provides on overview of the current firewall mode s configuration settings found in the Reporting section. Links to containers pertaining to specific sections of the firewall s configuration are provided along the top of the screen. Containers and sub-containers can be expanded or collapsed to navigate through displayed data Preferences The Preferences sub-section allows administrators to customize the colors for the Historical Statistics graphs displayed in the user interface and included in the Executive Reports. Edit the colors by entering the color Hex number or using the color picker Schedule The Schedule sub-section allows administrators to schedule daily, weekly or monthly executive reports/ Table 2.7.3: Configure > Reporting > Schedule Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for enabling or disabling the scheduled report. Default is unselected. Description Text Up to 79 characters A description for the scheduled report. Report Type Pulldown Allowed, Country, Denied, Executive, Inbound, Mail Proxy, Network Traffi c, Outbound, Web Filtering, System Resources, VPN Duration Hourly, Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Yearly The type of report to be run. Executive reports will include all report data. Additional report selections can be specifi ed under the Advanced tab. The time duration for the report data. Locale Pulldown Default, English The locale option determines the report language. Schedule Frequency Pulldown Daily, Weekly, The frequency for which the scheduled report will run. Monthly Time Pulldown 00: Select the time of day at which the scheduled report will run. Subject Text Up to 255 characters The subject line for the report . To Pulldown Address Objects, <USER DEFINED> The (s) to which the scheduled report will be sent. Advanced Reporting Options Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Data options for the scheduled report. Select the categories for which the report will display data and graphs. 222 Reference B: System Parameters

223 2.8 Security Policies GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide The Security Policies section allows the administrator to edit policies as well as adjust security preferences Summary The Summary sub-section provides on overview of the current firewall mode s configuration settings found in the Security Policies section. Links to containers pertaining to specific sections of the firewall s configuration are provided along the top of the screen. Containers and sub-containers can be expanded or collapsed to navigate through displayed data Country Blocking The Country Blocking sub-section allows the administrator to create a country security policy to allow or deny connections based upon country and inbound/outbound connections. Table Configure > Security Policies > Country Blocking (inbound/outbound) Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether country blocking should be enabled. Type Pulldown Allow, Deny A selection for choosing to allow specifi c countries only, or deny specifi c countries only. White List Pulldown Country White List A selection for specifying a white list object. The object will override country blocks. Database Subscription Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for enabling automatic updates to the country IP database. A valid support contract is required & Inbound, Outbound, Pass Through, VPN (IPSec, L2TP, PPTP, SSL Client) All security policies contain identical configuration options. To define a specific security policy, navigate to its appropriate screen. The administrator is able to edit, delete and create new policies. Table : Configure > Security Policies > *sub-section Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether or not the policy is to be used. Default is unselected. Description Text Up to 79 characters Description of the policy. Type Pulldown Accept, Deny A selection for the nature of the policy. Default is Deny. Interface Pulldown <ANY>, all defi ned logical interfaces Service Pulldown???, all defi ned service group objects, * EDIT * Time Groups Pulldown???, all defi ned time group objects, * EDIT * Source Address Pulldown???, <USER DEFINED>, <ANY_ IP>, all defi ned address objects of type All or Security Policy, * EDIT * A selection for the interface to which the policy will apply. A selection for the service group object to be used by the policy. Selecting <*EDIT*> allows for the confi guration of new object. A selection for the time group object to be used by the policy. Selecting <* EDIT*> allows for the configuration of new object. A selection for the source IP address of the policy. Selecting <USER DEFINED> will allow for the manual entry of the source address. Reference B: System Parameters 223

224 Table : Configure > Security Policies > *sub-section Destination Address Pulldown???, <USER DEFINED>, all defi ned interfaces and address objects of type All or Security Policy, * EDIT * A selection for the destination IP address of the policy. Selecting <USER DEFINED> will allow for the manual entry of the destination address. Advanced Broadcast Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the Destination Address is a broadcast address or not. Default is unselected. Authentication Checkbox Enable/Disabled Must be authenticated before policy will be matched. Required TCP SYN Cookies Checkbox Enable/Disabled Enable TCP SYN fl ood protection. Options Priority Pulldown <0> - <7> A value for the priority of the policy to be tagged in log messages. Action Alarm Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether or not the administrator should be notifi ed if a policy alarm is triggered. Default is unselected. Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether or not the administrator should be notifi ed by if the policy is triggered. Default is unselected. ICMP Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the policy should respond with ICMP unreachable or TCP reset if triggered. Default is unselected. IPS Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether traffi c on the security policy should be checked against confi gured IPS policies. Default is unselected. Log Pulldown <Default>, <Yes>, <No> A selection for whether the action should be logged or not. <Default> is the value defi ned in Configure>Security Policies>Preferences. Report Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether or not the policy should be included in report data. SMS Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether or not the administrator should be notifi ed by SMS policy alarm if the policy is triggered. Default is unselected. SNMP Trap Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether or not the administrator should be notifi ed if an SNMP trap policy alarm is triggered. Default is unselected. Stop Interface Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether or not the administrator should be notifi ed if a stop interface policy alarm is triggered. Default is unselected. Coalesce Source Address Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the source address should be coalesced or not. Default is unselected. Source Ports Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether source ports should be coalesced or not. Default is unselected. Destination Address Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the destination address should be coalesced or not. Default is unselected. Destination Ports Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the destination ports should be coalesced or not. Default is unselected. 224 Reference B: System Parameters

225 Table : Configure > Security Policies > *sub-section Traffic Shaping Policy Pulldown Traffi c Shapping Traffi c shapping object to be applied to the policy. Objects Weight Pulldown <1> - <10> Weight to apply to the policy Preferences The Preferences sub-section allows the firewall administrator to set global preferences to be applied to security policies.1 Table 2.8.3: Configure > Security Policies > Preferences Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Options Black List Pulldown Address Object A selection for an address object to black list. Default is ALWAYS_BLOCK. Automatic Policies Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Options include enabling the use of automatic policies and logging activity generated by them, as well as inclusion in report data. Connection Limiting Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Allways enabled. An option is available to log and report connection limiting. Country Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Always enabled. An option is available to log, report, alarm or ICMP coutry blocks. Deny Address Spoof Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Always enabled. Options include generating alarms, ing the administrator and logging activity when an alarm is tripped. Deny Doorknob Twist Deny Fragmented Packets Deny Invalid Packets Deny Unexpected Packets Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Always enabled. Options include generating alarms, ing the administrator, enabling ICMP and logging activity when an alarm is tripped. Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Options include enabling the ability to deny fragmented packets and logging activity generated by them. Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Always enabled. An option is available to log denied invalid packets. Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Always enabled. An option is available to log denied unexpected packets. Ident Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Options include enabling Ident. Stealth Mode Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Options include enabling the ability to have the fi rewall operate in stealth mode and logging activity generated by it. TCP SYN Cookies Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Options include enabling the ability the use of TCP SYN cookies and logging activity generated by them. Policy Blocks Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Always enabled. An option is available to log policy blocks. Tunnel Opens Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Always enabled. An option is available to log tunnel opens. Tunnel Closes Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Always enabled. An option is available to log tunnel closes. Reference B: System Parameters 225

226 Table 2.8.3: Configure > Security Policies > Preferences Coalesce Interval Text Up to 5 characters Entering a value of zero (0) turns off coalescing. Default is 60. Source Address Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether log messages should be coalesced from similar source addresses or not. Default is selected. Source Ports Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether log messages should be coalesced from similar source ports or not. Default is selected. Destination Address Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether log messages should be coalesced from similar destination addresses or not. Default is selected. Destination Ports Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether log messages should be coalesced from similar destination ports or not. Default is selected. 2.9 Services The Services section allows the administrator to enable and edit services such as DHCP, DNS, Dynamic DNS, Firewall Control Center, High Availability, Remote Logging and SNMP. Some of these services are optional on select GTA firewalls Summary The Summary sub-section provides on overview of the current firewall mode s configuration settings found in the Services section. Links to containers pertaining to specific sections of the firewall s configuration are provided along the top of the screen. Containers and sub-containers can be expanded or collapsed to navigate through displayed data DHCP The DHCP sub-section allows the administrator to edit, delete or create new DHCP address pools. Table 2.9.2a: Configure > Services > DHCP Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether or not the DHCP service should be used. Default is unselected. Selecting NEW creates a new DHCP address range. Table 2.9.2b: Configure > Services > DHCP > Edit DHCP Address Range Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the DHCP address range should be used or not. Default is unselected. Type Pulldown DHCPv4, DHCPv6 Selection of DHCPv4 versus DHCPv6. Description Text Up to 79 characters A description of the IP address pool range. Beginning Address Text IP address The fi rst IP address of the pool s range. Ending Address Text IP address The last IP address of the pool s range. Netmask Text IP address Subnet mask used to divide hosts into network groups. Default is Only for IPv4 networks. Prefix Length Text Up to 5 characters Enter the prefi x length for DHCPv Reference B: System Parameters

227 Lease Duration Table 2.9.2b: Configure > Services > DHCP > Edit DHCP Address Range Text/Text/ Text Up to 5 characters/ Up to 2 characters/ Up to 2 characters The length of the lease, entered in day/hours/minutes. Default is 1 day, 0 hours, 0 minutes. Options Default Gateway Text IP address Gateway given to DHCP clients. Domain Name Text Up to 57 characters DNS domain name. Name Server IP Address WINS Server IP Address Text IP address IP address of the DNS that will be issued to the requesting client. Up to three DNSs can be assigned. Text IP address IP address of the WINS server that will be issued to the requesting client. Up to three WINS servers can be assigned. Network Time Text IP Address IP address of the network time server that will be issued to the requesting client. Up to three network time servers can be assigned. Advanced MTU Text Up to 5 characters The MTU size determines the greatest packet size that can be transmitted by the DHCP service. A value of 0 means the fi eld is ignored. Advanced Static Leases Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the confi gured static lease should be disabled or not. Default is unselected. Host Name Text Up to 119 The host name to be used by the static lease. characters IP Address Text IP address The desired IP address to be statically leased to the host. MAC Address Text Up to 17 characters The host s MAC address. Description Text Up to 159 characters A description of the host s static lease. Exclusion Ranges Range Text/Text IP address/ IP address DNS Defi ne up to fi ve address ranges to exclude from each DHCP range. To enter a single IP address, enter its value in both the beginning and ending address fi elds. The DNS sub-section allows the administrator to configure the firewall as a primary Domain Name Server, maintaining a database of domain names and their corresponding IP addresses. Toggling between the DNS Proxy and DNS Server radio buttons will allow for the configuration of each. Table 2.9.3a: Configure > Services > DNS Proxy Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Name Servers Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether or not the external name server should be enabled. Default is unselected. IP Address Text IP address The IP address of the external name server. Primary Domain Name Text Up to 79 characters The primary domain name used for the network. Reference B: System Parameters 227

228 Table 2.9.3a: Configure > Services > DNS Proxy DNS Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether or not the DNS service should be enabled. Default is unselected. Service Radio Button Enabled/Disabled To confi gure the DNS Proxy, select the DNS Proxy option. Advanced Automatic Policies Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle to have the DNS proxy automatically accept all policies. Default is selected. Table 2.9.3b: Configure > Services > DNS Server Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Name Servers Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the external name server should be enabled or not. Default is unselected. IP Address Text IP address The IP address of the external name server. Service Radio Button Enabled/Disabled To confi gure the DNS server, select the DNS Server option. Advanced Automatic Policies Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle to have the DNS proxy automatically accept all policies. Default is selected. DNS Server Server Names Text Up to 79 characters The host name of your DNS server. Secondary Server Names Forwarders Text Up to 79 characters The host names of DNS servers acting as alternate name servers for the domain. Text/Text/ Text IP address/ IP address/ IP address Trusted Networks Pulldown???, <USER DEFINED>, * EDIT *, all confi gured networks Contact Text Up to 127 characters DNS servers that will be utilized as DNS forwarders. Networks or IP Addresses allowed for recursive DNS searches. The contact for the DNS server. Advanced Subnets Network IP Address Text IP address The network IP address of the subnet. Reverse Zone Name Text IP address The reverse zone name of the subnet. Clicking the NEW icon or the PRESS CREATE NEW link in the Domains section will open the Edit DNS Domain screen. Table c: Configure > Services > Edit DNS Domain Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether or not DNS Domain should be disabled. Default is unselected. Domain Name Text Up to 79 characters The domain name of the defi ned zone. Description Text Up to 79 characters A description of the DNS domain. IP Address Text IP address The IP address of a host to respond to the zone name. 228 Reference B: System Parameters

229 Table c: Configure > Services > Edit DNS Domain Mail Exchangers Text Up to 79 characters The mail exchangers for the DNS domain. SPF Text Up to 79 characters Enter a SPF (Sender Policy Framework) record. SPF allows administrators to specify which hosts are allowed to send mail from a given domain by creating a specifi c SPF record (or TXT record) in DNS. TXT Text Up to 79 characters DNS text entry record. Hosts Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the host entry should be disabled or not. Default is selected. RDNS Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether reverse DNS should be used by the entry or not. Default is unselected. IP Address Text IP address The IP address of the host entry. Host Names Text Up to 79 characters Enter the primary host name in the fi rst fi eld and aliases in succeeding fi elds. TXT Text Up to 79 characters DNS text entry record Dynamic DNS The Dynamic DNS sub-section allows the administrator to automate the process of advising DNS servers when the automatically assigned IP address for a network device is changed, ensuring that a specific domain name always points to the correct machine. Table 2.9.4a: Configure > Services > Dynamic DNS Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether or not Dynamic DNS should be used. Default is unselected. Selecting NEW creates a new a new Dynamic DNS entry. Table 2.9.4b: Configure > Services > Dynamic DNS Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the Dynamic DNS entry should be disabled or not. Default is unselected. Description Text Up to 79 characters A description of the Dynamic DNS entry. Host Name Text Up to 79 characters The host name of the service that will use Dynamic DNS. Interface Pulldown All confi gured logical interfaces Service Pulldown <DynDNS>, <Dynu>, <ChangeIP>, <easydns>, <No-IP> A selection for the logical interface for the Dynamic DNS entry. A selection for the Dynamic DNS service provider. An active account with the selected service provider is required. Login User Name Text Up to 79 characters The login name for the selected Dynamic DNS service account. Login Password Text Up to 79 characters The login password for the selected Dynamic DNS service account. Reference B: System Parameters 229

230 2.9.5 High Availability The High Availability sub-section allows the administrator to configure two systems to operate as a single virtual firewall, ensuring network access and security are maintained with minimum downtime. Table 2.9.5: Configure > Services > High Availability Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether or not H 2 A - High Availability should be used. Default is unselected. Status n/a n/a An indication of the service s status. VRID Text Up to 2 characters Enter a value between 0 and 15 to uniquely identify the H 2 A group. All systems within the group must have the same VRID. Priority Text Up to 3 characters Enter a value between 1 and 255. The firewall with the highest number and confi rmed communications beacons will operate in Master mode and will process network traffi c as the virtual fi rewall. Advanced Automatic Policies Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether automatic policies are used. Settle Time Text Up to 5 characters A setting for how long a fi rewall will stay (in seconds in a mode during a HA transition, before probing its beacons. Update HA Group Addresses Text???, all defi ned A selection for the slave address(es). interfaces User ID Text Up to 19 characters User name for slave login. Password Checkbox/ Up to 59 characters Encrypted password assigned to the user name. Text Manual Button Update Update the status of the H 2 A slave fi rewall. High Availability Interfaces Name n/a n/a The name of the confi gured H 2 A fi rewall. Interface Pulldown???, all defi ned The interface of the confi gured H 2 A fi rewall. interfaces Virtual IP Address Pulldown???, all defi ned The virtual IP address of the confi gured H 2 A fi rewall. interfaces Description n/a n/a A description of the confi gured H 2 A fi rewall Remote Logging The Remote Logging sub-section allows the administrator to configure how and where log information is sent. Table 2.9.6: Configure > Services > Remote Logging Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether or not the Remote Logging service should be used. Default is unselected. Syslog Server Text Up to 79 characters IP Address or host name of a system that will accept the remote logging data. Advanced Binding Interface Pulldown <AUTOMATIC>, all defi ned interfaces and VLANs Address from which logging is sourced. Default is <AUTOMATIC>. 230 Reference B: System Parameters

231 Table 2.9.6: Configure > Services > Remote Logging Facilities Policy Facility Pulldown Syslog facility Logs information associated with any policy that has logging enabled. Default is local1. NAT Facility Pulldown Syslog facility Logs information associated with outbound packets. Default is local0. WWW Facility Pulldown Syslog facility Logs all URLs accessed through the GTA fi rewall. Default is local SNMP The SNMP sub-section allows the administrator to manage IP devices, retrieving data from each device on a network and sending it to designated hosts. Table 2.9.7: Configure > Services > SNMP Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether or not the SNMP service should be used. Default is unselected. Contact Information Text Up to 59 characters address of the administrator. Location Text Up to 59 characters User defi ned description of the location of the administrator. Version 2 Configuration Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether or not the SNMP version 2 service should be used. Default is unselected. Community Text Up to 59 characters User defi ned description of community members. Doubles as a password. Version 3 Configuration Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether or not the SNMP version 3 service should be used. Default is unselected. User ID Text Up to 19 characters User name assigned separately from other user authorization names. Password Text Up to 59 characters Encrypted password assigned to the user name. Security Level Pulldown <AuthPriv>, <AuthNoPriv> Security level of the SNMP server. Default is AuthPriv. Advanced Automatic Policies Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the fi rewall should automatically generate a set of policies to allow user of the SNMP service. If disabled, remote access policies must be defined. Default is selected. Reference B: System Parameters 231

232 2.10 Threat Management The Threat Management section allows the administrator to enable and configure IPS, Mail Proxy and Content Filtering Summary The Summary sub-section provides an overview of the current firewall mode s configuration settings found in the Threat Management section. Links to containers pertaining to specific sections of the firewall s configuration are provided along the top of the screen. Containers and sub-containers can be expanded or collapsed to navigate through displayed data IPS The IPS sub-section allows the administrator to enable and configure GB-OS Intrusion Prevention System Proxy The Proxy sub-section allows the administrator to enable and configure IPS. Table Configure > Threat Management > IPS > Proxy Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the Intrusion Protection proxy should be enabled or not. Default is unselected. Subscription Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A selection to used subscription updates to IPS proxy. GTA Firewall UTM Appliances that do not have a valid GTA support contract can not use this option. Advanced Performance Tuning Networks External N/A N/A Any external IP the IPS applies to; not editable. Protected Pulldown All defi ned address objects of type Network External Servers AIM Pulldown All defi ned address objects of type Network Internal Servers DNS Pulldown All defi ned address objects of type Network Pulldown???, <USER DEFINED>, all defined address objects of type , *EDIT* SNMP Pulldown All defi ned address objects of type Network Telnet Pulldown All defi ned address objects of type Network A selection for the GTA Firewall UTM Appliance s networks the IPS proxy should protect. A selection for the address object that contains addresses of known AOL Instant Messenger servers. Defines IP of internal DNS servers. Defines IP of internal servers. Defines IP of internal SNMP servers. Defines IP of internal servers allowing telnet. 232 Reference B: System Parameters

233 Table Configure > Threat Management > IPS > Proxy Web Pulldown All defi ned address objects of type Network Defines internal Web server IP address. Services DNS Pulldown All defi ned services Defines the DNS service. FTP Pulldown All defi ned services Defines the FTP service. Pulldown All defi ned services Defines the service. SSH Pulldown All defi ned services Defines the SSH service. Telnet Pulldown All defi ned services Defines the telnet service. Web Pulldown All defi ned services Defines the Web service Policies The Policies sub-section allows for the configuration of Intrusion Protection policies. Table : Configure > Threat Management > IPS > Policies Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Filter Row Text Up to 6 characters A selection for the row number that should be displayed. Rows per Page Pulldown 50, 100, 500, all A selection for the number of rows to be displayed. Displaying 500 or more rows per page may impact browser performance. Advanced Column Column Pulldown Enable, Log, Alarm, Action, Name, ID, Group A selection for the column to fi lter. Filter Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the selected column should be fi ltered or not. Default is unselected. Field Pulldown Variable A selection for the value to be fi ltered according to the selected COLUMN. Policies Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the selected IPS policy should be enabled or not. Default is unselected. Log Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the selected IPS policy should be logged or not. Default is unselected. Alarm Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the selected IPS policy should generate alarms if triggered or not. Default is unselected. Action Pulldown Drop, Pass, Reset A selection for the action to be performed by the IPS policy if triggered. <Drop> drops the packet, <Pass> passes the packet through the fi rewall, <Reset> responds to the start and end points of the connection with a reset packet. Reference B: System Parameters 233

234 Mail Proxy The Mail Proxy sub-section allows the administrator to enable and configure Mail Proxy. Some of these services are optional on select GTA firewalls Proxy The Proxy sub-section allows for the configuration of the mail proxy. Table : Configure > Threat Management > Mail Proxy > Proxy Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the Mail Proxy should be enabled or not. Default is unselected. Connection Time Out Text Up to 5 characters The amount of time, in seconds, before the connection will time out. Default is 120. Maximum Connections Advanced Options Text Up to 5 characters The number of simultaneously allowed connections. Default is 25. Automatic Policies Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the fi rewall should automatically generate the required policies for the proxy to function. Default is selected. Log Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for enabling or disabling logging for the Mail Proxy. Report Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for enabling or disabling saving of Mail Proxy data for reports Policies The Policies sub-section allows for the configuration of Mail Proxy policies. Table : Configure > Threat Management > Mail Proxy > Policies Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether or not the Mail Proxy policy should be used. Default is unselected. Description Text Up to 79 characters A brief description of the policy s function. Server Pulldown <???>, all confi gured address objects of type Mail Proxy, * EDIT * A selection for the server to apply to the Mail Proxy policy. Select <* EDIT *> to define a new address object. Type Pulldown <Accept>, <Deny> A selection for the nature of the policy. Source Address Pulldown???, <USER DEFINED>, ANY_ IP, all confi gured address objects of type Mail Proxy, * EDIT* A selection for the source (sender) of the . Select <* EDIT *> to define a new address object. 234 Reference B: System Parameters

235 Table : Configure > Threat Management > Mail Proxy > Policies Destination Address Pulldown???, <USER DEFINED>, ANY_ IP, all confi gured address objects of type Mail Proxy, * EDIT* A selection for the destination (recipient) of the . Select <* EDIT *> to define a new address object. Match Against MX Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether a DNS Mail Exchanger record query should be checked against the domain in the To: fi eld, causing the to be rejected if there is no match. Default is unselected. Match All Addresses Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the policy should be matched only if all recipients contain the destination address. Default is unselected. Options DNS White List Mail Abuse Prevention System Checkbox, Pull down Checkbox, Pulldown Enabled/Disabled, All defi ned DNS White Lists Enabled/Disabled, All defi ned address objects of type Mail Proxy, * EDIT * Select the Checkbox to enable the DNS whitelist and then select an address object. MAPS; a special DNS server that contains only reverse DNS entries of known spam servers. Default of custom MAPS objects may be specifi ed. Select <* EDIT *> to define a new address object. Maximum Size Text Up to 8 characters Maximum size in kilobytes (KB) of message to accept. The default, 0, allows any message size. Reject if RDNS Fails Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether a Reverse DNS lookup on the remote host should be performed or not. If enabled, the connection will be refused if the lookup fails to match the host s offered identity. Anti-Spam* Greylisting Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether greylisting settings should be applied to the Mail Proxy policy or not. Default is unselected. Default USER DEFINED Radio Button Radio Button Enabled/Disabled Enabled/Disabled A selection for using default greylisting settings. Default is selected. A selection for using customized greylisting settings. Default is unselected. Deny Text Up to 5 characters If USER DEFINED is selected, enter the amount of time, in seconds, before Mail Proxy will accept a repeat connection from the originating mail server. Default is 20. Expires Text Up to 5 characters If USER DEFINED is selected, enter the amount of time, in hours, until Mail Proxy stops waiting for a repeat connection from the originating mail server. Default is 4. Time to Live Text Up to 5 characters If USER DEFINED is selected, enter the amount of time, in hours, that Mail Proxy will keep a record of the connection. Default is 36. Reference B: System Parameters 235

236 Table : Configure > Threat Management > Mail Proxy > Policies Categorization Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether Mail Proxy Anti-Spam s categorization features should be enabled or not. Default is unselected. Confirmed Reject Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether evaluated as confi rmed spam should be rejected or not. Disabled by default. Advanced Threshold Text Up to 3 characters The score must receive before being categorized as confi rmed spam. Higher scores are more tolerant of spam-like qualities. Tag Checkbox Text Enabled/Disabled, Up to 39 characters A toggle for whether confi rmed spam should be tagged with the confi gured text string. Quarantine Checkbox, Pulldown Enabled/Disabled, All address objects of type Mail Proxy A selection for an address object that should receive quarantined (redirected) confi rmed spam. Suspect Reject Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether evaluated as suspected spam should be rejected or not. Disabled by default. Advanced Threshold Text Up to 3 characters The score must receive before being categorized as suspected spam. Higher scores are more tolerant of spam-like qualities. Tag Checkbox Text Enabled/Disabled, Up to 39 characters A toggle for whether confi rmed spam should be tagged with the confi gured text string. Quarantine Checkbox, Pulldown Enabled/Disabled, All address objects of type Mail Proxy A selection for an address object that should receive quarantined (redirected) suspect spam. Anti-Virus** Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether Mail Proxy Anti-Virus should be enabled or not. Disabled by default. Reject Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether with known viruses should be rejected or not. Disabled by default. Advanced Tag Checkbox Text Enabled/Disabled, Up to 39 characters A toggle for whether with known viruses should be tagged with the confi gured text string. Quarantine Pulldown Enabled/Disabled, All defi ned address objects of type Mail Proxy A selection for an address object that should receive quarantined (redirected) with known viruses. Maximum Size Text Up to 8 characters Maximum size in kilobytes (KB) of message to scan for viruses. If this value is lower than the Mail Proxy policy s Maximum Size, may not be fully scanned for viruses. A value of 0 will scan any size . *Optional feature requires purchase separately. Requires activation code. **Optional feature requires support contract or annual maintenance contract. 236 Reference B: System Parameters

237 Content Filtering GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide The Content Filtering sub-section allows the administrator to enable and configure Content Filtering. Some of these services are optional on select GTA firewalls Proxy The Proxy sub-section allows for the configuration of the Content Filtering proxy. Table : Configure > Threat Management > Content Filtering > Proxy Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Traditional Proxy Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether or not the Content Filtering proxy should be enabled. Default is unselected. Port Text Up to 5 characters. The port through which the proxy will run. Default is Advanced Automatic Policies Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the fi rewall should automatically generate the required policies for the proxy to function. Default is selected. Log Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for enabling or disabling logging for Content Filtering. Report Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for enabling or disabling saving of Content Filtering data for reports. Transparent Proxy Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the transparent proxy should be enabled or not. Default is unselected. Block Action Action Pulldown <Use Message>, <Redirect to URL> Message Text Up to 159 characters URL Text Up to 127 characters Policies A selection for the action to be performed should a user s request be blocked. If <Use message> is selected for the ACTION, the entered message will be displayed. Default is Local policy denies access to Web page. If <Redirect to URL> is selected for the ACTION, the user will be directed to the entered URL. The Policies sub-section allows for the configuration of Content Filtering policies. Table : Configure > Threat Management > Content Filtering > Policies Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether or not the Content Filtering policy should be used. Default is unselected. Description Text Up to 79 characters/ A brief description of the Content Filtering policy. Source Address Pulldown???, <USER DEFINED>, ANY_IP, all defi ned address objects of type All or Content Filtering, * EDIT * Time Group Pulldown???, Always, all defi ned time group objects, * EDIT * If a request matches an element of the specifi ed address object, the packet will be compared to the policy. Select <* EDIT *> to defi ne a new address object. A selection to apply a time group object to the Content Filtering Policy. Reference B: System Parameters 237

238 Advanced Authentication Required Table : Configure > Threat Management > Content Filtering > Policies Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether the user should require authentication or not. Default is unselected. Destination Address Pulldown???, <USER DEFINED>, ANY_IP, all defi ned address objects of type All or Content Filtering, * EDIT * A selection for the destination address. If <USER DEFINED> is selected, enter the address manually. This fi eld is useful if the administrator wishes to restrict access based on the destination. Select <* EDIT *> to define a new address object. HTTPS Filtering Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for enabling or disabling fi ltering of https protocols. Default is enabled. Content Filtering Facilities Local Allow List Pulldown All defi ned address objects of type All or Content Filtering Use the fi rewall s Allow list. Local Deny List Pulldown All defi ned address objects of type All or Content Filtering Use the fi rewall s Deny list. Web Filtering* Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Use the Web Filtering categories list. Requires an optional Web Filtering subscription. Purchased separately. Content Blocking ActiveX Objects Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether ActiveX objects should be blocked or not. Default is unselected. Java Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether Java applets should be blocked or not. Default is unselected. Javascript Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether Javascript should be blocked or not. Default is unselected. Unknown HTTP Commands Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether Unknown HTTP commands should be blocked or not. Default is unselected. Web Filtering Categories* Accept Selection Web Filtering Categories Deny Selection Web Filtering Categories *Optional feature requires purchase separately. Requires activation code. Specify allowed Web Filtering categories. Switch a category from one list to the other by selecting the item and clicking the left or right arrow button. Web Filtering subscription must be enabled. Specify blocked Web Filtering categories. Switch a category from one list to the other by selecting the item and clicking the left or right arrow button. Web Filtering subscription must be enabled. 238 Reference B: System Parameters

239 2.11 VPN GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide The VPN section allows the administrator to enable and configure VPN IPSec Tunnels and remote access options - the Mobile IPSec Client and SSL Browser and Client. Some of these services are optional on select GTA firewalls Summary The Summary sub-section provides on overview of the firewall s configuration settings found in the VPN section. Links to containers pertaining to specific sections of the firewall s configuration are provided along the top of the screen. Containers and sub-containers can be expanded or collapsed to navigate through displayed data Certificates The Certificates section allows for the creation and configuration of certificates. Table : Configure > VPN > Certificates Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enable/Disable A selection to disable the certifi cate. Default is unselected. Name Text Up to 19 characters A unique identifi er for the certifi cate. Description Text Up to 19 characters A brief description of the certifi cate. Certificate Radio Button <Import>, <Generate> Generate Type Pulldown <Certifi cate>, <CA>, <CSR> Selection to either import a certifi cate or generate a new certifi cate. Import will allow a certifi cate to be uploaded. A selection for the certifi cate s type. <Certificate> generates a self signed certifi cate. <CA> creates a certifi cate authority. <CSR> creates a certificate for submission to a certifi cate authority. Common Name Text Up to 127 characters The certifi cate s common name. Subject Alt Name Text Up to 127 characters The certifcate s resolvable DNS name. Address Text Up to 127 characters This fi eld is pre-populated with the administrator s address. Country Pulldown Countries The certifi cate s country. State/Region Text Up to 127 characters The certifi cate s state or region. City/Locality Text Up to 127 characters The certifi cate s state or region. Organization Text Up to 127 characters The certifi cate s organization. Organizational Unit Text Up to 127 characters The certifi cate s organizational unit. Duration Text Up to 3 characters The valid duration of the certifi cate, in years. Key Size Pulldown 512, 1024, 1536, 2048 The certifi cate s key size, in bits. Larger key sizes are more CPU intensive. Import Certificate File Pulldown <DER>, <PEM>, <PKCS #12>, <PKCS #7> A selection for the certifi cate s type. Browse Button n/a Select the button to browse the certifi cate fi le s location. Password Text Up to 127 characters If the certifi cate s fi le format is PKCS #12 or PKCS #7, enter the fi le s associated password, if any. Private Key File Pulldown <DER>, <PEM> A selection for the certifi cate s private key s type. Reference B: System Parameters 239

240 Table : Configure > VPN > Certificates Browse Button n/a Select the button to browse the certifi cate s private key s location Preferences The Preferences section is used to configure IPSec options for the IPSec Client and Firewall. Table Configure > VPN > Preferences Field Field Type Value Range Description IPSec Advanced Automatic Policies Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A selection for enabling automatic policies for IPSec. FIPS Mode Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enables FIPS mode for IPSec VPNs. If FIPS mode is enabled, the fi rewall only supports 3DES and AES Encryption, and SHA Hash Algorithms. Default is disabled Remote Access The Remote Access section allows for the configuration of the IPSec Client and SSL service IPSec The IPSec sub-section allows for the configuration of the Mobile IPSec Client. Table Configure > VPN > Remote Access > IPSec Field Field Type Value Range Description Client Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enable or disable the IPSec Client. IPSec Object Pulldown???, *EDIT*, all confi gured IPSec Objects Local Network Pulldown???, <USER DEFINED>, All confi gured networks, * EDIT * Pool Network Pulldown???, <USER DEFINED>, All confi gured pool networks, * EDIT * Domain Name Text Up to 127 characters Name Server IP Address WINS Server IP Address Advanced Override Host Name Text Up to 127 characters A selection for the IPSec Object to be used by the IPSec Client. Selecting <* EDIT *> allows for the confi guration of a new IPSec Object. Select the host/subnetwork that should be accessible from the VPN. Select <* EDIT *> to defi ne a new address object. Select the DHCP pool that will be assigned to connecting clients. Select <* EDIT *> to define a new address object. Domain assigned to the Mobile IPSec Client Text IP Address DNS server(s) pushed to IPSec Client. Text IP Address WINS server(s) pushed to IPSec Client. Authentication Local Identity Pulldown IP Address, Domain, Address, Certifi cate Allows an administrator to override default fi rewall host name, which is confi gured in Network Settings. Entry can be an IP address or a fully qualifi ed host name. Firewall s identity used for mobile IPSec client connections. 240 Reference B: System Parameters

241 Table Configure > VPN > Remote Access > IPSec Field Field Type Value Range Description Method Hybrid + XAUTH Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enable or disable Hybrid + XAUTH authentication. EAP-MSCHAP(IKE) Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enable or disable EAP-MSCHAP(IKE) authentication. Pre-shared Secret Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enable or disable pre-shared secret authentication. RSA Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enable or disable RSA authentication. RSA + XAUTH Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enable or disable RSA + XAUTH authentication. Hybrid + XAUTH LDAPv3 Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enables LDAP users. RADIUS Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enables RADIUS users. Login Banner Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enable or disable the login banner message. Message Text Up to 4095 characters L2TP The L2TP sub-section allows for the configuration of L2TP remote access. Enter a message to be displayed upon logging into the IPSec Client. Table Configure > VPN > Remote Access > L2TP Field Field Type Value Range Description Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enable or disable L2TP. Interface Pulldown???, ANY, External, Protected The interface in which to access connections. Local Network Pulldown???, <USER DEFINED>, All confi gured networks, * EDIT * Pool Network Pulldown???, <USER DEFINED>, All confi gured pool networks, * EDIT * Select the host/subnetwork that should be accessible from the VPN. Select <* EDIT *> to defi ne a new address object. Select the range IP address assigned to the host connecting to the L2TP server. The Pool Address must be in a logically different network than any network assigned to the fi rewall. Select <* EDIT *> to defi ne a new address object. Name Server IP Text IP Address DNS server(s) pushed to L2TP. Address WINS Server IP Text IP Address WINS server(s) pushed to L2TP. Address Authentication Preshared Secret Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enable or disable pre-shared secret authentication. Reference B: System Parameters 241

242 Table Configure > VPN > Remote Access > L2TP Field Field Type Value Range Description Radius Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enable or disable Radius authentication. Requires Radius server and authentication for Radius confi gured on the fi rewall at Configure>Accounts> Authentication. Advanced Automatic Policies Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enable to create an automatic policy to TCP port 1723 and GRE connections to establish the L2TP session with the client. MTU Text Up to 5 characters Defi ne the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) assigned to the client. Default value is Time Out Text Up to 5 characters Defi ne the number of seconds during which a connection will stay connected during periods of inactivity in the Time Out fi eld. To prevent timing out on a connection, enter a value of 0. Debug Chat Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Select Chat to record dialing and login chat script conversations. LCP Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Select LCP to record LCP conversations. Phase Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Select Phase to record network phase conversations PPTP The PPTP sub-section allows for the configuration of PPTP remote access. Table Configure > VPN > Remote Access > PPTP Field Field Type Value Range Description Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enable or disable PPTP. Local Network Pulldown???, <USER DEFINED>, All confi gured networks, * EDIT * Pool Network Pulldown???, <USER DEFINED>, All confi gured pool networks, * EDIT * Select the host/subnetwork that should be accessible from the VPN. Select <* EDIT *> to defi ne a new address object. Select the range IP address assigned to the host connecting to the PPTP server. The Pool Address must be in a logically different network than any network assigned to the firewall. Default network is /24 Select <* EDIT *> to defi ne a new address object. Name Server IP Text IP Address DNS server(s) pushed to PPTP. Address WINS Server IP Text IP Address WINS server(s) pushed to PPTP. Address Authentication Radius Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enable or disable Radius authentication. Requires Radius server and authentication for Radius confi gured on the fi rewall at Configure>Accounts> Authentication.

243 Table Configure > VPN > Remote Access > PPTP Field Field Type Value Range Description Advanced Automatic Policies Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enable to create an automatic policy to TCP port 1723 and GRE connections to establish the PPTP session with the client. Encryption Pulldown None, 40 Bits, 56 Bits, 128 Bits, All Select the level of encryption to be used for the connection. MTU Text Up to 5 characters Defi ne the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) assigned to the client. Default value is Time Out Text Up to 5 characters Defi ne the number of seconds during which a connection will stay connected during periods of inactivity in the Time Out fi eld. To prevent timing out on a connection, enter a value of 0. Debug Chat Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Select Chat to record dialing and login chat script conversations. LCP Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Select LCP to record LCP conversations. Phase Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Select Phase to record network phase conversations Preferences The Preferences sub-section allows for the configuration Remote Access Preferences including alternative port options and SSL Browser customization. Table Configure > VPN > Remote Access > Preferences Field Field Type Value Range Description Alternative Port Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Starts the SSL Browser service. Port Text Up to 5 characters Port through which browser access will be allowed. Default is TCP port 443. Authentication LDAP Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enables LDAP users. RADIUS Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enables RADIUS users. Advanced Encryption Pulldown <None>, <SSL> Level of encryption to be used. FIPS Mode Checkbox Enabled/Disable Enables FIPS mode. Default is disabled Timeout Sessions Text minutes Defi ne the timeout range. Default is 10 minutes. Virtual Keyboard Pulldown <Disable>, <Enable>, <Force Use> Force Use: requires users to use the virtual keyboard for logins to the browser interface; Enable: allows users to use or not use the virtual keyboard; Disable: turn off the virtual keyboard Automatic Policies Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Allows the fi rewall to automatically create policies for SSL. Zone Pulldown <ANY>, <External>, <Protected>, <PSN> Source Address Pulldown???, <USER DEFINED>, All confi gured networks, * EDIT * Customization Specifi es the Zone which will be allowed to connect. Options are External, Protected, and PSN. Specifi es the source address allowed to connect. Reference B: System Parameters 243

244 Table Configure > VPN > Remote Access > Preferences Field Field Type Value Range Description Login Title Text Up to 127 characters Logo Disclaimer Upload Field JPG, GIF, PNG; 100KB max; 32 x 32 pixels Enter a customized title for the SSL Browser. Upload a logo to be displayed on the SSL login. Images must be 100 KB or less, JPEG, PNG, or GIF format. Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enable the disclaimer message to appear upon login Message Text Up to 4095 Characters Characters Remaining SSL Client Enter a disclaimer, note or welcome to appear when users login to the SSL Browser. Field Uneditable Character count fi eld detailing the number of characters remaining for the disclaimer message. Maximum characters is The SSL Client sub-section allows for the configuration the SSL Client. Table Configure > VPN > Remote Access > SSL Client Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Starts the SSL Client Service. Port Text Up to 5 characters Port for SSL Client access. Local Network Pulldown???, <USER DEFINED>, All confi gured networks, * EDIT * Default Local Protected Networks. Client DHCP Network Pulldown???, <USER DEFINED>, All confi gured networks, * EDIT * Default DHCP range of /24 Domain Text Up to 127 Domain assigned to SSL Client. characters Name Server IP Text IP address DNS server(s) pushed to SSL Client. Address WINS Server IP Text IP address WINS server pushed to SSL Client. Address Advanced Automatic Policies Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Creates an auto policy based on SSL port. Encryption Objects Pulldown All encryption Encryption used for SSL. objects FIPS Mode Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enables FIPS mode for SSL Clients. If FIPS mode is enabled, the fi rewall only supports 3DES and AES Encryption, and SHA Hash Algorithms. Default is disabled. Lifetime Text Up to 5 characters Re-key time. Allow Duplicate CN Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Allows duplicate certifi cates. 244 Reference B: System Parameters

245 Table Configure > VPN > Remote Access > SSL Client Override Host Name Text Up to 127 characters Allows an administrator to override default fi rewall host name, which is confi gured in Network Settings. Entry can be an IP address or a fully qualifi ed host name. Redirect Client Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Force all client connections via VPN. Gateway UDP Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Use UDP instead of TCP for SSL connection. Use Compression Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Disable to not use compression. Verbose Logging Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Increase SSL logging for debug purposes Site-to-Site The Site-to-Site sub-section allows for the configuration of a VPN connection when used in conjunction with VPN and encryption objects. Table a: Configure > VPN > Site-to-Site Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Enable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled Enable or disable the site to site VPN. Clicking the NEW icon or editing an existing Site-to-Site VPN will display the Edit Site-to-Site screen. Table b: Configure > VPN > Site-to-Site - IKE IPSec Key Mode Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether or not the IPSec tunnel should be disabled. Default is unselected. Description Text Up to 79 characters A brief description of the IPSec tunnel. IPSec Object Pulldown???, all defined IPSec Objects, * EDIT * Advanced IPSec Key Mode Radio Buttons IKE, Manual A selection for the IPSec Object to be used by the IP Tunnel. Selecting <* EDIT *> allows for the confi guration of a new VPN object. A selection for the IPSec Tunnel s key mode. For an IKE IPSEC KEY MODE VPN connection, select <IKE>. Notifications Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether notifi cations will be sent. SMS Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether SMS notifi cations will be sent. SNMP Trap Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether SNMP Trap notifi cations will be sent. Authentication Method Radio Buttons RSA / Pre-shared Secrets A selection for the method of authentication. Default is RSA. Pre-shared Secret Pulldown/ Text <ASCII>, <HEX>/Up to 59 characters If Pre-shared secret is selected, the ASCII or HEX format value preshared secret as defined in the VPN. This same key needs to be entered in the GTA Mobile VPN Client when confi guring the security policy. Options Failover Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle to enable failover. Send Keep Alives Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether keep alives should be sent to keep the connection alive or not. If enabled, GB-OS will send a keep alive packet every 20 seconds to maintain the connection. Default is unselected.

246 Table b: Configure > VPN > Site-to-Site - IKE IPSec Key Mode Advanced Gateway (A Primary field will always be available. A Secondary field will be available if Failover is enabled above.) Local Pulldown???, <External>, <Protected> The type of interface for the local firewall that will serve as the VPN gateway. Remote Text IP Address The IP address of the remote gateway. Identity Pull down/ Text IP Address, Domain Name, Address / Up to 127 characters A selection for the identity of the tunnel. If <Domain Name> or < Address> are selected, enter the appropriate value in the corresponding text fi eld. Available if authentication method is set to Pre-shared Secret. Local NAT Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether NAT should be applied to local VPN traffi c or not. Default is unselected. Network Pulldown???, <USER DEFINED>, all configured IP address objects of type All or VPN, * EDIT * Identity Pulldown/ Text IP Address, Domain Name, Address/Up to 127 characters Select the host/subnetwork that should be accessible from the VPN. Typically this is the protected network or PSN. Select <* EDIT *> to define a new address object. A selection for the local identity of the tunnel. If <Domain Name> or < Address> are selected, enter the appropriate value in the corresponding text fi eld. Remote NAT Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether NAT should be applied to remote VPN traffi c or not. Default is unselected. Network Pulldown/ Text???, <USER DEFINED>, all configured IP address objects of type All or VPN, * EDIT */Up to 31 characters Previously defi ned address object or an IP address of the network that resides behind the remote firewall. This can be just the part of the network to which access is desired. If <USER DEFINED> has been selected, enter the remote network s IP address manually. Select <* EDIT *> to defi ne a new address object. Not available if NAT is enabled. Table c: Configure > VPN > Site-to-Site - Manual IPSec Key Mode Field Name Field Type Value Range Description Disable Checkbox Enabled/Disabled A toggle for whether or not the IPSec tunnel should be disabled. Default is unselected. Description Text Up to 79 characters A brief description of the IPSec tunnel. IPSec Object Pulldown???, all defi ned IPSec Objects, * EDIT * Advanced IPSec Key Mode Radio Buttons IKE, Manual A selection for the IPSec Object to be used by the IP Tunnel. Selecting <* EDIT *> allows for the confi guration of a new IPSec Object. A selection for the IPSec Tunnel s key mode. For a Manual IPSEC KEY MODE VPN connection, select <Manual>. Gateway Local Pulldown???, <External>, <Protected> The type of interface for the local fi rewall that will serve as the VPN gateway. Remote Text IP Address The IP address of the remote gateway. 246 Reference B: System Parameters

247 Identity Table c: Configure > VPN > Site-to-Site - Manual IPSec Key Mode Pull down/ Text IP Address, Domain Name, Address / Up to 127 characters Local Network Pulldown???, <USER DEFINED>, All confi gured IP address objects of type All or VPN, * EDIT * Remote Network Manual Encryption Key Pulldown/ Text Pulldown/ Text Hash Key Pulldown/ Text Security Parameter Index (SPI) <USER DEFINED>, all confi gured IP address objects of type All or VPN/Up to 31 characters <ASCII>, <HEX>, Up to 59 characters <ASCII>, <HEX>/Up to 59 characters Inbound SPI Text Up to 9 characters Default is 256. Outbound SPI Text Up to 9 characters Default is 256. A selection for the identity of the tunnel. If <Domain Name> or < Address> are selected, enter the appropriate value in the corresponding text fi eld. Available if authentication method is set to Pre-shared Secret. Select the host/subnetwork that should be accessible from the VPN. Typically this is the protected network or PSN. If <USER DEFINED> has been selected, enter the local network s IP address manually. Previously defi ned address object or an IP address of the network that resides behind the remote fi rewall. This can be only the part of the network to which access is desired. If <USER DEFINED> has been selected, enter the remote network s IP address manually. ASCII or hexadecimal format value encryption key as defi ned in VPN. ASCII or hexadecimal format value hash algorithm for the authentication transformation. Reference B: System Parameters 247

248 C Utilities 248

249 Reference C: Utilities GBAuth This chapter describes the utility software used in conjunction with your GTA Firewall UTM Appliance. If authentication is required by a policy or tunnel, a user accessing the GTA Firewall UTM Appliance may use the GBAuth utility to authenticate themselves. This is done by entering the GTA Authentication, LDAP or RADIUS name and password into GBAuth before initiating a connection. To use authentication, both the desired authentication method and a user authentication remote access policy must be enabled and configured on the GTA firewall. GBAuth is a platform-independent, Java application. Install the software on the computer from which authentication will be used. As long as data is being exchanged, GBAuth automatically re-authenticates. To manually close GBAuth, either right-click on the system tray icon and select Close or click the DISCONNECT button. Note All data is sent from GBAuth to the fi rewall via SSL. GBAuth Download via Firewall Interface GBAuth is available for download via the firewall remote access portal for all users which have the IPSec Remote Access Client or SSL Remove Access client enabled. Using GBAuth for GTA Authentication Figure C.1: Downloading GBAuth To use GTA Authentication: The authentication feature must be enabled on the GTA firewall. A user authentication remote access policy must be configured and enabled on the GTA firewall. Users must be created on the GTA firewall. Users must have the GBAuth client installed on their computer. To authenticate with the firewall using GBAuth, users enter values from Configure>Accounts>Users: 1. Enter the name or IP address of the firewall in the FIREWALL field, or if previously entered, they can select it from the pulldown menu. 2. Enter the user s identity in format in the IDENTITY field, or if previously entered, they can select it from the pulldown menu. 3. Click the CONNECT button. 4. If you are authenticating for the first time, or if the SSL certificate was recently changed, a security alert may appear. If you know the certificate is correct, click YES. 5. The cursor will move to the RESPONSE field. Enter the password from Configuration>Accounts> Users, and click Connect. Should the identity or password not be recognized, an Authentication Failed notice will appear. If the information is correct, the unlocked padlock icon will replace itself with a locked padlock icon, indicating that other actions can now be performed, e.g., initiating a VPN connection through the firewall. Reference C: Utilities 249

250 Figure C.2: GBAuth Field Name Firewall Identity Challenge Response Table C.1: GBAuth for GTA Authentication Description Name or IP address of the GTA fi rewall. Login data provided to the user: the value from the User s IDENTITY fi eld. The fi eld allows up to 127 characters and is case sensitive. N/A Alphanumeric password from the User s PASSWORD fi eld under Authentication. Using GBAuth for LDAP Authentication To use LDAPv3 Authentication: The Authentication and LDAPv3 features must both be enabled on the GTA firewall. A user authentication remote access policy must be configured on the GTA firewall. The LDAP server must be configured with users, domains and passwords. Users must have the GBAuth client installed on their computer. To authenticate with the firewall using LDAP: 1. Enter the name or IP address of the firewall in the FIREWALL field, or if previously entered, they can select it from the pulldown menu. 2. Either the cn and ou identifier plus the value in the user s Identity field using the format User Name. 3. Click the CONNECT button. 4. The cursor will move to the RESPONSE field. Enter the users s password from the LDAP server. Should the identity or password not be recognized, an Authentication Failed notice will appear. If the information is correct, the unlocked padlock icon will replace itself with a locked padlock icon, indicating that other actions can now be performed, e.g., initiating a VPN connection through the firewall. Field Name Firewall Identity Challenge Response Table C.2: GBAuth for LDAP Authentication Description Name or IP Address of the GTA fi rewall. Login data provided to the user: cn (common name) and ou (organizational unit) combined. Do not enter the cn= identifi er, this will be prepended when the data is sent to the LDAP server. The fi eld allows up to 127 characters and is case sensitive. N/A Alphanumeric password specifi ed for the user on the LDAP server. 250 Reference C: Utilities

251 Using GBAuth for RADIUS Authentication GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide To use RADIUS Authentication: The Authentication and RADIUS features must both be enabled on the GTA firewall. A user authentication remote access policy must be configured on the GTA firewall. The RADIUS server must be configured. Users must have the GBAuth client installed on their computer. To authenticate with the firewall using RADIUS: 1. Enter the name or IP address of the firewall in the FIREWALL field, or if previously entered, they can select it from the pulldown menu. 2. Enter the RADIUS identity. 3. Click the CONNECT button. 4. The cursor will move to the RESPONSE field. Enter the user s password from the Radius server. Should the identity or password not be recognized, an Authentication Failed notice will appear. If the information is correct, the unlocked padlock icon will replace itself with a locked padlock icon, indicating that other actions can now be performed, e.g., initiating a VPN connection through the firewall. Field Name Firewall Identity Challenge Response Table C.3: GBAuth for RADIUS Authentication Description Name or IP Address of the GTA fi rewall. Login data provided to the user, specifi ed on the RADIUS server. The fi eld allows up to 127 characters and is case sensitive. N/A Alphanumeric pre-shared secret (password) specified for the user in the RADIUS section of Authentication. This field is case sensitive. Reference C: Utilities 251

252 GTA SSOAuth If authentication is required by a policy or tunnel, a user may authenticate through use of the GTA SSOAuth service. To utilize the GTA SSOAuth service, install the service and configuration utility on all Active Directory servers (up to three) in the domain on which the service will be utilized. In order to make a secure connection between the firewall and the GTA SSOAuth service, all Active Directory servers must have a valid SSL certificate. It is required that each servers SSL certificate be imported into the GTA Firewall UTM Appliance. Repeat this process for configuring each additional GTA SSOAuth service, as necessary, on up to three Active Directory servers. When a user attempts to login using an enabled authentication policy, the firewall will contact each configured GTA SSOAuth service until a matching IP address is found for the client machine. If the IP address is associated with a vaild domain user, the user s group and user name are provided to the firewall. The firewall then checks the group s configured security policies to determine whether or not the user is allowed access to the client machine. Note All data sent between the GTA SSOAuth service and the fi rewall is encrypted via SSL. The GTA SSOAuth configuration utility has the ability to easily start/stop the GTA SSOAuth service and to apply configuration changes. CAUTION Applying confi guration changes will stop and restart the GTA SSOAuth service, which will purge the database of authenticated domain users. The database will repopulate automatically as domain users authenticate. Note For GTA SSOAuth requirements and installation, refer to the GTA SSOAuth Guide. Using Active Directory Single Sign-On To use Active Directory Single Sign-On Authentication and the Active Directory Single Sign-On features must both be enabled on the GTA firewall. A user authentication remote access policy must be configured on the GTA firewall. A Single Sign-On server must be configured. To authenticate with the firewall using Active Directory Single Sign-On: 1. A user authenticates by logging onto the Windows Active Directory domain using a client machine. 2. Any access through the firewall (using a policy that requires authentication) is then verified by the GTA SSOAuth service to validate the domain user s access. 252 Reference C: Utilities Figure C.3: GTA SSOAuth

253 Field Name Mode Valid Duration Port Server (Client mode only) Service Certificate Database Table C.4: Active Directory Single Sign-On Authentication Description GTA SSOAuth service operates in two modes, either Server or Client. Client mode can only be utilized if more than one Active Directory server is running GTA SSOAuth. Server mode allows fi rewalls to connect directly to the Active Directory server to query its database of authenticated domain users. When a direct connection between the Active Directory server and the fi rewall is not available, client mode is utilized. Client mode will connect to a GTA SSOAuth service running in server mode to propagate domain authentication information. The amount of time an authenticated domain user remains in the GTA SSOAuth database before requiring the user to reauthenticate with the domain. The SSL port the GTA SSOAuth service uses for fi rewall and GTA SSOAuth client connections. The address of a GTA SSOAuth service running in server mode. Starts or stops the GTA SSOAuth Service. Exports the Active directory server certifi cate. If not highlighted, this indicates the Active Directory server certificate may not be valid. Show Contents in the Event Log: Exports current database to the Windows Event log. Clear: Clears the entire authenticated user database. Clearing the database may force users to re-login to their systems. Reference C: Utilities 253

254 D Upgrading 254

255 Upgrading to GB-OS 6.2 In order to determine what upgrade path is required for upgrading to GB-OS 6.2, you must first establish the version from which you will be upgrading. To do so, login to your GTA firewall using the Web interface. Upon logging in, navigate to (Configure>Configuration>Runtime>Update). Located at the top of this page is the current GB-OS version. Figure D.1: Locating the GB-OS Version Number in Web User Interface Based on the version of GB-OS your GTA firewall is currently running: If the version number is 6.1.x follow the instructions in Upgrading from GB-OS 6.1.x. If the version number is 6.0.x or below follow the instructions in the one of the previous upgrade guides found in the document section of GTA s website. You must be on GB-OS 6.1.x in order to upgrade to GB-OS 6.2. If your system is not on GB-OS 6.1.x then you will need to upgrade it to version 6.1.x before you will be able to upgrade to GB-OS 6.2. Note GTA recommends to read and review the Upgrade Notes section of this reference before upgrading a GTA Firewall UTM Appliance to avoid complications during the upgrade process Note Test mode confi guration data is reset to default when upgrading runtimes. Upgrading from GB-OS 6.1.x GTA routinely publishes updates to GB-OS. These updates provide new features and enhanced security options. When GTA publishes an update to GB-OS, availability will be announced at Configure>Configuration>Runtime>Update in the AVAILABLE UPDATE(S) section. In order to check for available updates, GB-OS requires that the firewall is registered in the GTA Online Support Center, that the firewall has access to the Internet and that SSL connections are allowed. Version updates may be available only to firewalls covered by a valid support contract. Note Updating the GB-OS runtime always takes place as a Live Mode change. To check for and install updates to GB-OS: Navigate to Configure>Configuration>Runtime>Update. In the AVAILABLE UPDATE(S) section, click the CHECK NOW button. If an update is available, installation notes and an INSTALL button will appear for the update. Reference D: Upgrading 255

256 Figure D.2: Updating GB-OS Updating Runtimes GB-250, GB-300, GB-820, GB-850, GB-2100 and GB-2500 firewall appliance families running GB-OS 6.1.x will have a two step process for updating runtimes. 1. Download the available runtime by clicking DOWNLOAD. The runtime will be stored on the firewall until installed. Rebooting the firewall or selecting CHECK NOW will remove the stored runtime. 2. Install the runtime by clicking INSTALL. Figure D.3: Download Runtime Figure D.4: Install Runtime Scheduling Checks for Automatic Updates GB-OS can automatically check for eligible software updates. By enabling automatic update check, administrators can rest assured knowing their GTA Firewall UTM Appliance is operating the most current available version of GB-OS. To schedule automatic update checks, navigate to Configure>Configuration>Runtime>Update. Figure D.5: Scheduling Automatic Update Checks Table D.1: Scheduling Automatic Updates Field Description Schedule Update Check Enable Select the ENABLE checkbox to schedule automatic update checks. 256 Reference D: Upgrading

257 Frequency Day Time Select the frequency that GB-OS will check for updates. Options are Daily and Weekly. Select the day that GB-OS will check for updates. Select the time that GB-OS will check for updates. Performing a Manual Software Update If a new version of GB-OS has been indicated at Configure>Configuration>Runtime>Update, administrators can log into the GTA Support Center ( to download the runtime. If available updates cannot be applied to the firewall, contact the GTA Sales staff (sales@gta.com) or your local GTA Channel Partner for information on support contracts. Step 1: Generate GB-OS 6.2 Feature Activation Codes In order to upgrade your version of GB-OS to version 6.2, first you must generate GB-OS 6.2 feature activation codes from the GTA Online Support Center ( Login to the GTA Online Support Center and navigate to the View Products page. The View Products page displays all products registered with GTA. If your firewall is eligible for the upgrade, an UPGRADE TO link will be available in the ACTION row. Click the link to generate the GB-OS 6.2 feature activation code(s). Now that the GB-OS 6.2 feature activation codes have been generated, they must be loaded into the firewall s configuration. Step 2: Load GB-OS 6.2 Feature Activation Codes Into the Configuration Log in to your firewall using an administrative account and navigate to (Configure>System>Activation Codes). Clicking the New button will allow you to paste your activation code into this section. After clicking the OK button, save this section to keep your new code(s). If entered correctly, the row s description should display GB-XX Registered, where XX is your GTA firewall s model number. Now that the GB-OS 6.2 feature activation codes have been loaded into the firewall s configuration, the GB-OS 6.2 runtime file must be uploaded. Step 3: Upgrade to GB-OS 6.2 After the GB-OS 6.2 feature activation codes have been successfully inserted into the firewall s configuration, you may upgrade the firewall to GB-OS 6.2. To obtain the GB-OS 6.2 runtime, login to the GTA Online Support Center ( center/) and navigate to Downloads>System Software. Select the appropriate GB-OS 6.2 runtime for your firewall (e.g., if you are upgrading a GB-2100, select the GB-2100 FIREWALL runtime file saved for your operating system under the 6.2 section). Download and extract the runtime file to an easy to remember location on your workstation, such as the desktop (if you are running Microsoft Windows, the runtime will extract to C:\Program Files\GTA\GB-X-6.2\GB-X-62.rtm, where X is the GTA firewall s model number). Next, login to your GTA firewall using an administrative account and navigate to Configure>Configuration>R untime>update and click the ADVANCED tab. In the RUNTIME section, click the BROWSE button and select the runtime. The file will have an extension of.rtm. Select UPLOAD to upload the runtime file. GB-OS will then validate the file. If it is valid, the system will install it. Reference D: Upgrading 257

258 Upgrade Notes Figure D.6: Manually Updating Your Firewall s Software The following are noted issues that may occur when upgrading to GB-OS 6.2. GB-250 Rev A No Longer Supported GB-250 Rev A firewalls are no longer supported in GB-OS To determine if your GB-250 firewall is Rev A or Rev B: GB-250 Rev A firewalls do not have USB ports, while GB-250 Rev B firewalls do have USB ports. GB-250 Rev B serial numbers are and above, and and above. IPS Activation Codes Starting with GB-OS 6.2.0, separate IPS activaction codes are no longer required. GB-Ware Compact Flash Adapters Boards & ATA/IDE Cable Compatibility WARNING Before checking your hardware for compatibility, turn off the power to your firewall and disconnect all power cables. Adapter Boards GB-Ware running GB-OS and above will no longer support the CFDISK.1B or CFDISK.1C IDE/ Compact Flash Adapter from PC Engines. Any GB-Ware firewall using the CFDISK.1B IDE or CFDISK.1C IDE/Compact Flash Adapter boards should have the adapter board replaced prior to upgrading to GB-OS and above. To determine which adapter board is installed in your GB-Ware firewall, physically examine the board. Model Number CFDISK.1E must appear on the board in order for it to be supported for GB-OS and above. Figure D.10: Supported CFDISK.1E Adapter Board 258 Reference D: Upgrading

259 Conductor ATA Cables Figure D.11: Unsupported CFDISK.1C Adapter Board GB-Ware running GB-OS and above will no longer support 40-Conductor ATA cables. GB-Ware running GB-OS or above should use an 80-conductor cable, which supports Ultra DMA IDE/ATA. To determine which conducter cable is used, physically examine the cable by counting the number of lines present on the cable itself. Figure D.12: Supported 80-Conductor Ultra ATA/IDE Cable Figure D.13: Unsupported 40-Conductor ATA/IDE Cable Re-sizing Slices and Runtime Upgrades Reference D: Upgrading 259

260 In order to support the new features in GB-OS 6.2, some firewalls may require partition re-sizing during the upgrade process. Upon re-sizing, both runtime slices will have GB-OS 6.1, and firewall administrators WILL NOT be able to revert to previous runtimes via the Console or Web interface. CAUTION GTA strongly recommends backing up current fi rewall confi gurations PRIOR to upgrading. Firewalls requiring re-sized partitions will take approximately 5-8 minutes to reboot and fully update once the runtime has been applied. DO NOT switch off or reboot the fi rewall during this process. Error Messages Upon Initial Reboot Upon rebooting after successful installation, the GTA Firewall UTM Appliance may display errors when accessed using the Web interface. This is expected, these errors are generated because the browser s cache is trying to access files and locations that no longer apply. Click OK to any displayed errors and refresh the browser window to access GB-OS 6.2. If the error messages persist, clear your browser s cache. GB-250 Upgrade Notice GB-250 Firewall UTM Appliances may reboot multiple times, and may install GB-OS 6.2 on both memory slices during the upgrade process. It is important that administrators do not shut down their firewall when upgrading to GB-OS 6.2. If GB-OS 6.2 is installed on both memory slices, it will not be possible to revert back to the previously installed version of GB-OS. Corrupt Object Names and Descriptions GB-OS 6.2 uses the UTF-8 character set, wherein the past previous versions of GB-OS allowed administrators to select the character set according to their locale. When upgrading to GB-OS 6.2, it is necessary to match your Web browser s character set with the character set used by GB-OS. 260 Reference D: Upgrading

261 E Log Messages 261

262 Reference E: Log Messages By default, firewall log messages are kept locally on the firewall. If you have enabled remote logging, log messages may also be sent to an external log. External logging can provide extra reporting on firewall activity and attack analysis. GB-OS firewall log messages follow WELF logging standards. To view firewall logs kept locally on the firewall, navigate to Monitor>Log Messages. System Notices Hardware Errors Hardware messages include physical connectivity or memory errors. They are always logged. Failed Network Connectivity Hardware errors most commonly indicate that the network interface (Ethernet port) is not operational, possibly due to a disconnected or failed network cable. The key identifier for failure of a network port is the word interface in the msg attribute. Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=4 msg= alarm: Interface EXTERNAL (rl1) down type=mgmt PPP, PPPoE and PPTP interface errors all log as failed PPP interfaces. Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=6 msg= PPP1: [PPP1] can t connect bypass,link0 and [b]:,session-ppp1: File exists type=mgmt If another host is using the firewall s broadcast IP address and attempts to modify the firewall s IP address, the MAC address of the host will be logged. Check IP addresses and netmasks assigned to hosts on the local network. The key identifier for this type of message is attempts to modify permanent entry. Implicit Policies Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=3 msg= kernel: arp: 00:d0:68:04:98:b5 attempts to modify permanent entry for on en1 type=mgmt Some firewall policies are implemented automatically based upon services running on the firewall. By default, automatic policy activations (immutable firewall behaviors) are logged. The key identifier for automatic policies is POLICY: ATP. Automatic policies are logically necessary for expected firewall operation. Automatic Accept All policies are merely a shorthand way of specifying remote access, outbound, or other policy application for a whole set of IP addresses or ports, rather than entering each one. Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com POLICY: ATP (5) accept - notice ICMP [ :3]->[ :3] External l=32 f=0x3. Other Firewall Behaviors Some firewall behaviors, such as dropping invalid or fragmented TCP packets, are not an explicit connection refusal or acceptance, but nonetheless part of loggable firewall behavior. Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com POLICY: Rejecting invalid packet: warning TCP [ :0]->[ :0] Protected l=20 f=0x0 Additionally, some remote access or other types of policies have special rules called Automatic Accept All policies; these policies cause the remote access or other policy rule to be applied to all IP addresses or ports, rather than just those manually specified. 262 Reference E: Log Messages

263 Ping Flood/DoS Attack (ICMP Limiting) GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide ICMP Limiting is logged by default. When excessive pings are executed against the firewall or its networks, such as during a denial of service (DoS) or distributed denial of service (DDoS) attack, the firewall limits the number of ICMP/ping packets it will process per second to maintain normal traffic throughput. The key identifier for this event s message is Limiting ICMP ping responses. Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=4 msg= POLICY: Limiting ICMP ping responses from 149 to 100 packets per second. type=mgmt TCP SYN Flood Excessive TCP SYN signals, indicative of a SYN flood attack, may be blocked and logged according to preferences. The key identifiers for this kind of message include Blocking TCP SYN flood attack. Jan 1 00:02:04 pri=4 msg= kernel: Blocking TCP SYN flood attack (4416) type=mgmt Spoof Attempt IP address spoof attempts are logged by default. In this example, a packet is arriving on PROTECTED eth0 (protected network interface) destined for the external network. The protected network consists of only /24, but the sender IP address is not part of that logical network ( ). Therefore, the packet is considered a spoof, since it should be arriving on the EXTERNAL interface (eth1). The key identifier for this type of message is Possible spoof in the msg attribute. Jan 12 09:03:19 pri=4 pol _ action=block count=1 msg= Possible spoof, return interface doesn t match arrival interface proto=icmp src= srcport=8 dst= dstport=8 interface= PROTECTED returninterface= EXTERNAL attribute=alarm Stealth Mode Blocked Message Stealth Mode with logging enabled. Configured at Configure>Security Policies>Preferences. Jan 6 12:59:46 pri=4 pol _ action=block count=2 msg= Stealth mode duration= proto=icmpv4 country=us src= srcport=0 dst= dstport=0 interface= EXTERNAL-eth4 Door Knob Twist (Attempted Connect to Closed Port) Door knob twists are logged by default. When a packet arrives for a closed port, attempting to open a connection for attack purposes, the firewall blocks the attempt by default. The key identifier for this type of message is Connect to closed port in the msg attribute. Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=3 pol _ type=default msg= Connect to closed port proto=23/tcp src= srcport=1036 dst= dstport=23 interface=external flags=0x2 FTP Bounce For this attack type, the FTP session is immediately dropped and all successive connections are denied as unexpected. The key identifiers for this kind of message include FTP: illegal access attempt and an access attempt from an IP address that differs from the original source of the FTP connection. Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=4 msg= FTP: illegal access attempt ( ) inbound, pass through proto=21/tcp src= srcport=32876 dst= dstport=21 rule=1 Mar 4 21:06:45 pri=4 pol _ action=block count=1 msg= Packet unexpected proto=21/ tcp src= srcport=32876 dst= dstport=21 interface=sis1 flags=0x18 Reference E: Log Messages 263

264 User Licenses By default, exceeding the count of licensed users on the firewall or a firewall option is logged. The method of counting user licenses may vary by feature; generally, however, unique host IP addresses or addresses are counted as one user for a particular service. Maximum Firewall Users Exceeded Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=3 msg= NAT: Max of 25 simultaneous hosts reached ( denied). type=mgmt Maximum Web Filtering Users Exceeded Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=4 msg= proxywww: Surf Sentinel host licenses reached (25), denied. type=mgmt Configuration Changes by User Changes made to the firewall s configuration are logged with the administrator account used. The key identifier for this kind of message is the user= tag. Mar 8 19:56:30 pri=5 msg= WWWadmin: Add address object Protected Networks. type=mgmt user= fwadmin src= srcport=52334 dst= dstport=443 Automatic Backup USB drive not connected or identified. Aug 24 10:08:25 pri=3 msg= XMLverify: Unable to backup configuration to USB device type=mgmt Aug 24 10:08:25 pri=3 msg= XMLverify: Unable to mount USB device type=mgmt USB device is full. Aug 24 15:54:19 pri=3 msg= WWWadmin: Unable to copy configuration backup to USB device. No space left on device type=mgmt user= fwadmin src= srcport=60695 dst= dstport=443 duration=86 Cannot back up USB is read only drive. Aug 29 12:51:05 pri=4 msg= WWWadmin: Mounted MSDOS filesystem as readonly type=mgmt user= fwadmin src= srcport=51064 dst= dstport=443 duration=43 Configured password is not correct. If the configured password for the configuration file and the automatic backup section do not match, or if the cloud service password is incorrect, error messages will be logged. Aug 15 09:37:52 pri=3 msg= WWWadmin: Unable to delete file GB-Ware _ v620 _ gb-ware _ Live _ _ _ EDT.7z from cloud type=mgmt user= fwadmin src= srcport=49966 dst= dstport=443 duration=197 Aug 15 09:37:52 pri=4 msg= WWWadmin: Unable to open old configuration. No error: 0 type=mgmt user= fwadmin src= srcport=49966 dst= dstport=443 duration=197 Aug 15 09:37:52 pri=3 msg= WWWadmin: Unable to uncompress input file; No such file or directory type=mgmt user= fwadmin src= srcport=49966 dst= dstport=443 duration=197 Aug 15 09:37:52 pri=4 msg= WWWadmin: Program 7za exited with code 2. type=mgmt user= fwadmin src= srcport=49966 dst= dstport=443 duration= Reference E: Log Messages

265 Permission/Policy Notices Allowed Connections To allow a connection to the firewall, two components are required: permission and routing rules. Permission for the connection can be granted by either an outbound policy or a remote access policy. Routing for permitted connections can be created via NAT or passthrough. By default, if a packet matches an acceptance policy/rule regardless of destination (inbound, outbound or directly to the firewall) it will be logged. The message includes the policy type (designated as OBP, RAP, NAT PASS, or SSL ), the policy number, the word accept, log priority level, protocol, source IP, source port, destination IP, destination port, network interface, packet length and TCP flags if appropriate. Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= fi rewall pri=5 pol _ type=obp pol _ action=pass msg= Accept OBP (2) rule=2 proto=500/udp src= srcport=500 dst= dstport=500 interface=sis0 Inbound Security Policy Inbound security policies create permission for inbound connections. The key identifier for inbound connection messages is incoming in the msg attribute. When an authorized inbound connection is made via an inbound security policy (for permission) and a passthrough or NAT tunnel (for routing), three possible log messages can be generated. By default, one is created only when the session is closed. To generate a log message when an inbound session is started, enable the TUNNEL OPENS field in Preferences under Security Policies. The log messages for a permitted inbound connection are almost identical in both the open and close messages, except that the close message contains connection information such as duration, packets sent/received and bytes transmitted. The IP address/port pairs in the log message detail the route of the packet. Note There is no explicit tag in the log message indicating that the packet was permitted, since the log message indicates this implicitly by logging the opened connection. Open Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=5 msg= Open incoming NAT tunnel proto=80/tcp src= srcport=4175 nat= natport=80 dst= dstport=80 Close Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=5 msg= Allow incoming NAT tunnel proto=80/tcp src= srcport=4175 nat= natport=80 dst= dstport=80 duration=22 sent=144 rcvd=120 Reference E: Log Messages 265

266 FTP Port Updating FTP connections may require some additional negotiation for the opening connection. During this exchange, the port may be updated (but this will only be logged if you have also elected to log opening connections). The initial opening port is logged as port 0 until the actual connection port is determined, and an updated port is logged. This occurs for both tunneled (NAT) and passthrough connections. The key indicator of a port update is Update in the msg attribute. Mar 4 21:14:43 pri=5 msg= Open inbound, NAT proto=54834/tcp src= srcport=0 nat= natport=54834 dst= dstport=54834 rule=1 Mar 4 21:14:43 pri=5 msg= Update inbound, NAT proto=54834/tcp src= srcport=2053 nat= natport=54834 dst= dstport=54834 rule=1 Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=5 msg= Open outbound, pass through proto=1988/tcp src= srcport=0 dst= dstport=1988 rule=1 Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=5 msg= Update outbound, pass through proto=1988/tcp src= srcport=20 dst= dstport=1988 rule=1 Outbound Outbound policies create permission for NATed connections. The key identifier for outbound connection messages is outbound in the msg attribute. When an authorized outbound connection is made, two possible log messages can be generated. By default, one is created only when the session is closed. To generate a log message when an outbound session is created, enable the TUNNEL CLOSES field in Preferences under Security Policies (enabled by default). The log messages for a permitted outbound request are almost identical for an open and close messages, except that the close message contains connection information such as duration, packets sent/received, and bytes transmitted. An outbound request can be identified by the direction the arrows are pointing in the Active Connections list: left for inbound and right for outbound. The IP address/port pairs in the log message detail the route of the packet. The packet below shows an outbound request from the protected network to a web server on the Internet. Note There is no explicit tag in the log message indicating that the packet was permitted, since the log message indicates this implicitly by logging the opened connection. Open Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=5 msg= Open outbound NAT proto=80/tcp src= srcport=1683 nat= natport=1683 dst= dstport=80 rule=2 Close Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=5 msg= Allow outgoing NAT cat _ action=pass dstname=www. soliton.co.jp proto=80/tcp src= srcport=1684 nat= natport=1684 dst= dstport=80 rule=2 op=get arg=/img/privacy _ txt.gif duration=50 sent=777 rcvd= Reference E: Log Messages

267 Successful Administrative Access Attempts GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide When a successful access attempt is made from the web interface, a log entry is created for the first access. Since HTTP is stateless and continuous connections are not maintained, each subsequent access from the same authenticated host is not logged (as if it is automatically authenticated). Once an hour, however, a successful access entry is added to the log if the same HTTP session is still in existence. A successful log message for a web interface administrative access includes the tag WWWadmin, a message indicating remote administration access, and the IP address of the client s computer. Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=5 msg= WWWadmin: Remote administration access. type=mgmt src= srcport=1107 dst= dstport=443 When a successful access attempt is made from console, a log message is generated. The message includes the tag cci (console command interface) and a message indicating a successful administrative access. Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=5 msg= cci: Successful administration login. type=mgmt Denied Connections By default, if a packet is denied access either explicitly by a policy or implicitly by the default rule (deny all unless explicitly allowed) it will be logged. The log message includes the policy type (OBP: outbound, IBP: inbound, NAT: NAT or PASS: pass through), the policy number, the word block, log priority level, protocol, source IP, source port, destination IP, destination port, the word alarm if an alarm was generated due to policy settings, network interface, packet length and TCP flags if appropriate. Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=4 pol _ type=rap pol _ action=block msg= Block RAP (20) rule=20 proto=23/tcp src= srcport=1601 dst= dstport=23 interface=ppp0 attribute= alarm flags=0x2 Inbound Oct 16 14:33:56 pri=4 pol _ type=ibp pol _ action=block count=3 msg= Block IBP duration= rule=7 proto=31645/udp src= srcport=53 dst= dstport= (1), (1), (1) interface= 10 NET attribute= alarm,report Outbound Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=4 pol _ type=obp pol _ action=block msg= Block OBP proto=80/tcp src= srcport=1755 dst= dstport=80 interface=protected flags=0x2 Block By Country Jan 5 13:16:58 pri=4 pol _ type=cbp pol _ action=block count=1 msg= Block CBP proto=23563/tcp country=cn src= srcport=80 dst= dstport=23563 interface= EXTERNAL flags=0x14 CBP = Country IP Reference E: Log Messages 267

268 Unsuccessful Administrative Access Attempts When an unsuccessful access attempt is made from the web interface, a log message is generated. The message includes the tag WWWadmin and a message indicating a failed remote administrative access attempt along with the IP address of the client s host system. The first message indicates a failed login without coalescing enabled, while the second message indicates a failed login with coalescing enabled. Login failure represents a bad user ID/password combination and Remote indicates the access attempt was via IP. Jan 6 14:14:27 pri=4 msg= WWWadmin: Remote login failure type=mgmt user= foobar src= srcport=2230 dst= dstport=443 count=1 Jan 6 14:15:46 pri=4 msg= WWWadmin: Remote login failures type=mgmt user= foo src= srcport=2231 dst= dstport=443 duration=43 count=2 When an unsuccessful access attempt is made from the console, a log message is generated. Console indicates the access attempt was via console. Jan 6 14:18:12 pri=4 msg= WWWadmin: Console login failure type=mgmt user= foobar dst= dstport=443 duration=58 count=1 Web Interface Compromise Attempt Remote management using a web browser normally uses SSL; attempts to access the administrative interface without SSL may therefore represent a compromise attempt. (Although the web interface can be configured to operate without SSL encryption, this can compromise your security, and is not recommended.) The WWWadmin tag indicates that the message is associated with web interface remote administration access. The first example indicates that a remote host ( ) connected to the firewall on the web interface port (by default 443 for SSL or 80 for non-ssl). The next message indicates that the connection was rejected as a key could not be negotiated. This could indicate that SSL was not running, or that an attempt to compromise the firewall was made via the web interface). Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=5 msg= WWWadmin: Remote administration access. type=mgmt src= srcport=1028 dst= dstport=443 Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=4 msg= WWWadmin: Unable to establish SSL session type=mgmt src= srcport=1028 dst= dstport= 443 duration=2 When an unsuccessful access attempt is made from the console, a log message is generated. The message includes the tag cci and a message indicating a failed access attempt. Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=4 msg= cci: Password verification failure. type=mgmt Routing Notices Permitted connections require a valid route to reach their destinations. Routing may be achieved with either a NAT tunnel, to hide internal IP addresses from untrusted networks, or with a pass through policy to make internal IP addresses apparent to untrusted networks. If selected, any arriving packets matching a protocol on any of the firewall s network interfaces can be logged. The log message includes the protocol, source IP, source port, destination IP, destination port, network card (NIC), packet length and TCP flags if appropriate. Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=6 pol _ type=rap pol _ action=pass msg= Received (4) rule=4 proto= 443/TCP src= srcport=1599 dst= dstport=443 interface=sis0 flags=0x11 Inbound or outbound connections are evaluated for permission before routes are constructed. This means that logs for remote access or outbound policy (which affect permission) appear before their corresponding NAT or pass through policy (which affect routing) message. 268 Reference E: Log Messages

269 ICMP Types and Codes GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide ICMP log messages have sections indicating the ICMP type and the ICMP code. In the log message below, srcport & dstport indicate the ICMP Type while the flags indicate the ICMP Code. Aug 1 11:47:46 pri=4 pol _ action=block count=1 msg= Packet invalid rule=1 proto=icmpv4 src= srcport=3 dst= dstport=3 interface= PROTECTED-192 flags=0x7 Full details on ICMP parameters can be found here: icmp-parameters.xml IPv6 parameters are also available here: parameters.xml ICMP Types Log messages can be identified by their type as follows: Type Name 0 Echo Reply 1 Unassigned 2 Unassigned 3 Destination Unreachable 4 Source Quench 5 Redirect 6 Alternate Host Address 7 Unassigned 8 Echo 9 Router Advertisement 10 Router Solicitation 11 Time Exceeded 12 Parameter Problem 13 Timestamp 14 Timestamp Reply 15 Information Request 16 Information Reply 17 Address Mask Request 18 Address Mask Reply 19 Reserved Reserved 30 Traceroute 31 Datagram Conversion Error 32 Mobile Host Redirect 33 IPv6 Where-Are-You 34 IPv6 I-Am-Here 35 Mobile Registration Request 36 Mobile Registration Reply 37 Domain Name Request 38 Domain Name Reply ICMPv4 Log Message - Type Reference E: Log Messages 269

270 ICMPv4 Log Message - Type Type Name 39 SKIP 40 Photuris 41 ICMP messages utilized by experimental mobility protocols Reserved ICMPv6 Log Message - Type Type Name 0 Source Route 1 Nimrod 2 Type 2 Routing Header Unassigned 253 RFC3692-style Experiment RFC3692-style Experiment Reserved ICMP Codes Many of the ICMP types have codes - listed below: ICMPv4 Type 3 - Destination Unreachable Code Description 0 Net Unreachable 1 Host Unreachable 2 Protocol Unreachable 3 Port Unreachable 4 Fragmentation Needed and Don t Fragment was Set 5 Source Route Failed 6 Destination Network Unknown 7 Destination Host Unknown 8 Source Host Isolated 9 Communication with Destination Network is Administratively Prohibited 10 Communication with Destinaation Host is Administratively Prohibited 11 Destination Network Unreachable for Type of Service 12 Destination Host Unreachable for Type of Service 13 Communication Administratively Prohibited 14 Host Precedence Violation 15 Precedence cutoff in effect 270 Reference E: Log Messages

271 ICMPv4 Type 5 - Redirect Code Description 0 Redirect Datagram for the Network (or subnet) 1 Redirect Datagram for the Host 2 Redirect Datagram for the Type of Service and Network 3 Redirect Datagram for the Type of Service and Host ICMPv4 Type 6 - Alternate Host Address Code Description 0 Alternate Address for Host ICMPv4 Type 9 - Router Advertisement Code Description 0 Normal Router Advertisement 16 Does not route common traffi c ICMPv4 Type 11 - Time Exceeded Code Description 0 Time to Live exceeded in Transit 1 Fragment Reassembly Time Exceeded ICMPv4 Type 12 - Parameter Problem Code Description 0 Pointer indicates the error 1 Missing a required option 2 Bad length Code Description 0 Bad SPI 1 Authentication Failed 2 Decompresssion Failed 3 Decryption Failed 4 Need Authentication 5 Need Authorization ICMPv4 Type 40- Photuris OSPF Mis-matched key or mis-matched password in OSPF authentication. Apr 17 18:01:48 pri=4 msg= ospfd: interface fxp3: : auth-type mismatch, local 2, rcvd 0, router-id type=mgmt Apr 17 19:12:26 pri=4 msg= ospfd: interface sis0: : auth-type mismatch, local 0, rcvd 2, router-id type=mgmt Reference E: Log Messages 271

272 Network Address Translation (NAT) Connections using NAT translate internal IP addresses to external IP addresses when passing through the firewall, hiding internal IP addresses from untrusted networks. NAT connections can be of any type including TCP/IP (with HTTP, FTP, etc.), ICMP, or UDP connections. The key identifier for NAT messages is NAT in the msg attribute. TCP Open Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=5 msg= Open outbound NAT proto=22/tcp src= srcport=1026 nat= natport=1026 dst= dstport=22 rule=2 Close Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=5 msg= Close outbound NAT proto=22/tcp src= srcport=1025 nat= natport=1025 dst= dstport=22 rule=2 duration=176 sent=847 rcvd=788 HTML Sessions Open Opening NAT d connections are not logged by default, but may be enabled as a debug aid. Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=5 msg= Open outbound NAT proto=80/tcp src= srcport=1569 nat= natport Close Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=5 msg= Accept outgoing NAT cat _ action=pass dstname= com proto=80/tcp src= srcport=1569 nat= natport=1569 dst= dstport=80 rule=2 op=get arg=/media/gb-group.jpg duration=47 sent=547 rcvd=340 ICMP Open Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=5 msg= Open outbound NAT proto=icmp src= srcport=3 nat= natport=3 dst= dstport=3 rule=2 Close Aug 30 11:19:46 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=5 msg= Close outbound NAT proto=icmp src= srcport=3 nat= natport=3 dst= dstport=3 rule=2 duration=70 sent=3240 rcvd=3240 UDP Open Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=5 msg= Open outbound NAT proto=53/udp src= srcport=1035 nat= natport=1035 dst= dstport=53 rule=1 Close Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=5 msg= Close outbound NAT proto=22/tcp src= srcport=1025 nat= natport=1025 dst= dstport=22 rule=2 duration=176 sent=847 rcvd= Reference E: Log Messages

273 Pass Through (No NAT) GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide Connections using IP pass through don t perform any NAT; internal IP addresses are fully apparent to untrusted networks. Pass through connections can be of any type including TCP/IP (with HTTP, FTP, etc.), ICMP, or UDP connections. Pass through messages are mostly identical to the messages for connections with NAT. The chief difference is the msg attribute will contain pass through instead of NAT. Other details in the message related to the accept/deny status, IP addresses, ports and others remain the same. The key identifier for pass through policy messages is pol _ type=pass. Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=4 pol _ type=pass pol _ action=block msg= Block PASS proto=23/ TCP src= srcport=1030 dst= dstport=23 interface=protected flags=0x2 Open Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=5 msg= Open outbound pass through proto=23/tcp src= srcport=1027 dst= dstport=23 Close Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=5 msg= Close outbound pass through proto=23/tcp src= srcport=1027 dst= dstport=23 duration=89 sent=444 rcvd=400 Bridged Interfaces Cabling Loop When a physical loop in the cabling exists in the network a log message is generated. Check physical wiring of hubs and switches to be sure no cables loop back into the same device. Bridged networks must be physically distinct. The key identifier for this type of message is msg= Bridging loop. Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=4 msg= Bridging loop (13) 00:00:5e:00:01:60->01:00:5e:00:00:12 External->Protected (muted) src= dst= Bridged Protocols Non-TCP/IP protocols may be encapsulated in a TCP/IP layer ( bridged ) to allow them to pass over the Internet, which requires TCP/IP. CAUTION No fi rewall policies are performed on bridged protocols; this can result in a weakening of your security perimeters. Great care should be taken in allowing bridged protocol packets. Denied protocols are logged only when the firewall is set to log invalid packets. If desired, allow packets of these protocol types by adding them to the bridged protocol list. The key identifier for bridged protocol messages is Bridged protocol in the msg attribute. Feb 2 13:28:53 pri=3 msg= Bridged protocol type 0x42 denied (00:08:83:08:82:2a->0 1:80:c2:00:00:00) Reference E: Log Messages 273

274 Firewall Service Notices Authentication Inbound security polices give permission for authentication connections to the firewall. Therefore every authentication log message is accompanied by an associated inbound security log message. Authentication log messages are also written for both successful open and close of an authenticated session. The key identifiers for authenticated connections are user= [Username] and RMCauth. Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=5 msg= Open inbound, NAT tunnel proto=smtp src= srcport=1753 user= Nick nat= natport=25 dnat= dnatport=1753 dst= dstport=25 rule=1 Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=6 msg= RMCauth: Allow support@gta.com, authentication successful. type=mgmt src= srcport=3630 dst= dstport=76 duration=7 Jun 13 11:06:52 pri=5 msg= AUTH: Assign , to Mary type=mgmt Jun 13 11:06:46 pri=5 msg= RMCauth: Accepted connection type=mgmt src= srcport=3630 dst= dstport=76 duration=1 Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=5 msg= RMCauth: Close connection type=mgmt src= srcport=3630 dst= dstport=76 duration=675 Jun 13 11:18:00 pri=5 msg= AUTH: Release , from Mary type=mgmt Tunnel accesses by an authenticated user are labeled with their account name. Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=5 msg= Open inbound, NAT tunnel proto=smtp src= srcport=1806 user= Nick nat= natport=25 dnat= dnatport=1806 dst= dstport=25 rule=1 Without a remote access policy, the authentication connection attempt will be denied. Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=4 pol _ type=ibp pol _ type=block msg= Rejecting unathenticated access (1) rule=1 proto=25/tcp src= srcport=1700 dst= dstport=25 interface=sis1 flags=0x2 Expired Authentication Session Users whose authenticated sessions have expired must authenticate again to gain access to restricted areas of the network. The key identifier for this message is Release in the msg attribute. Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=5 msg= USER: Release , from Nick type=mgmt Authentication Denied Due to Closed Authentication Connection If the authentication connection is closed, the user must reinitiate the authentication connection and complete it before they will be fully authenticated. The key identifiers for this event occur in a sequence of messages. First a message with RMCauth: Close connection in the msg attribute occurs; then, if the user attempts to continue authentication on the closed connection, a message with RMCauth: Deny [username], authentication failure in the msg attribute occurs. If the user reattempts authentication, a third message with RMCauth: Accepted connection in the msg attribute will occur. Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=5 msg= RMCauth: Close connection type=mgmt src= srcport=3569 dst= dstport=76 duration=17 Jun 13 11:04:38 pri=4 msg= RMCauth: Deny support@gta.com, authentication failure. type=mgmt src= srcport=3569 dst= dstport=76 duration=16 Jun 13 11:04:22 pri=5 msg= RMCauth: Accepted connection type=mgmt src= srcport=3569 dst= dstport= Reference E: Log Messages

275 Authentication Denied Due to Old GBAuth Version Versions of GBAuth prior to are not compatible with GB-OS 6.2. GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=3 msg= RMCauth: command authloginget (400) rejected, incorrect size. type=mgmt src= srcport=4192 dst= dstport=76 Gateway Selector The gateway selector service first listens for a series of failed pings to its beacons through the primary route (current default gateway). If these beacons remain unreachable ( no reply ), then a new default gateway is set. The key identifier for gateway selector messages is selector. Mar 4 21:06:44 selector: No reply from Mar 4 21:06:44 selector: No reply from Mar 4 21:06:44 selector: No reply from Mar 4 21:06:44 selector: Verification of default gateway failed. Mar 4 21:06:44 selector: Default gateway set to Notification from Gateway Selector If notification is selected, the gateway selector logs the notification when it is sent. NOTIFICATION TYPE: Default gateway change NAME: firewall.example.com DATE: Wed :59:18 EDT Default gateway changed to Intrusion Prevention System (IPS) IPS policies can be configured to generate a log message when they are triggered. The typical identifier for IPS log messages is msg= IPS:. The action= value declares the action performed by the triggered IPS policy. Connection Passed Apr 28 00:38:04 pri=4 msg= IPS: MISC MS Terminal server request action=pass rule _ id=1448 rule _ rev=13 classification= Generic Protocol Command Decode proto=3389/tcp src= srcport=2647 dst= dstport=3389 Connection Dropped Apr 28 01:21:16 pri=4 msg= IPS: BLEEDING-EDGE RDP connection confirm action=drop rule _ id= rule _ rev=5 classification= Misc activity proto=3007/tcp src= srcport=3389 dst= dstport=3007 Connection Reset Apr 28 00:45:13 pri=4 msg= IPS: BLEEDING-EDGE RDP connection confirm action=reset rule _ id= rule _ rev=5 classification= Misc activity proto=2681/tcp src= srcport=3389 dst= dstport=2681 Reference E: Log Messages 275

276 Mail Proxy Filtering By default, the Mail Proxy proxy will block all from reaching your server, and log each denied . proxy policies must be created to specify which you wish to allow. The typical identifier for Mail Proxy log messages is smtp _ action. Delivered Delivered is not logged by default. However, it may be enabled as a debug aid. Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=5 msg= SMTP: Close smtp _ action=pass virus= none found spam=unknown,2 rule=5 server= proto=smtp user= user@example.com srcuser= user2@source.com src= srcport=4711 dst= dstport=25 duration=2 sent=136 rcvd=1709 Rejected Due to Source or Destination of Policy If an proxy policy is set to reject all from a source or destination, that rejection will be logged. Additionally, the index number of the policy that triggered the rejection will be logged in the rule attribute. Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=4 msg= SMTP: Rejected (rule) smtp _ action=block rule=6 proto=smtp user= user@example.com srcuser= sender@source.com src= srcport=34813 dst= dstport=25 duration=2 sent=42 rcvd=67 Rejected Due to Exhaustion of Policies (Reject by Default If No Match Is Found) If no proxy policies exist, or an has exhausted the list of policies while looking for a match, the default rule to reject the is enacted. The key identifier is rule=0. Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=4 msg= SMTP: Rejected (rule) smtp _ action=block rule=0 proto=smtp user= user@example.net srcuser= sender@source.net src= srcport=2107 dst= dstport=25 duration=13 sent=70 rcvd=68 Rejected Due to Reverse DNS If the has matched an proxy policy specifying reverse DNS lookups and has failed the lookup, the log message will contain RDNS in its msg attribute. Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=4 msg= SMTP: Rejected (RDNS) smtp _ action=block rule=1 proto=smtp user= user@example.com srcuser= sender@source.com src= srcport=1696 dst= dstport=25 duration=10 sent=74 rcvd=60 Rejected Due to MAPS If the has matched an proxy policy specifying MAPS lookup and has failed the lookup, the log message will contain MAPS in its msg attribute. Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=4 msg= SMTP: Rejected (MAPS list.dsbl.org) smtp _ action=block rule=2 proto=smtp user= user@example.com,user2@example.com srcuser= spammer@ source.com src= srcport=2327 dst= dstport=25 duration=4 sent=111 rcvd= Reference E: Log Messages

277 Rejected Due to Invalid Recipient GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide If the initially matches a policy causing its acceptance, but the receiving server returns a code indicating that the recipient does not exist for its domain, the proxy may reject the . The key identifier for this type of message is 550 Invalid recipient in the msg attribute. Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=4 msg= SMTP: Server returned, 550 Invalid recipient <user@ example.com> type=mgmt proto=smtp user= user@example.com srcuser= sender@ source.com src= srcport=4599 dst= dstport=25 duration=5 If there is no spam or virus scanning enabled for that , you may see that message paired with one for an incomplete SMTP connection. This message occurs when the data is stopped during transmission. The internal server may have determined that an account does not exist, and cause the Mail Proxy proxy to terminate the SMTP data reception. Connection Incomplete If the transmission was incomplete, it is handled as a rejection. This could be caused by a premature termination from either the sender or recipient server. The key identifier for this type of message is Incomplete in the msg attribute. Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=4 msg= SMTP: Incomplete smtp _ action=block virus= not found spam=confirmed,96 rule=8 server= proto=smtp user= user@example.com srcuser= sender@source.com src= srcport=4599 dst= dstport=25 duration=5 sent=214 rcvd=2765 Maximum Count of Threads Exceeded If the Mail Proxy proxy has been overloaded with connection attempts (which generate proxy threads), some connections will be delayed or rejected. The key identifier for this type of message is Maximum number of threads exceeded in the msg attribute. Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=3 msg= SMTP: Maximum number of threads exceeded type=mgmt proto=smtp Mail Proxy Anti-Virus and Mail Proxy Anti-Spam Options If you have installed Anti-Spam or Anti-Virus options on your proxy, additional controls may be available to your proxy ACLs. These options have key identifiers of virus or spam in their associated log messages. Confirmed Spam by Anti-Spam but Delivered If the matching proxy ACL specified Anti-Spam scanning, but did not elect to reject or quarantine confirmed spam, it will be delivered normally. The key identifiers for this type of message are spam=confirmed and smtp _ action=pass. Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=4 msg= SMTP: Close smtp _ action=pass virus= none found spam=confirmed,99 rule=5 server= proto=smtp user= user@example.com srcuser= spammer@source.com src= srcport=3260 dst= dstport=25 duration=4 sent=110 rcvd=3396 Confirmed Spam by Anti-Spam and Quarantined If the matching proxy ACL specified Anti-Spam scanning, and elected to quarantine confirmed spam, it will be delivered to the indicated quarantine address. The key identifiers for this type of message are spam=confirmed and smtp _ action=quarantine. Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=4 msg= SMTP: Close smtp _ action=quarantine virus= none found spam=confirmed,98 rule=3 server= proto=smtp user= user@example.com srcuser= spammer@source.com src= srcport=4282 dst= dstport=25 duration=2 sent=110 rcvd=3549 Reference E: Log Messages 277

278 Virus Found by Anti-Virus and Cured Then Delivered If the matching proxy ACL specified Anti-Virus scanning, but did not elect to reject or quarantine viruses, Anti-Virus attempts to remove the virus from the attachment before it will be delivered normally. The key identifier for this type of message is virus=cured. Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=4 msg= SMTP: Close smtp _ action=block virus=cured, I-Worm. Bagle.au spam=unknown,50 rule=5 server= proto=smtp user= user@ example.com srcuser= sender@source.com src= srcport=4124 dst= dstport=25 duration=83 sent=82 rcvd= Virus Found by Anti-Virus but Delivered If the matching proxy ACL specified Anti-Virus scanning, but did not elect to reject or quarantine viruses, and the virus was not removable from the file, virus will be delivered normally. The key identifiers for this type of message are virus=[virus name] and smtp _ action=pass. Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=4 msg= SMTP: Close smtp _ action=pass virus= I-Worm.Bagle.as spam=unknown,64 rule=5 server= proto=smtp user= user@example.com srcuser= sender@source.com src= srcport=3364 dst= dstport=25 duration=10 sent=82 rcvd= Virus Found by Anti-Virus and Quarantined If the matching proxy ACL specified Anti-Virus scanning, and elected to quarantine viruses, virus will be delivered to the quarantine address. The key identifiers for this type of message are virus=[virus name] and smtp _ action=quarantine. Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=4 msg= SMTP: Close smtp _ action= quarantine virus= I-Worm. NetSky.q spam=confirmed,98 rule=5 server= proto=smtp user= user@ example.com srcuser= sender@source.com src= srcport=4272 dst= dstport=25 duration=5 sent=110 rcvd= Virus Found by Anti-Virus and Rejected If the matching proxy ACL specified Anti-Virus scanning, and elected to reject viruses, virus will be rejected. The key identifiers for this type of message are virus=[virus name] and smtp _ action=block. Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=4 msg= SMTP: Close smtp _ action=block virus= I-Worm.Bagle. au spam=unknown,50 rule=5 server= proto=smtp user= user@example. com srcuser= sender@source.com src= srcport=4124 dst= dstport=25 duration=83 sent=82 rcvd= Reference E: Log Messages

279 Headers headers, often invisible to a user unless they view the source or view it as plain text, contain information about delivery and processing. The Mail Proxy proxy adds additional SMTP X-headers to processed . These headers can help diagnostic or tracking processes. Some X-headers specifically track events of an proxy that has enabled Mail Proxy options. The GB prefix shows that this header was appended by a receiving GTA firewall. Headers can include: Note X-GB-Received: from domain.example.com ( ) by firewall.example.com (3.6.0) Lists the host that the originated from, followed by the host name and IP address of the receiving firewall. X-GB-From: sendername@example.com Lists the address of the sender. (The originating domain and the domain in the sender s are not necessarily the same.) X-GB-To: recipient@example.com Lists the address of the intended recipient. If an has been cleared from quarantine, this header allows the to be sent on to its final destination. X-GB-Mail-Format-Warning : Bad RFC2822 line length Describes a badly-formatted . X-GB-Rule : 5 Lists the proxy ACL that was matched. X-GB-AS Lists the spam category assigned to the (e.g. Confirmed or Suspect) and the score that caused the categorization. May describe any error conditions that occurred during Anti-Spam processing, causing it to not process the . These errors can include an expired Anti-Spam license or inability to contact the Anti-Spam license server. X-GB-AS-Summary Contains the Anti-Spam engine processing summary. X-GB-AV Lists any viruses found; if they could be removed from the , it will also say cured. May describe any error conditions that occurred during Anti-Virus processing, causing it to not process the . X-GB-Quarantined Lists the address that a quarantined was sent to. For ease of identifi cation, GTA recommends that the host name be a fully qualified domain name (FQDN), as in the example above. The fi rewall host name is entered in the HOST NAME fi eld of the Configuration>Network>Interfaces>Settings section. Reference E: Log Messages 279

280 VPN VPN connections tunnel network traffic over untrusted networks using authentication and encryption for security. If an IKE type of VPN is used, IKE messages may appear in the log ( IKE server ); another key identifier is type=mgmt, vpn. When the IKE server starts up due to firewall reboot or saving a VPN configuration section, the startup is logged, along with the number of allowed concurrent mobile users. Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=5 msg= WWWadmin: Starting IKE server. type=mgmt src= srcport=2206 dst= dstport=80 duration=2 Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :12:18 fw= ipsec pri=5 msg= Licensed for 100 mobile client connections. type=mgmt,vpn Failed VPN authentications are logged with the account name. Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=5 msg= RMCauth: Accepted connection type=mgmt src= srcport=2197 dst= dstport=76 Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=4 msg= RMCauth: Authentication failure for support@gta.com. type=mgmt src= srcport=2197 dst= dstport=76 duration=4 Security Associations By default, each IPSec security association (SA) creation is logged. VPN connections require at least two SAs. Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=5 msg= IPsec-SA established type=mgmt,vpn src= dst= Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=5 msg= IPsec-SA established type=mgmt,vpn src= dst= VPN phases occasionally expire and renew themselves to prevent attacks using compromised keys. After expiration, they must be renewed or the connection will be closed. Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= ipsec pri=5 msg= IPsec-SA established type=mgmt,vpn src= dst= Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= ipsec pri=5 msg= IPsec-SA expired type=mgmt,vpn src= dst= Mobile Client VPN Authentication and Connection Mobile clients must authenticate first before establishing a connection. Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=5 msg= RMCauth: Accepted connection type=mgmt src= srcport=2170 dst= dstport=76 Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=6 msg= RMCauth: Authentication successful for support@gta. com. type=mgmt src= srcport=2170 dst= dstport=76 duration=4 Attempts to connect without authentication will be denied. Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=4 msg= Authentication needed, access for support@gta.com denied. type=mgmt,vpn src= dst= Reference E: Log Messages

281 Web Content Filtering GB-OS 6.2 User s Guide On GTA firewalls utilizing content filtering, two different HTTP proxy mechanisms are possible: traditional proxy or transparent proxy. If the traditional proxy is used, each user must configure their browser to use a proxy (the IP address is that of the protected network interface of the firewall). The transparent proxy requires no configuration of the user s browser, as it occurs transparently with normal port 80 HTTP. Content policies can accept or deny TCP/IP packets based upon their HTTP content as well as their TCP/IP properties. Local content lists (LCLs) cause cat _ site to be Local Accept or Local Deny. Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=4 msg= Block outbound NAT cat _ action=block cat _ site= Local Deny dstname=ad.doublclk.net proto=80/tcp src=src= srcport=4991 nat= natport=4991 dst= dstport=80 rule=2 duration=22 sent=861 rcvd=60 pkts _ sent=3 pkts _ rcvd=1 op=get arg=/adi/caranddriver.lana. com/kw=;;ord= Persistent (secondary) web connections will be logged. Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=5 msg= Accept persistent outbound, NAT cat _ action=pass cat _ site= Reference dstname= proto=80/tcp src= srcport=1043 nat= natport=1043 dst= dstport=80 rule=5 duration=0 sent=633 rcvd=400 pkts _ sent=2 pkts _ rcvd=1 op=get arg=/images/example.gif Unknown HTTP commands being transmitted over HTTP ports (such as tunnels for non-http protocols such as AIM) may be blocked. The key identifier for this type of message is op=unknown. Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=4 msg= Block outbound, NAT cat _ action=block dstname= proto=80/tcp src= srcport=1688 nat= natport=1688 dst= dstport=80 rule=1 duration=22 sent=138 rcvd=94 pkts _ sent=3 pkts _ rcvd=2 op=unknown Saving the content policy preferences causes the HTTP proxy (transparent or traditional; proxywww ) to restart. Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=5 msg= proxywww: Surf Sentinel successfully initialized type=mgmt Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=6 msg= proxywww: Listening at port type=mgmt Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=6 msg= proxywww: Reinitializing. type=mgmt Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=5 msg= WWWadmin: Update of URL Access Lists. type=mgmt src= srcport=2447 dst= dstport=443 Saving an LCL (black list/white list) or an ACL (who should follow the black lists/white lists) causes the HTTP proxy to update and reinitialize. Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=5 msg= WWWadmin: Update of Local Content Lists. type=mgmt src= srcport=2460 dst= dstport=443 Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=6 msg= proxywww: Reinitializing. type=mgmt Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=5 msg= WWWadmin: Update of URL Access Lists. type=mgmt src= srcport=2447 dst= dstport=443 Mar 4 21:06:44 pri=6 msg= proxywww: Reinitializing. type=mgmt Attempts to use the HTTP proxy without policy permission for port 2784 (or other HTTP proxy port) will log an error. Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=4 pol _ type=rap pol _ action=block msg= Block RAP (25) rule=25 proto=2784/tcp src= srcport=1521 dst= dstport=2784 interface=external attribute= alarm flags=0x2 Reference E: Log Messages 281

282 Transparent Proxy A cat _ action=pass or cat _ action=block and a msg= Allow outgoing NAT or msg= Block outgoing NAT determines if a transparent proxy connection was accepted or denied. Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=5 msg= Allow outgoing NAT cat _ action=pass dstname= com cat _ site= Information Technology/Computers proto=80/tcp src= srcport=1439 nat= natport=1439 dst= dstport=80 rule=2 op=get arg=/ duration=43 sent=2701 rcvd=1141 Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=4 msg= Block outgoing NAT cat _ action=block dstname=www. playboy.com cat _ site= Pornography proto=80/tcp src= srcport=1454 nat= natport=1454 dst= dstport=80 rule=2 op=get arg=/ duration=25 sent=666 rcvd=44 Traditional Proxy A cat _ action=pass or cat _ action=block determines if a traditional proxy connection was accepted or denied. Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=5 msg= Proxy cat _ action=pass proto=80/tcp src= dst= cat _ site= Information Technology/Computers op=get dstname=www. gnatbox.com arg=/generateditems/csscriptlib.js Mar 4 21:06:44 firewall.example.com id=firewall time= :06:44 fw= firewall pri=4 msg= Proxy cat _ action=block proto=80/tcp src= dst= cat _ site= Pornography op=get dstname= arg=/ Web Filtering Option Web Filtering can cause traffic to be accepted or denied based upon their content category (look for a message such as msg= Accept outbound, NAT or msg= Block outbound, NAT ). If Web Filtering was used to determine packet acceptance or rejection, cat _ site will be set to the category of the content requested, such as Entertainment and Arts, Adult and Pornograpy or Hacking. Web Filtering can be used with either the transparent or traditional HTTP proxy. Persistent Connection message May 15 18:37:16 pri=5 msg= Accept persistent outbound, NAT cat _ action=pass cat _ site= Sports dstname= proto=80/tcp src= srcport=3817 nat= natport=3817 dst= dstport=80 rule=11 duration=6 sent=1205 rcvd=12709 pkts _ sent=11 pkts _ rcvd=12 op=get arg=/images/ newlogo.gif Accept message May 15 18:39:03 pri=5 msg= Accept outbound, NAT cat _ action=pass cat _ site= News and Media dstname=technology.timesonline.co.uk proto=80/tcp src= srcport=2452 nat= natport=2452 dst= dstport=80 rule=11 duration=327 sent=260 rcvd=636 pkts _ sent=5 pkts _ rcvd=3 op=get arg=/tol/img/ global/chevron-back-to-top.gif Deny message May 15 18:39:27 pri=4 msg= Block outbound, NAT cat _ action=block cat _ site= Adult and Pornography dstname= proto=80/tcp src= srcport=3827 nat= natport=3827 dst= dstport=80 rule=11 duration=22 sent=486 rcvd=48 pkts _ sent=3 pkts _ rcvd=1 op=get arg=/favicon.ico 282 Reference E: Log Messages

283 F Glossary 283

284 Reference F: Glossary 284 The following are common terms and phrases encountered when configuring a GTA firewall. A Address Object ARP Protocol ARP Table Authentication Automatic Policy B Bandwidth Bandwidth Capping (Bandwidth Limiting) BGP Bridged Interface Bridged Protocol C Content Filtering Crack D DHCP DHCP Lease DMZ DNS DNS Proxy Domain Name Dynamic (default) NAT Dynamic DNS E Proxy Encapsulation Ethernet Ethernet Card External Network F Failover Feature Firewall G Gateway H H 2 A High Availability Hop Count Host HTTP HTTP Proxy Reference F: Glossary I Inbound Security Policy Inbound Tunnel Interface Object Internal Network Intrusion Prevention System IP Address IP Alias IP Protocol IPSec Object L L2TP LAN LCL Lease Logical Network Log Message M Mail Proxy Mail Proxy Anti-Spam Mail Proxy Anti-Virus N NAT Net Mask Network Network Card Network Class Network Transparency Network Type NIC NTP O Object Option OSPF Outbound Security Policy P Packet Pass Through Policy Phishing Ping Policy Policy Type Port Scan PPP PPTP Private Network Protected Network Proxy PSN R Remote Administration Remote Logging RIP Router Routing Runtime S Secure SNMP Spam Spoofing SSL SSL Browser & Client Stateful Packet Inspection Static Address Mapping Static NAT Static Routes Stealth Mode Subnet Mask Subscription Syslog T TCP/IP Protocol Time Group Timeout Traceroute Traffic Shaping Traffic Shaping Object Trojan Tunnel U URL V Verification Virtual Crack Virus VLAN VPN VPN Certificate W Web Filtering Worm

285 Address Object ARP Protocol ARP Table Authentication Automatic Policy Bandwidth Bandwidth Capping (Bandwidth Limiting) BGP Bridged Interface Bridged Protocol Content Filtering Crack DHCP DHCP Lease DMZ An object type containing IP addresses, domain names or addresses. For example, creating the address objects Home Offi ce and Branch Offi ce with their respective IP address groups would help to rapidly reference those IP addresses in all areas of the fi rewall confi guration. Address Routing Protocol; one of the protocols fi rewalls and routers use when deciding how to send network traffi c to its destination. A data set containing the IP addresses of recently-determined routes; it is a cache used to speed routing, and may be fl ushed (erased) to force a router or fi rewall to update its routing information. Verifying the identity of a user, usually by testing that a user knows a valid account name and the secret value (password) associated with that record. A fi rewall policy that is part of inherent fi rewall logic, and is therefore not confi gurable by the administrator. A default, uneditable fi rewall policy that may only be enabled or disabled. The amount of network traffi c that may be sent per unit of time. Usually expressed in the units bits per second or kilobits per second (1 kilobit = 1,024 bits). Limiting bandwidth a host/network may send over time, and prioritizing which hosts/ networks should be allowed to reach that limit before allocating the remaining bandwidth to other hosts/networks. BGP (Border Gateway Protocol) is an Exterior Gateway Routing Protocol (EGRP) used for larger networks such as the Internet. BGP uses TCP port 179 to establish a connection between two or more routers. These routers are considered peers. Initially the routers exchange full routing information, once the connection is established the routers only send updates to their routing tables. A network interface whose network traffi c is selected to be transmitted to another network interface as if they were part of the same logical network. This is different from pass through hosts because it applies a static NAT/route to join discontiguous networks, rather than applying no NAT. A non-tcp/ip protocol selected to be transmitted without applying fi rewall policies. Denial of network content according to known content; this usually refers to denial of web page traffi c based upon the domain name or IP address range serving the web page, or by categorization within a content rating system. Local content lists provide basic domain/ip-based content fi ltering, while the Web Filtering option provides more sophisticated rating-based content fi ltering. An open network port; an exception or hole made in fi rewall policies to allow certain types of traffi c. Cracks must be carefully designed to allow desirable traffi c while still denying undesirable traffi c, otherwise network security may be compromised. Dynamic Host Control Protocol; a TCP/IP protocol used by a DHCP server to automatically assign IP addresses, assign gateways, and propagate DNS server information to network hosts. The amount of time before a host must renew the request for an IP address and DNS proxy information from the DHCP server. De-militarized zone; see PSN. Reference F: Glossary 285

286 DNS DNS Proxy Domain Name Dynamic DNS Dynamic (default) NAT Proxy Encapsulation Domain Name System; a TCP/IP protocol and same-named server or proxy that provides information to requestors about which domain names are found on an IP address. A service that passes on DNS information requests to a DNS server, and returns the response to the original requestor. Because it does not keep DNS records itself, it is not considered a DNS server, but only a requestor stand-in. A host name registered within a DNS hierarchy, such as firewall.example.com. This allows the convenience of referring to a host by an easily-remembered name rather than an IP address. A service that automatically receives dynamic (such as DHCP-driven) IP address updates to its DNS records, and propagates them. DNS normally assumes the use of hosts with static IP addresses, so a dynamic DNS service automates the DNS update process for hosts without static IP addresses. A NAT that is determined automatically by the fi rewall or router when network traffi c has been sent without an applicable static (manual) NAT. An SMTP server stand-in that serves to determine which communications should be allowed to reach the SMTP ( ) server, and to relay valid connections. See Mail Proxy. Wrapping a traffi c packet within another protocol to facilitate routing, add encryption, or bypass restrictions. For example, encapsulating HTTP traffi c within an SSH tunnel wraps HTTP within the SSH protocol commands and adds a layer of encryption. Figure F.1: How Encapsulation Works 286 Reference F: Glossary

287 Ethernet Ethernet Card External Network Failover Feature Firewall A family of TCP/IP and other protocols and networking hardware standards. Network card specializing in Ethernet communications. See Network Card. A network that is logically outside of the scope of fi rewall protection. Since all fi rewalls have limited processing power and not all networks are under your direct responsibility, it is desirable, for example, to put the Internet on the external network, where the fi rewall will not attempt to apply policies to traffi c passing into it. A mechanism for automatically replacing a failed unit with a functionally equivalent substitute unit. In networking, failovers are used to minimize interruptions in service when a hardware or software malfunction occurs. See H 2 A High Availability. An aspect of software functionality, either standard or optional. A network device specializing in security policy enforcement for the acceptance or denial of network traffi c. Because routers specialize in routing policy but lack sophisticated security policy enforcement tools, they should not be considered a substitute for a fi rewall. Gateway H 2 A High Availability Hop Count Host HTTP HTTP Proxy A default route, a host through which all outbound network traffi c must pass. If NAT is applied, outbound traffi c packets receive the external IP address of the gateway host when leaving the internal network. A failover service option available on select GTA fi rewalls. The number of network hosts, such as routers or fi rewalls, that a packet reaches before arriving at its fi nal destination. A computer or other network device such as a fi rewall or router. Hyper-Text Transfer Protocol; a TCP/IP protocol specializing in the transfer of web pages (HTML documents and their embedded media), typically used by web browsers like Internet Explorer, Firefox and Safari. An HTTP (web page) request stand-in service. On GTA fi rewalls, it may restrict transmitted web page traffi c requests based upon confi guration of Content Filtering policies. Inbound Security Policy A fi rewall policy affecting external connections to and through the fi rewall s external network interface, such as remote administration connections, user authentication connections, and VPN connections. Inbound Tunnel Interface Object Internal Network A fi rewall policy enacted to allow traffi c from external or PSN networks to protected or PSN networks. Tunnels are different from bridging because they may involve the application of NAT to hide the IP addresses and open ports of hosts on the internal, destination network. Because it typically applies NAT and is not an unconditional acceptance of network traffi c, inbound tunnels are not generally considered cracks. An object type containing network interface confi guration information, such as Ethernet/NIC or modem. A logically protected network; by default, GTA Firewall UTM Appliances allow all outbound traffi c from internal (protected or PSN) networks, but deny inbound traffi c from external (external or PSN) networks. Reference F: Glossary 287

288 Intrusion Prevention System IP Address IP Alias An Intrusion Prevention System (IPS) is used to protect hosts behind the GTA Firewall UTM Appliance by using policies that allow or deny traffi c based upon access control restrictions, rather than IP address or port restrictions. A number used with IP protocols to signify a host. Sometimes this also includes the subnet mask, a number which specifi es the network to which a host belongs. An IP address consists of four network class designation numbers, each ranging from 0 to 255, each separated by a period character; an example internal IP address is An IP address that is not the real IP address of a host, but is merely a pointer to a real IP address. By using an IP alias, fi rewall fi lters can create additional alias-based policies to refl ect more complex security policies. Figure F.2: Using IP Aliases IP Protocol IPSec Object L2TP A type of protocol hosts use to communicate with other hosts who also have an IP address. An object type storing confi guration data used by IPSec connections. Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol (L2TP) is a tunneling protocol used to support virtual private networks (VPNs). 288 Reference F: Glossary

289 LAN Local Area Network; typically the internal network, using Ethernet 10/100/1000 Mbps connections facilitated by Ethernet network cards. Simple LAN Setup Internet GB-2500 Internet Router (Gateway) Firewall Server Computers Switch Personal Computers Figure F.3: Simple LAN Setup LCL Lease Log Message Logical Network Local Content List; on GTA fi rewalls, a list of accepted and denied URLs used when the traditional or transparent HTTP proxy receives a host s request for web page network traffi c. A period of time that a host is given to possess a given resource. Typically this is a DHCP lease or VPN lease. A record that a host keeps of its activities. On GTA fi rewalls, messages use the WELF standard to record GB-OS and network activities. This is especially useful when tracing network attacks or unintentionally denied network traffi c. An organizationally separate part of a larger network. Hosts within a given logical network differ in some semantically important way from hosts on other logical networks, this is usually refl ected in the fi rewall confi guration. Basic GTA firewall logical network types include protected, PSN and external. Reference F: Glossary 289

290 Figure F.4: 3 Logical Network Types Mail Proxy The SMTP proxy on GTA fi rewalls. Mail Proxy options allow extended SMTP proxy features, such as virus and spam scanning. Mail Proxy Anti-Spam A subscription option providing categorization and acceptance, conditional acceptance (quarantine) or denial based upon spam-like characteristics. Mail Proxy Anti-Virus NAT Net Mask Network Network Card Network Class A feature providing acceptance, conditional acceptance (quarantine), or denial based upon the presence of a known virus in an attachment. Anti-Virus is available with a valid support contract. Network Address Translation; a dynamic (automatic) or static (manual) translation of source and destination of IP addresses applied to TCP/IP packet headers. This is usually used to hide the IP addresses and open ports of internal networks from potential attackers on outside networks. On GTA fi rewalls, NAT translation is kept in a connection state table, allowing for stateful packet inspection. See Subnet Mask. One or more hosts connected to each other with a communication method such as TCP/IP over Ethernet cables. Network Interface Card (NIC); a hardware device providing a type of connection point on the host for networks such as Ethernet or serial modem (PPP). The size level of a network, as determined by its subnet mask. For example, Class A networks (subnet mask of ) have up to 16,777,215 hosts or subnetworks, while Class B networks (subnet mask of ) have only up to 65,535 hosts or subnetworks. Most internal networks are typically Class C networks, containing up to 255 hosts or subnetworks. Network Transparency The ability for network-capable computer software to transmit data through the fi rewall without additional software workarounds, as if it were a router or other non-fi rewall network device. 290 Reference F: Glossary

291 Network Type NIC NTP Object Option OSPF Outbound Security Policy Packet See Logical Network. See Network Card. Network Time Protocol; this is used by NTP servers worldwide to synchronize clocks on hosts, assuring atomically accurate time stamps for the purpose of log stamping and other time-based software. A data set that is defi ned once but may be referred to many times throughout the GTA fi rewall confi guration. Types may include address objects, encryption objects, service group objects, time group objects or IPSec Objects. A non-standard feature that must be purchased separately; payment may be either one-time or subscription-based. OSPF (Open Shortest Path First Protocol) is an interior gateway routing protocol (IGRP). Using link state algorithm advertisements (LSA s) the router builds a database (LSDB) of the networks. OSPF uses protocol 89. A type of fi rewall rule affecting outbound traffi c. By default, all outbound traffi c from the protected network is allowed; outbound policies are useful when restricting certain internal hosts to accessing only certain external hosts, rather than the whole Internet. The basic unit of data transmission in TCP/IP computer networks. A packet contains a header portion, including the source and destination IP address of the data (for routing purposes), and a data portion, containing the portion of data payload. Size (MTU) of a TCP/IP packet is typically 1,500 bytes, but is adjustable. Figure F.5: The Packet Pass Through Policy A type of fi rewall fi lter describing traffi c that should not have NAT applied. This is different from a bridged interface because it bypasses NAT rather than applying a static route. Reference F: Glossary 291

292 Phishing Ping Port Scan Policy The use of communications such as , web pages or instant messages to present a fraudulent identity causing a person to divulge personal information to an attacker. For example, an attacker might send an that looks like a bank communication with a link to a web page, asking recipients to click the link and confi rm some bank information, where the attacker then gathers their account information. Restrictive security policies on a fi rewall s and web proxy combined with user education can successfully combat phishing attacks. A network connectivity test that sends ICMP packets to a host and times the response, if any. Also, software of the same name. A systematic test for open ports within a network. By identifying open communication ports, points of network security weakness and potential points of attack can be found, so this information is frequently gathered as a security tool, although it is also used by attackers; nmap is some software frequently used to perform port scans. A fi rewall rule to accept or deny network traffi c, fi ltering out undesirable network traffi c transmission according to your network security policy. GTA fi rewalls may employ ACLs to confi gure fi lter behavior. How to Connect Through the Firewall Internet inbound traffic Inbound security policies Tunnels and pass-through policies Mail Proxy and Content Filtering/Web Filtering Static address maps and pass-through policies GB Outbound policies outbound traffic If you can t connect through the firewall: 1. Is access allowed? (inbound/outbound policies) 2. Is the connection routable? (tunnels/static address maps/pass-through) 3. Is the content permissable (if the connection is proxied)? (Mail Proxy/Content Filtering/Web Filtering) Figure F.6: How to Connect Through the Firewall Policy Type Fundamentally, all fi rewall fi lters are rules about traffi c acceptance or denial. Basis of accepted or denied traffi c may include time, location on a logically internal (protected or PSN) or external network, or protocol type. 292 Reference F: Glossary

293 PPP PPTP Private Network Protected Network Proxy PSN Remote Administration Remote Logging RIP Router Routing Runtime Secure SNMP Point-to-Point Protocol; a protocol frequently used to negotiate serial modem network connections. The Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) is a method for implementing virtual private networks. PPTP uses a control channel over TCP and a GRE tunnel operating to encapsulate PPP packets. An internal (protected or PSN) network. A logical network type. It is most protected by default, as all outgoing connections are allowed but all unsolicited inbound connections are denied. A type of internal network, typically the LAN. A stand-in between a requestor host and a server that mediates requests, such as an HTTP proxy or SMTP proxy. Because proxies are an intermediate point, they are also a point where policy enforcement can occur, such as refusing invalid connections or refusing web page requests to inappropriate URLs. Private Service Network; a type of semi-internal network that is protected by the fi rewall, but has many more open ports ( cracks ) to allow for services made available to the external network. Because it is less sheltered than the protected network type, it is logically separate. GTA s DMZ provides additional protection over the standard DMZ implementation, and so is called a PSN instead. A method or its software used to confi gure the fi rewall through the network without a direct console connection (serial, terminal or monitor and keyboard). If performed from the external network, this requires an inbound security policy to allow that connection. Providing a copy of fi rewall event notices on a network host other than the fi rewall. This is useful as a diagnostic and recovery tool, especially since attackers fi rst objectives is to remove attack evidence such as logs from compromised hosts. Routing Information Protocol; a way of distributing best-known routing information amongst a group of routers and fi rewalls on a network experiencing heavy traffi c. A network device whose primary function is to route network traffi c packets to their correct destination. Because routers do not provide frameworks for security policy enforcement but are merely traffi c directors, they should not be considered a replacement for a fi rewall. The reception and redirection of a network packet according to delivery rules. Static and dynamic routing rules, as well as router protocols, help a router or fi rewall to determine network traffi c paths (routes). A runnable software program. On GTA fi rewalls, this is the fi rewall software that runs on appliances and software fi rewalls. Protected from harm; in computing, this usually also implies that access has been restricted, authentication has been used, and encryption has been applied as measures of knowing all users of the computing resources, logging unusual behavior, and cryptographically protecting resource information from unauthorized users. Simple Network Management Protocol; a way of sending router or firewall confi guration information among a group of routers or fi rewalls, making it faster to confi gure groups of network appliances. Without authentication and encryption, this is inherently insecure, but the third version of the protocol has enabled a secure version. Reference F: Glossary 293

294 Spam Spoofing SSL SSL Browser & Client Stateful Packet Inspection Static Address Mapping Static NAT Static Routes Stealth Mode Unsolicited bulk . While some security professionals do not consider spam to be a security threat, there is an increasing correlation between spam, electronic fraud and worms that may make spam a signifi cant security threat. GTA fi rewalls equipped with Mail Proxy Anti-Spam can reduce spam transmission. Presenting a fraudulent identity such as an or IP address in the attempt to pose as a known person or host, or gaining access to network resources. GTA fi rewalls prevent spoofi ng by maintaining a connection table, checking against it to make sure that connections arrive on expected channels, and performing other policy checks on all incoming traffi c to verify its authenticity. Secure Socket Layers; a way of providing authenticated and encrypted communications using certifi cates or keys; this is primarily used for secure web browser communications, but is used in many other ways as well. GTA s remote access SSL Browser and Client. On GTA fi rewalls, a system of checks that is performed on each network packet to verify that it meets transmission expectations logically deduced from the routing state table. Packets that do not meet these expectations are attacks such as IP address spoofs, and are denied. A routing rule that directs outbound NAT d traffi c through an IP alias other than the default route. Default NAT is automatically determined, but in some cases a pre-determined IP address translation for outgoing traffi c is desirable, and a manual (static) NAT mapping may be applied. A routing rule that overrides the subnet mask gateway indicator when determining whether a network packet is outbound traffi c or internal traffi c. For example, packets from an IP address of on a class C network could be routed to another internal class C IP address of using a static route, even though their class C subnet masks of would normally indicate routing the traffi c externally. A set of fi rewall rules specifying that no ping or traceroute requests for the fi rewall IP from the external network should be answered. Because this means that the fi rewall cannot be seen using these conventional connection tests, it is hidden from some network scans. Subnet Mask A numerical exclusion value often shown as an IP address, like (which assigns all IP addresses beginning with the same nine numbers to the same internal subnetwork), that shows which network (or subnetwork) an IP address belongs to. Without a static route, IP addresses outside the range indicated by the subnet mask are assumed to be external traffi c, and hence the packets are routed to the gateway. Subscription Syslog TCP/IP Protocol Time Group GTA fi rewall optional features that require periodic renewal fees. A style of logging and same-named Unix software that facilitates both local and remote event logging. A group of defi ned network behaviors that allow networked hosts to exchange data. A method of defi ning time-dependent fi lters on GTA fi rewalls. 294 Reference F: Glossary

295 Timeout Traceroute Traffic Shaping Traffic Shaping Object Trojan Tunnel The expiration of a waiting period for an expected event. For example, many network connections have timeouts, after which the connection is closed if there is no further data transmission. A network connectivity test that uses ICMP packets to determine which routers or fi rewalls that packets encounter on their way to a given destination by gradually increasing the hop count and waiting for a hop count expiration response after each increase. Also, software of the same name. Bandwidth Limiting. Because a fi nite amount of data can be transmitted per time unit, the resource must sometimes be allocated according to need and priority. On GTA fi rewalls, traffi c shaping policies apply bandwidth need and priority policies. Also, an object type that stores a traffi c shaping confi guration. An object that defi nes traffi c shaping policies that may be applied to traffi c passing through a GTA fi rewall. A type of computer virus that might normally be prevented, but uses psychological tricks to convince users to activate them and unwittingly override other security measures. The path established by one network to send its data via another network s connections. Tunneling works by encapsulating a network protocol within packets carried by the second network. Sometimes also called port forwarding. How IPSec Tunnels Work Tunnels encrypt/encapsulate packets within other packets to facilitate routing (non-ip protocol traffic over the Internet, TCP/IP port redirection) and security (encryption). VPN and SSH connections are types of frequently tunneled connections. Interne net GB Packet sent with internal source IP address. 2 To :222 To : Outgoing port and external IP address wrapper added by the source s gateway. Encryption may be added. A destination tunnel gateway removes the wrapper, allowing packets to be routed to an internal destination. Additional encryption is removed. 4 Destination receives packets. Figure F.7: How Tunnels Work URL Uniform Resource Locator; the protocol prefi x, host address and fi le location of a network resource, such as a web page or folder. An example is index.php. Reference F: Glossary 295

296 Verification Virtual Crack Virus VLAN In authentication, the process of checking provided credentials for a match with known acceptable credentials. This may include checking the user name and/or a password and/or an SSL certifi cate. A temporary, automatic crack created by the fi rewall when stateful packet inspection determines that a secondary connection is necessary and allowable. Because fi rewalls are by defi nition security policy enforcement devices, cracks in this security are not advisable but sometimes nevertheless necessary to provide application functionality. Virtual cracks used by GTA fi rewalls reduce administrator burden and security risk by minimizing the amount of risk time and human error normally associated with the creation of cracks. A self-replicating computer program that attempts to spread itself to other computers, usually with unauthorized methods and usually with bad effects. Computer viruses exist for many kinds of electronic devices, including cell phones and computers, and are considered a compromise of network security. Viruses can be denied with anti-virus scanning software such as Mail Proxy Anti-Virus and with secure network policies enacted on the fi rewall. Virtual Local Area Network; a network of computers that behave as if they are connected to the same wire even though they may actually be physically located on different segments of a LAN. VLANs are confi gured through software rather than hardware, which makes them extremely fl exible. VPN How VPNs Work Virtual private networks use two things to connect external hosts securely: authorization and encryption. 1a Virtual Private Network; a combined method of packet encapsulation (tunneling), authentication and encryption used to connect a host on an external, untrusted network (e.g. the Internet) to the internal (private) network. Secure VPN connections are typically used by travelers, remote offi ces or telecommuters to access internal network resources from abroad without creating cracks that could compromise internal network security. Internet unauthorized host 1b firewall with VPN option (VPN gateway) internal network GB authorized host with VPN client/gateway software, which handles authorization and encryption 2 1. Authorization ensures that only trusted hosts can gain network access. If a computer has not logged in with the VPN gateway (GTA firewall), the connection is denied (1a). If a computer provides authorization credentials such as a password and pre-shared secret, the VPN gateway adds the computer to its list of computers allowed to connect (1b). 2. Encryption defeats interception of traffic by scrambling data. Once authorized, a computer can use encryption to prevent digital eavesdropping ( packet sniffing ) by any in-between points on the Internet, including unauthorized hosts. Figure F.8: How VPNs Work 296 Reference F: Glossary